JP7159690B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start to rotate and stop while the reels are rotating. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reels stops. Then, when the result of stopping the reels corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-exemplified gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of the circulation bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
A lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at a predetermined position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, and a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result. a privilege granting means capable of granting
with
A first game state and a second game state in which the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is more likely to stop than in the first game state are set,
Means capable of shifting from the first game state to the second game state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition;
Means capable of shifting from the second game state to the first game state or another game state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition;
a means capable of acquiring specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a storage means capable of storing the specific information;
with
The storage means has a configuration capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information,
specific determination means capable of executing a specific determination of causing a specific event by using at least the specific information stored in the storage means and the lottery result of the lottery means;
means capable of causing the specific event when the determination result of the specific determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
with
The end condition can be satisfied in the number of games less than the predetermined number,
The specific determination means uses predetermined specific information acquired in the first game state and stored in the storage means and a lottery result by the lottery means in the second game state to make the specific determination. is executable.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal game states. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining reel stop control; 4 is a flowchart showing RT state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 3rd RT states. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of display modes; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section transition lottery processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a first special winning combination process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second special combination process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing for addition information. 13 is a flow chart showing a third special combination process; 4 is a flow chart showing processing for a specialized zone; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining main results of a lottery related to an instruction function and setting differences between winning probabilities; It is a figure which shows an example of an advantageous area transition lottery table and an AT mode transition lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a portent game number table; It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table and an addition game number lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of remaining games in the actual advantageous section and the number of remaining games on the display; It is a figure which shows an example of a back-up lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition alerting|reporting timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for mode change alerting|reporting. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; It is a flow chart which shows pushing process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing game number management processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing end determination processing; It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing remaining game number management processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing remaining number management processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the start game and end game of the advantageous section and the display of the section indicator; 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a betting effect setting process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. 10 is a flow chart showing a process for notification of pressing order. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. 10 is a flowchart showing a bonus effect setting process; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for notification of a transition opportunity. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous production|presentation setting process. It is a figure which shows the relationship between an alerting|reporting timing and an additional effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of continuous production. 10 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing; It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of the information storage area for lottery. 10 is a flowchart showing random number shift processing; It is a figure which shows an example of an AT mode transition lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the AT counter value for AT mode transition winning and the lottery result of the game; It is a flowchart which shows the process for a pending|holding display. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; It is a figure which shows the relationship between the kind of special image as a hold display, and an AT counter. 10 is a flowchart showing pending shift processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an outline of an AT mode transition lottery using an AT counter and game lottery results; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an outline of an AT mode transition lottery using an AT counter and game lottery results; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the difference in winning probability of a specific combination for each game state; It is a figure for demonstrating the degree of expectation of the special image for every game state. 10 is a flowchart showing status display start processing. 9 is a flowchart showing status display update processing; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a special image and situation display; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a special image and situation display; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a special image and situation display; 13 is a flow chart showing pending display processing in Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining how a special image is displayed; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing BB winning game adjustment processing in Modification 2. FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a special image and situation display; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an outline of the pattern arrangement of each reel in Modification 3; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an outline of a lottery information storage area in the second embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of an AT mode transition lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing; 10 is a flowchart showing random number shift processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an outline of an AT mode transition lottery using an AT counter and game lottery results; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an outline of an AT mode transition lottery using an AT counter and game lottery results; 10 is a flowchart showing random number shift processing in modification 1. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an outline of an AT mode transition lottery using an AT counter and game lottery results; In Modified Example 2, (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the transition relationship of each state, and (b) is a diagram for explaining conditions for ending each bonus. It is a figure which shows an example of an AT mode transition lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an outline of an AT mode transition lottery using an AT counter and game lottery results; 10 is a flowchart showing initial random number acquisition processing in the third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing initial random number acquisition processing in Modification 1. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing initial random number acquisition processing in modification 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a conversion table. 14 is a flowchart showing initial random number acquisition processing in Modification 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1RT state in 4th Embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 4th RT states. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the award given, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the difference in winning probability of a specific combination for each game state. It is a figure which shows an example of an AT mode transition lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing; 10 is a flowchart showing random number shift processing; It is a flow chart which shows processing for special information. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing fourth RT transition processing; FIG. (a) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the AT counter and the cherry counter and watermelon counter stored in each storage area; It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship with. 10 is a flowchart showing special notification processing in Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing fourth RT transition processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing in Modification 2. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing integrated value information processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table in modification 3; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the difference in winning probability of a specific combination for each game state; FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining a specific area that tends to win an AT mode transition win in the fifth embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing; 4 is a flowchart showing processing for CZ mode; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the AT counters stored in each storage area and the CZ mode effect;

<First Embodiment>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven to rotate individually by driving the stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 21 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “red bell” symbol (for example, the 7th on the left reel 32L), a “white bell” symbol (for example, the 20th on the left reel 32L), and a “first replay” symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L). 3rd), “second replay” symbol (e.g., 6th on left reel 32L), “red 7” symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), “watermelon” symbol (e.g., 8th on left reel 32L) , “Cherry” symbol (eg, 4th on left reel 32L), “Black BAR” symbol (eg, 18th on left reel 32L), “White BAR” symbol (eg, 17th on left reel 32L), “LUCKY There are 11 types of symbols (for example, the 5th on the left reel 32L) and "young man" symbols (for example, the 0th on the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, combinations of symbols stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on a bending line L6 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by the number of bets of medals and a line that is not activated are set. When a prize is established, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is given, or a privilege of shifting the game state is given. On the other hand, if the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not given.

In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 8(a), only the lower right line L4 is the active line, and as shown in FIG. 8(b), two lower lines L3 and lower right line L4 There is a case where the combined line is the valid line and a case where only the bend line L6 is the valid line as shown in FIG. 8(c). More specifically, when three medals are betted and the game is started, only the lower right line L4 is the active line, and when two medals are betted and the game is started, the lower line is the active line. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as valid lines. Also, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is set as the effective line. The three combined lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward right line L5 are never regarded as valid lines. In the following, a game that starts with 3 medals bet is a 3-bet game, a game that starts with 2 medals bet is a 2-bet game, and a game that starts with 1 medal is bet. Also known as a one-bet game.

9 to 11 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 41st small winning combination.

The "red bell" or "white bell" pattern on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" pattern on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" pattern on the right reel 32R are on the effective line. When it stops, it becomes the 1st minor winning combination. When the first minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 2nd minor winning prize to the 26th minor winning prize have different winning symbol combinations. "White BAR" pattern, "Red 7" pattern, "Cherry" pattern, "White Bell" pattern or "LUCKY" pattern, right reel 32R "White BAR" pattern, "Youth" pattern, "White Bell" pattern, A "red 7" symbol or a "second replay" symbol stops on the upper line L1, that is, the "bell" symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. For example, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper stage, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, and the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stops at the lower stage. If you do, you will win the 8th minor role. As shown in FIG. 6, the middle reel 32M has a "cherry" symbol (No. 11) and a "red bell" symbol at a position adjacent to the upstream side (No. 12), and the right reel 32R has: A "red bell" design is arranged at a position (20th) separated by one design upstream from the "white BAR" design (18th). Therefore, when the eighth minor win is established on the right-downward line L4, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R is stopped on the upper line L1. When the 2nd minor winning combination to the 26th minor winning combination are established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 27th minor combination is a combination in which whether or not a prize is won is determined by the stop symbol on the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, "Cherry" on the left reel 32L. The 27th minor winning prize is established when the symbol stops at the upper stage or the lower stage. In this case, the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L is up or stopped. By stopping, the 27th minor winning combination is established. When the 27th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 28th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbols on the left reel 32L stop at the upper or lower stage, and the "cherry" symbols stop together on the lower right line L4. More specifically, "cherry" symbols or "second replay" symbols on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols, "white bell" symbols or "cherry" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "cherry" symbols on the right reel 32R, When the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops, the 28th minor winning combination is won. When the 28th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As a supplementary explanation of the relationship between the 27th small winning combination and the 28th small winning combination, when the "cherry" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L stops, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, Although the 27th minor winning combination is established, the 28th minor winning combination may be established instead of the 27th minor winning combination depending on the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. That is, although the winning mode of winning the 27th minor role includes the winning mode of winning the 28th minor role, the 27th minor role winning and the 28th minor role winning are clearly distinguished and determined. is done.

The 29th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which a "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line. In other words, when the downward-sloping line L4 is the effective line, the 29th minor winning combination is established by stopping all the "watermelon" symbols downward-sloping. When the 29th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 30th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the left reel 32L "watermelon" symbol, the middle reel 32M "watermelon" symbol, and the right reel 32R "watermelon" symbol stop on the upper line L1. More specifically, when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, the 30th small Awarded for the role. When the 30th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"Black BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "red bell" symbol or "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the "bell" symbol and stop on the active line, the 31st minor winning combination is won. When the 31st minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

For the 32nd to 35th minor wins, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 36th minor winning prize is obtained when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, for example, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L. , the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the activated line, while the "watermelon" symbol on the remaining reels does not stop on the activated line. When the 36th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

A "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "black BAR" symbol, a "watermelon" symbol, or a "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red bell" symbol or "white" symbol on the right reel 32R. If the "bell" symbol and the "young man" symbol stop on the active line, the 37th small winning combination is won. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol (No. 7) and a "second replay" symbol are arranged at a downstream adjacent position (No. 6). "Bell" symbols (3rd, 12th, 15th, 20th) and "1st replay" symbols are arranged at adjacent downstream positions (2nd, 11th, 14th, 19th). On the right reel 32R, the main "red bell" symbols (2nd, 5th, 12th, 20th) and adjacent positions (3rd, 6th, 16th, 0th) on the upstream side are "1st A "replay" pattern or a "second replay" pattern is arranged, and a "first replay" pattern is arranged at a position (11th) adjacent to the "white bell" pattern (10th) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the 37th minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4, mainly the "Bell" symbol and the "Replay" symbol are tense on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, while the middle reel 32M is displayed. "Bell" symbols and "Replay" symbols do not stop, which is a so-called double-tenpai-out stop result. When the 37th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"White BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R, When the "watermelon" symbol and the "black BAR" symbol stop on the active line, the 38th small winning combination is won. In the 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the number 4 "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper and lower stages, and the 38th minor winning combination is established, the left A "red bell" symbol on the reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the middle line L2. When the 38th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “black BAR” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 39th minor role. The 39th minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in a 3-bet game. When the 39th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “red 7” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 40th minor role. The 40th minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in a 3-bet game. When the 40th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 41st small Awarded for the role. When the 41st minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

Winnings to which the privilege of replaying that the next game can be played without inserting medals are provided include first to twelfth replaying winnings. Further, when the second re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-game. When the winning or the fifth replay winning is established, the game state shifts to the third RT state. Then, when the 11th re-game win or the 12th re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the 4th RT state.

State transition winnings in which only game state transition is performed include 1st BB winning, 2nd BB winning and CB winning.

When the "red 7" symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on the active line, the first BB prize is won, and the game state shifts to the first BB state. Further, when the "white BAR" symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop on the activated line, the second BB prize is won, and the game state shifts to the second BB state. "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "Watermelon" symbols, "First Replay" symbols, and "Black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R. , stops on the active line, it is a CB prize. When the CB winning is established, the game state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although it is different from winning, there is a stop outcome in which the game state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the left reel 32L has a "red bell" pattern or a "white bell" pattern, and the middle reel 32M has a "white BAR" pattern, a "LUCKY" pattern, a "red 7" pattern, a "white bell" pattern, and a "white bell" pattern. When the "cherry" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R, and the "first replay" symbol stop on the active line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The left reel 32L has a "red bell" or "white bell" pattern, the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" pattern, and the right reel 32R has a "white BAR" pattern, a "young man" pattern, and a "white bell" pattern. , “red 7” symbols, and “second replay” symbols stop on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Hereinafter, the combinations of the above symbols are referred to as transitional numbers.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to a main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

A first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time is provided on the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 , and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56 . The second credit insert switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insert switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at once. The credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium.

Between the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, an effect switch 66 is provided which is operated when the effect is generated. That is, a first credit input switch 56 and a third credit input switch 58 are provided to the left of the effect switch 66, and a second credit input switch 57 is provided to the right of the effect switch 66. there is

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining number of payouts for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display part 62, there is a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the operation order. An instruction monitor 68 having an interval indicator for indicating an advantageous interval, which is an interval in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of the minor combination, is provided. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 101 is provided with a role ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between the game state that is advantageous to the player and the state that is not. The role ratio monitor 77 is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12 and to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the game machine. Contained. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be visually recognized even through the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R. The role ratio monitor 77 cannot be checked unless the front door 12 is opened. Note that the role ratio monitor 77 will be described later in detail.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a third credit. A third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the insertion switch 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and the setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73a for detecting that a setting key has been inserted and turned on are connected. It's becoming

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volts in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are input. It is connected via the output port 104 .

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the status information storage area 106c for storing the game status such as the BB status, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is performed when the power is turned off by power failure processing (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is performed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), the input side of which is connected to the main control device 101, and the output side of which the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are connected. there is Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for the sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66). The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is being output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed in the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, and the payout number display section 62 is performed. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to the game will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, processing is performed to automatically insert 3 virtual medals, and when a replay win is established in a 1-bet game, 1 coin is executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, when any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay winnings has been established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing step S107 of the timer interrupt processing, When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither medal insertion nor operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After completion of the start waiting process, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as the specified number in the CB state, and game states other than the CB state (specifically, the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the "1" and "3" are set as the prescribed numbers in the 4RT state and BB state). That is, in the CB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the bet number is "2", and in other than the CB state, the bet number is "1" or "3". , an affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a game state other than the CB state, if no medals have been betted, or if the number of bets is "2" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, a mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. Such shift notification processing will be described later in detail.

After the processing of step S206 is performed, a bet command including information on the processing result of step S206 and information on the number of bets for which affirmative determination was made in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device. set as the output target of The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the bet command will be described later in detail.

After executing the processing of step S207, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S208. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game is started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S209, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the active line, and in the 2-bet game, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as the active lines. Also, in the 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as the effective line. In step S210, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. Thereafter, lottery processing in step S211, reel control processing in step S212, medal payout processing in step S213, RT state processing in step S214, and bonus state processing in step S215 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. The slot machine 10 has six types of game states, namely, a normal game state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a fourth RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. A table is set for each game state.

That is, in step S302, the current game state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the bet number and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the bet number and the game state is selected. . For example, when the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state, and the lottery table for the normal game state is displayed. select. In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. When the start lever 41 is operated while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, this operation is taken as the confirmation operation of the setting value, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. do. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 17 is a lottery table for normal game state selected in the normal game state of "setting 3". An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, it is determined in step S306 whether or not any of the 1st BB, 2nd BB, and CB has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether an affirmative determination is made in step S305 with an index value IV (IV=34 to 54) including any one of the first BB, second BB, and CB. When an affirmative determination is made in step S306, a process of setting corresponding bonus winning flags (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag) in the winning flag storage area 106a is performed in step S307. If a negative determination is made in step S306 or after the processing of step S307 is performed, in step S308, the winning flag of each minor combination corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S305 is stored in the winning flag storage area. 106a is set. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=34, the 1st BB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th minor winning flag, the 33rd minor winning flag and the 33rd minor winning winning flag are set in step S308. 35 Set a minor winning flag. When the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=17, a winning flag indicating that the 30th and 41st minor wins have been won is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S308.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (1BB winning flag) indicating that the 1BB has been won or a winning flag (2BB winning flag) indicating that the 2BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

It should be noted that in steps S306 to S308 in a state in which the 1BB winning flag or the 2BB winning flag is carried over, if a combination other than the 1BB, 2BB and CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, If a winning combination other than the second BB and CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=34, the 1st BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th minor combination winning flag is not set. , the 33rd minor winning combination winning flag and the 35th minor winning combination winning flag are set. In addition, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the index value IV=35 and the determination value DV exceeds 65535, the 28th minor winning flag and the 33rd winning flag are not set. A small win flag and a 35th minor win win flag are set.

A lottery table is separately prepared in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, and in the state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. may be configured to perform In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV should be set so as not to win the 1st BB, 2nd BB, and CB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, 1 is added to the index value IV in step S309, and in the following step S310, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 to continue the determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV. By the way, when judging the winning combination using the lottery table shown in FIG. The probability of winning the lottery (the probability of winning when IV = 15) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning the low cherry (the probability of winning when IV = 16) is about 1/183. be. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 17) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 18) is about 218. 1. The probability of winning Chance A (probability of winning when IV=19) is about 1/252, and the probability of winning Chance B (probability of winning when IV=20) is about 252. 1/1. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 21) is about 1/32,800, and the probability of winning the no-question bell (probability of winning when IV = 22) is about 65,500. 1. The odds of winning forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, sandwich push bell 1, and sandwich push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 23 to 26) are about 1/43.7, middle push bell The probability of winning 1, middle-pressed bell 2, right-pressed bell 1, and right-pressed bell 2 (probability of winning when IV=27 to 30) is about 1/21.8, respectively. The probability of winning the high cherry stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 34) is about 1/21800, and the probability of winning the high cherry stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is About 1/21800, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV=36) is about 1/32800, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 2 (when IV=37 The probability of winning is approximately 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is about 1/32800, and the probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is It is about 1/32800. The probability of winning the weak watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 40) is about 1/65500, the probability of winning the weak watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 41) is It is approximately 1 in 65,500. The probability of winning chance A overlap 1, chance A overlap 2, chance B overlap 1, and chance B overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=42 to 45) is about 1/32800. The probability of winning middle bell overlap 1 and middle bell overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=46, 47) is about 1/21800, respectively. The probability of winning Special Ap A Duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 48) is about 1/1010, the probability of winning Special Ap A Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 49) ) is about 1/1310. The probability of winning Special Ab Duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 50) is about 1/1010, the probability of winning Special Ab Duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 51) ) is about 1/1310. The probability of winning the first BB and the second BB alone (probability of winning when IV=52, 53) is about 1/32800, respectively. The probability of winning CB (probability of winning when IV=54) is about 1/19.9. Also, the probability of not winning any role is about 1/1.96.

Note that 0 is set for the point values PV of IV=2 to 14, 31 to 33, and 55 to 58 in the lottery table for the normal game state. Therefore, in the normal game state, winning is not possible with these index values IV.

After the winning flag is set in step S308, or when it is determined in step S310 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S311, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step S312, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S311, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S312, a lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S314, stop information setting processing is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information is set according to the winning combination based on the winning flag set in steps S306 to S308. For example, when a strong cherry is won (winning when IV=15) and the strong cherry winning flag is set, the symbols corresponding to the 28th small winning combination, the 32nd small winning combination to the 35th small winning combination are displayed on each reel 32L. , 32M, and 32R are set to stop symbol information. In addition, when the strong cherry overlap 1 is won (winning when IV=34) and the strong cherry winning flag and the 1 BB winning flag are set, the 28th minor winning combination, the 33rd minor winning combination, the 35th minor winning combination and the 1st minor winning combination are set. The stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1BB winning can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

In subsequent step S315, when a plurality of stoppable pattern information is set in step S314, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win cannot be achieved, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, when the strong cherry overlap 1 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th small combination, the 33rd small combination, the 35th small combination and the 1BB winning is set, the 28th is selected rather than the 1BB winning. The order of priority is set so that the small winning combination, the 33rd small winning combination, and the 35th small winning combination are preferentially established. In addition, when special reply A duplication 1 is won and stop pattern information corresponding to the 9th replay and 1BB win is set, the 9th replay win is established with priority over the 1BB win. set the priority so that Then, for example, in a situation where the 1BB win is carried over, if the normal replay is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 1BB win and the 1st replay win is set, then the 1BB win is higher than the 1BB win. The order of priority is set so that 1 re-game winning is preferentially established.

Here, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning re-games always wins when the re-game is won. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

Further, when a plurality of minor winning combinations or multiple replays are won in duplicate, which symbol corresponding to the minor winning combination or replay is stopped on the active line depends on the timing of the stop operation. For example, when the strong watermelon is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 30th and 41st minor wins is set, as described above, the left The target symbol of the reel 32L is commonly the "watermelon" symbol. Therefore, depending on the timing of the stop operation of the left reel 32L, it is not determined which minor win is established. On the other hand, the target symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are both "red bell" symbols for the 30th minor winning combination, and "cherry" and "black BAR" symbols for the middle reel 32M for the 41st minor winning combination. , the right reel 32R has a "watermelon" pattern. For example, in a 3-bet game, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when the fourth "watermelon" symbol to the seventh "red bell" symbol reach the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, the 30th Both the 7th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the minor win, and the "black BAR" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 41st minor win, can be stopped in the middle row on the active line. becomes. In this case, in the present embodiment, stop symbol information is set so that a symbol with a small number of slips is preferentially stopped. As a result, in the above case, stop drive control is performed so that the "red bell" symbol stops in the middle row, the 41st minor winning combination is not established, and the 30th minor winning combination becomes possible.

On the other hand, in the middle reel 32M, when the stopping operation of the middle stop switch 43 is performed at the timing when the eighth "black BAR" symbol to the twelfth "red bell" symbol reach the middle stage, the target for the 41st minor winning combination Both the 8th "black BAR" and 11th "cherry" symbols, which are symbols, and the 12th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor combination, should be stopped in the middle stage. becomes possible. In this case as well, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbol with the smaller number of slips is preferentially stopped, so the eighth "black BAR" symbol or the eleventh "cherry" symbol stops in the middle row, and the second symbol stops. The 30th minor winning combination is no longer established, and the 41st minor winning combination becomes possible.

The same applies to the right reel 32R. Depending on the timing at which the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed, the "red bell" symbol that is the target symbol for the 30th minor win and the "watermelon" symbol that is the target symbol for the 41st minor win. The stop pattern information is set so that the pattern with a smaller number of slips is stopped on the lower stage, which is the effective line. In the right reel 32R, when the sixth "first replay" symbol and the seventh "black BAR" symbol reach the effective position, the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed. Neither the symbol nor the "red bell" symbol can be stopped.

After executing the process of step S315, after executing the section display first process in step S316, the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and role ratio monitor 77, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step S212 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311. In the subsequent step S402, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the prescribed number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by turning on lamps (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. is notified to players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower position in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, when winning is achieved when IV=23 to 30, that is, forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, sandwich push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When winning the push bell 1 and right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order bell") (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command are selected. A stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the order of operations.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the 2nd minor winning prize, the 7th minor winning prize or the 9th minor winning prize is established. Then, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the stop information is set so that the 1st small winning combination is established, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the 2nd small winning combination and the 7th small winning combination are set. The stop information is set so that the winning combination or the ninth minor winning combination is established. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In the slot machine 10, in a game state (3-bet game) other than the CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. , and only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as an effective line. For this reason, when the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the second minor winning combination, the seventh minor winning combination or the ninth minor winning combination.

The second minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol. In addition, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also function as the seventh minor symbol and also function as the ninth minor symbol. On the left reel 32L, the second minor combination symbols (between the seventh minor combination symbols, between the ninth minor combination symbols) are arranged so that the interval is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the number 4 "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the middle row, number 7 "red bell" is displayed as shown in FIG. 20(a). The pattern stops at the upper row. As a result, there remains room for establishing the second minor winning combination, the seventh minor winning combination, or the ninth minor winning combination on the right downward line L4.

The second minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "white BAR" symbol. The "white BAR" pattern is arranged only at the 18th position on the middle reel 32M. Also, the seventh minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 14th position. The ninth minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. A "cherry" symbol is arranged only at the 11th position on the middle reel 32M. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol or the ninth minor winning symbol may stop on the active line, or the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol and the None of the ninth minor winning symbols stop on the active line.

Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 13th "first replay" pattern to the 17th "first replay" pattern reaches the lower stage, the second small winning combination The symbol "white BAR" is stopped in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the establishment of the second minor winning combination on the right downward line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the ninth “second replay” symbol to the thirteenth “first replay” symbol reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. , the seventh minor winning symbol "red 7" is stopped in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the 7th minor winning combination to be established on the lower right line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 6th "white bell" pattern to the 10th "young man" pattern reaches the lower row, the 9th minor winning pattern "cherry" pattern is in the middle row. to stop. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after being slid by four symbols, the second, seventh and ninth minor symbol symbols are displayed. Cannot be stopped in the middle. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such timing, the 2nd "LUCKY" pattern or the 6th "white bell" pattern stops in the middle stage.

When the seventh minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle stage, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the seventh minor combination winning can be established.

The seventh minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white bell" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white bell" pattern is arranged only at the 10th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the seventh minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 6th "first replay" symbol to the 10th "white bell" symbol has reached the lower stage, FIG. As shown in , the seventh minor winning symbol "white bell" is stopped at the lower stage. As a result, the seventh minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. For example, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the "second replay" symbol No. 3 reaches the lower stage, the "watermelon" symbol No. 4 is displayed as shown in FIG. Stop downstairs. The combination of "red bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol and "watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the ninth minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the ninth minor combination winning can be established.

The ninth minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "youth" symbol. A "young man" symbol is arranged at the 15th position on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the ninth minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 11th "first replay" symbol to the 15th "youth" symbol reaches the lower row, the ninth minor winning symbol is obtained. The "young man" design stops at the bottom. As a result, the ninth minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "cherry" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the second minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the second minor combination winning can be established.

The second minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white BAR" symbol. A "white BAR" symbol is arranged at the 18th position on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 14th "watermelon" symbol to the 18th "white BAR" symbol reaches the lower row, the second minor winning symbol " White BAR” pattern stops at the bottom. As a result, the second minor winning combination is established on the lower right line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), the "white BAR" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol and the ninth minor winning symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop at the middle stage, that is, the "LUCKY" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage. In this case, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbols and the "first replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "watermelon" symbols and the "first replay" is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol is stopped regardless of the operation timing. From the left, the combination of "white bell" pattern ("red bell" pattern), "LUCKY" pattern ("white bell" pattern), and "watermelon" pattern ("first replay" pattern) shifts as shown in FIG. It is a result.

In this way, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 2nd minor winning combination and the 7th minor winning combination are established. It is one of a case where a prize is established, a case where a ninth minor winning combination is established, and a case where the transition rolls are stopped.

Next, a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop in order to establish the first minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "red bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols and "white bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the first minor combination symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

A "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol, which are first minor bonus symbols, are arranged on the right reel 32R such that an interval between the first minor bonus symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the first minor win is established regardless of the operation timing.

In the case of winning the pressing order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operating sequences, the first minor winning prize is established regardless of the operation timing. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another order of operation, depending on the timing of the operation, a small winning combination will be established or the transitional number will stop on the effective line. By the way, if the middle bell is won, the 38th minor winning prize is established regardless of the operation order and timing, and if the no-question bell is won, regardless of the operation order and timing. 1 small role winning is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. When the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, a winning result corresponding process is performed in step S414. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the second section display process is performed in step S415. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. In subsequent step S416, a random number acquisition process is executed to acquire a random number for the lottery used for the display mode transition lottery. The random number acquisition seed processing will also be described later in detail. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control processing ends.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-game winning to the eighth re-game winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins are established, the medal payout processing is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins are established, the re-game setting processing is performed to change the game state to the re-game state. , to end the medal payout process. In the above-described start waiting process (step S204), the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current game state is the replay state.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the RT state processing of step S214 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the game state is the fourth RT state by confirming whether or not the fourth RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM106. If it is in the fourth RT state, the process advances to step S502 to perform subtraction processing of the number of fixed RT games. Although a detailed description will be given later, the fourth RT state is an RT state in which the number of executable games is predetermined, and the process of step S502 is a process for subtracting the remaining number of executable games. be. In subsequent step S503, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining executable games in the fourth RT state has become 0 based on the processing result of step S502. If it becomes 0, the process of clearing the fourth RT setting flag is executed in step S504, and then the RT state process is terminated. By performing the process of step S504, the game state shifts to the normal game state. If a negative determination is made in step S503, the RT state processing is terminated. In this case, the fourth RT state continues.

If a negative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S505 whether or not the transition roll has stopped on the active line. When the transition roll has stopped, the process proceeds to step S506, and it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal game state. When the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S507. After that, this process is terminated. If it is determined in step S505 that the transitional number has not stopped on the activated line, the process proceeds to step S508, and the second replay winning is determined based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Determine whether or not it is established. If the second replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S509, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S507. After that, this process is terminated. In addition, when the transition rolls stop on the activated line under a game state other than the fourth RT state and the normal game state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S509. , the first RT setting flag is set in step S507, and the process ends.

When the first RT setting flag is set in step S507, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the "setting 3" first RT state. When compared with the lottery table for the normal game state (see FIG. 17), the lottery table for the first RT state has different point values PV for IV=1 to 5, and the same point value PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=6 to 58 is equal to each winning probability in the normal game state, and winning at IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/67.0, and the probability of winning when IV=2 to 5 is about 1/32.8. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22 , when IV=1 is won, normal replay is won, and when IV=2 is won, first promotion replay 1 is won, and IV If it is won at IV = 3, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 2, if it is won at IV = 4, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 3, and it will be won at IV = 5 If you do, you will win the first promotion replay 4. The probability of winning at any of IV=1-5 is about 1 in 7.30. The probability of winning the normal replay under the normal game state is also about 1/7.30. In other words, when the game state shifts to the 1st RT state, each type of small combination, replay, and bonus is won with the same probability as in the normal game state, and a prize-winning mode in which the benefit of replay is given. changes to something different from the normal game state. More specifically, in the normal game state, only the first re-game winning that does not transition to the game state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning, the third re-game winning that shifts to the second RT state is established. To establish.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), a stop command is generated when winning the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 in addition to winning the pressing order bell described above. Stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that are turned on.

FIG. 23(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When winning the first promotion replay 1 to 4 The third replay win is always established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the third replay is associated with one operation order among the six operation orders, and the first replay corresponds to the other operation orders. attached.

In addition, in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also distributed as winning combinations. However, these 6th to 8th replays are not associated with any of the above 6 types of operation sequences. Therefore, in the sixth to eighth replays, even if the first promoted replays 2 to 4 are won, no prizes are won regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.例文帳に追加

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is divided into the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 2 is divided into the first replay and the third replay. In addition to the 3rd replay, the 6th replay is distributed, in the first promotion replay 3, the 7th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and in the first promotion replay 4 Although the 8th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, in any of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, the winning replays are the 1st replay and the 3rd replay. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the order of operations in which the third replay win is established. That is, for example, if there is one type of first promotion replay, there is also one type of operation sequence corresponding to the third replay winning, and when the first promotion replay is won, the third replay winning is intentionally established. This is because it may be possible to Note that this relationship is not limited to the relationship of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other overlapping roles.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S508 that the second regame winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S510, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third replay win has been established. When the third replay winning prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S511, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S512, and this processing ends. do.

When the second RT setting flag is set in step S512, the game state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the second RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the first RT state (see FIG. 22), the lottery table for the second RT state has different point values PV for IV=1 to 10, and has the same point value PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=11 to 58 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, and winning at IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/11.0, the probability of not winning when IV = 2 to 5, and the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 is about 1/15.5, and IV = 9 , 10, the probability of winning is approximately 1/8.90. The odds of not winning any role are about 1/150. That is, in the case of shifting to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal game state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning that does not change the game state, the second re-game winning that shifts to the first RT state, the fourth re-game winning that shifts to the third RT state, and the fifth re-game winning Winning a prize is established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), in addition to the case where the above-described first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, and second promotion replay 1 Even when the 2 promotion replay 2 is won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command.

FIG. 23(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. When fall replay 1 to fall replay 3 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay win or the second replay win is established without fail. When the second promotion replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first regame winning, the fourth replay winning, and the fifth replay winning is established without fail. . When the second promotion replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44, the first re-game winning or the fourth re-game winning is established without fail.

Incidentally, the number attached to the fourth replay in the figure corresponds to the symbol combination when the fourth replay win is established. "1" corresponds to a symbol combination of loose stitches, and "2" corresponds to a symbol combination of red 7, red 7, and black BAR middle stop (see FIG. 11). For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first when the second promotion replay 1 is won, the symbol combination that becomes a loose eye stops and the fourth replay win is established, or the red 7・The red 7 and black BAR middle stop symbol combination is stopped, and the 4th replay win is established.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S510 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S513, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize has been established. When the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S514, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S515. and terminate this process.

When the third RT setting flag is set in step S515, the game state shifts to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the 3RT state based on the fact that the 3RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the 3RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 25 is a lottery table for the 3rd RT state selected in the 3rd RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the 2nd RT state (see FIG. 24), the lottery table for the 3rd RT state has different point values PV for IV=9 to 12, and the same point values PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=1-8, 13-58 is equal to each winning probability in the second RT state, IV=9, 10 , and the probability of winning at IV=11 and 12 is about 1/7.00. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 150. In other words, when the game state shifts to the 3rd RT state, each role type of small combination, replay, and bonus is won with the same probability as in the 2nd RT state, and a prize-winning mode in which the privilege of replay is given. changes to something different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-game winning that does not shift the game state, the 2nd re-game winning that shifts to the 1st RT state, the 6th re-game winning that does not shift the game state, The 7 re-game winning, the 8th re-game winning, and the 3 re-game winning to shift to the 2nd RT state are established.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), even when BAR replay 1 and BAR replay 2 are won, the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command is changed. Set stop information as much as possible.

FIG. 23(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When the BAR replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any of the first replay winning prize, the sixth replay winning prize, the seventh replay winning prize, or the third replay winning prize. is always established. When the BAR replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first replay winning prize, the sixth replay winning prize, the eighth replay winning prize, and the third replay winning prize. is always established.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S513 that the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize has not been established, the process proceeds to step S516, and the winning prize set in the previous payout determination processing Based on the established hand, it is determined whether or not the 11th re-game winning prize or the 12th re-game winning prize has been established. When neither the 11th re-game winning nor the 12th re-game winning has been established, the RT state processing is terminated as it is. When the 11th re-game winning prize or the 12th re-game winning prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S517, and the 4th RT setting flag is set in step S518. Then, in step S519, fixed RT game number setting processing is executed, and then this processing ends. Step S519 is a process of setting the number of games that can be executed in the fourth RT state. Specifically, in step S519, a specified value (for example, 10) is input to a fixed RT counter provided in the various counter areas 106e. At step S502, the fixed RT counter is decremented, and when the counter becomes 0, processing for ending the fourth RT state is executed at step S503.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the BB state or the CB state. If it is not in the bonus state, bonus determination processing shown in steps S602 to S613 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, in step S602, it is determined whether or not any one of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag and CB winning flag is set. If any winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not CB winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. When CB winning is established, a CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in a remaining payout number counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processing of steps S604 and S605, the game state shifts to the CB state.

Here, CB and CB state will be briefly described.

"Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "Watermelon" symbols, "First Replay" symbols or "Black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R , stops on the active line, it is a CB prize. The CB symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R such that the interval between the CB symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the CB is won, the CB prize is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The main controller 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state when the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. Then, in step S205 of normal processing, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached "2" instead of "3". is set as a valid line.

At step S302 of the lottery process, a CB state lottery table is selected. Although illustration of the lottery table for the CB state is omitted, in the lottery table for the CB state, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1 to 52, and "16384" is set as the point value for IV=55 to 58. is set (see FIG. 17, etc. for the correspondence between the IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning CB small and medium hand 1 (probability of winning when IV=55) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB small and medium hand 2 (IV=56 The probability of winning at the time of ) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning the CB small and medium role 3 (the probability of winning at IV = 57) is about 1/4.00, and the CB The probability of winning the small and medium combination 4 (probability of winning when IV=58) is about 1/4.00. No outlier events occur.

FIG. 27(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. Although detailed explanation is omitted, even if any of the CB small and medium winning combination 1 to CB small and medium winning combination 4 is won, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, some kind of small winning combination will be won. It will definitely come true. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, 15 medals will be awarded when the 1st minor winning combination, 27th minor winning combination, 31st minor winning combination, 36th minor winning combination to 38th minor winning combination are established. When the payout is performed and the 2nd minor role winning ~ 26th minor role winning, the 28th minor role winning ~ 30th minor role winning, and the 32nd minor role winning ~ 35th minor role winning are established, 14 sheets Medals are paid out. In other words, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out when the state is shifted to the CB state.

In place of or in addition to the CB as the winning hand and the CB state as the gaming state, a single bonus (SB) that enables the execution of one game (JAC game) as the winning hand, and the winning of the single bonus (winning a prize) ) may be provided.

Returning to the description of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that the CB winning has not been established, it means that the bonus winning flag other than the CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether or not the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize has been established.

Then, when any BB prize is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and BB is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S611. flag is set. Thereafter, in step S612, 216 is set in the remaining payout number counter, and 216 is displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61. FIG. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the maximum number of payouts in the BB state, and the BB state is terminated on condition that medals equal to or greater than the numerical value are paid out in the BB state.

By performing the processing of steps S610 to S612, the game state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding BB state lottery table is selected. .

FIG. 28 collectively shows the lottery table for the 1BB state selected in the 1BB state to which the 1BB prize is won and the lottery table for the 2BB state selected in the 2BB state to which the 2BB prize is won. . In the first BB state lottery table and the second BB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV of IV=1-14, 22-30, and 34-58. Therefore, in either the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, winning is not possible with IV=1 to 14, 22 to 30, and 34 to 58. Also, in the lottery table for the 1BB state and the lottery table for the 2BB state, the point values of IV=19 to 21 and 31 to 33 are set in common in both lottery tables, and the 1BB state and the 2BB state are set. In any of the states, the probability of winning Chance A with IV=19 is about 1/65.5, the probability of winning Chance B with IV=20 is about 1/65.5, and the probability of winning Chance B with IV=21 is about 1/65.5. The probability of winning the middle bell is about 1/1310, the probability of winning the 1st role in IV=31 BB is about 1/2.12, the probability of winning the 2nd role in IV=32 BB is about 1/1310. About 1 in 13.1, the probability of winning the 3rd role in BB with IV=33 is about 1 in 13.1.

On the other hand, in the lottery table for the first BB state and the lottery table for the second BB state, different point values are set for IV=15 to 18, and the probability of winning the strong cherry with IV=15 is the same as in the first BB state. In the second BB state, it is about 1/93.6, and it is easier to win a strong cherry in the first BB state than in the second BB state. Also, the probability of winning the weak cherry with IV=16 is about 1/6.56 in the 1st BB state, whereas it is about 1/26.2 in the 2nd BB state. is more likely to win a weak cherry than in the second BB state.

The probability of winning a strong watermelon with IV=17 is about 1/93.6 in the 1st BB state, while it is about 1/21.8 in the 2nd BB state, and the 2nd BB state is higher. It is easier to win a strong watermelon than in the 1BB state. Also, the probability of winning the weak cherry with IV=18 is about 1/26.2 in the 1st BB state, while it is about 1/6.56 in the 2nd BB state. is more likely to win a weak watermelon than in the first BB state.

That is, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the winning probability of the lottery result of so-called rare combination such as strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc. is higher than other states such as the normal game state and the first RT state to the third RT state. Comparing the first BB state and the second BB state, it is easier to win strong cherries or weak cherries in the first BB state than in the second BB state, and in the second BB state it is easier to win strong watermelons or weak watermelons than in the first BB state. It is designed to make it easier.

In addition, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, etc. can be won depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, and if they are operated at the timing not corresponding to the winning, the winning will not be established and will be missed.

FIG. 27(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. As described above, the first minor winning combination is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. Therefore, if the 1st role in the BB is won, any of the 1st minor role winning, 39th minor role winning, or 40th minor role winning will be awarded regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. It will definitely come true. On the other hand, for the 2nd BB win and the 3rd BB win, the 1st minor win is associated with 4 of the 6 operating orders, and the 2nd minor win is associated with the 2 operating orders. The 40th minor winning combination and the 41st minor winning combination are associated with each other. In other words, if the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 matches the first minor winning combination, the 2nd winning winning combination or the 3rd winning winning winning combination during the BB wins the 1st minor winning combination, the 40th minor winning combination or the 40th minor winning combination. If it matches the 41st minor winning combination, the 40th minor winning combination or the 41st minor winning combination is established instead of the 1st minor winning combination. In the 3-bet game in the BB state, 9 medals are paid out when the 1st minor winning combination or the 40th minor winning combination is established, and 3 medals are paid out when the 41st minor winning combination is established. In other words, when the 1st win in the BB is won, the 1st minor win is established regardless of the order of operations, and 9 medals are paid out, and when the 2nd win in the BB is won, depending on the order of operations. When the 1st minor winning combination or the 40th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out. Then, when the 3rd win in the BB is won, the 1st minor win or the 41st minor win is established depending on the order of operation, and when the 1st minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out. , three medals are paid out when the 41st minor winning combination is established. That is, for the 3rd winning combination in the BB, the number of medals to be paid out varies depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42-44.

If a negative determination is made in step S609 and any BB prize is established, a carryover command is set in step S613. The carry-over command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it known that the bonus winning has not been established in the bonus winning game and a so-called carry-over state has occurred, and the carry-over command is a timer interrupt process. is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110).

As already explained, winning other bonuses is restricted in games played in the carryover state. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal game state (FIG. 17), if a winning combination with a bonus of IV=34 to 51 (1st BB, 2nd BB, CB) is won, the bonuses corresponding to these bonuses are selected. Winning flag is not set. Therefore, for example, when winning a small combination of IV = 34 to 51 or a duplicate combination with a replay, the winning flag for each small combination or replay is set, but the winning flag corresponding to the bonus is set. It is not set, and only small wins are valid. In other words, the carry-over state can also be said to be a state in which bonus lottery is restricted.

When the gaming state has shifted to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and end determination processing is performed in step S614. In the end determination process, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts has become 0, and when it has become 0, the process of clearing the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag is performed. Also, in the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, the end flag indicating that the BB state has ended in the current game is set. Note that the end determination processing will be described later in detail.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game state is returned to the game state when the CB winning was established. For example, when the CB winning is established under the normal game state, the normal gaming state is restored after the CB state is ended, and when the CB winning is established under the 3RT state, the 3RT state is established after the CB state is ended. return to On the other hand, if the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether the corresponding BB prize is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the 1st BB prize is established under the 2nd RT state, the normal game state is entered. When transitioning to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (=15-2) or 25 (=14-2+15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. When transitioning to the BB state, the player can expect a maximum increase of 144 (=9×24-3×24) medals until the BB state ends.

As described above, if a strong cherry, strong watermelon, or the like is won in the BB state, winning may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, and if the winning is not established, medals will not be paid out in the game. does not occur. Also, when winning the 3rd combination in BB, 9 or 3 medals are paid out depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42-44. That is, in the BB state, the upper limit of the number of payouts is set (step S216), and if 9 coins are paid out every game, a maximum increase of 144 medals can be expected as described above, and the BB state ends after 24 games. However, depending on the lottery result of each game in the BB state and the operation timing and operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the game, the number of medals to be increased when the upper limit number of payouts is reached may be less than the maximum number. However, it is set so that the number of games required to reach the maximum payout amount can be increased.

When none of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, and CB winning flag are set (NO in step S602), and none of the first BB winning prize, second BB winning prize, and CB winning prize are established, carry over. When a command is set (when the processing of step S613 is executed), when a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout number counter in steps S605 and S612, when end determination processing is performed in step S614, , the process advances to step S606 to set the status command. Here, the state command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to grasp the game state at the end of the game (that is, the game state of the next game). Set the status command corresponding to the set flag set in 106c. After setting the state command, in step S607, an external signal setting process for setting an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10 is performed. After that, this process is terminated.

<Outline of game state transition and display mode>
Here, the game state transition will be described with reference to FIG. Illustration of the CB state is omitted.

When the game state is the BB state, the BB state ends when the number of medals paid out under the BB state reaches 216, and the game state shifts to the normal game state.

When the game state is the normal game state, the game state shifts to the first RT state by stopping the shift roll on the effective line, and the game state shifts to the BB state when the BB prize is established. The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the normal game state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 that trigger the transition to the 2nd RT state, and the second promotion replays 1, 2 and 4th RT that trigger the transition to the 3rd RT state. Since the transition replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the state are not won, the normal game state does not transition to the 2nd RT state to the 4th RT state (see FIG. 17).

When the game state is the first RT state, the game state shifts to the second RT state when the third replay win is established. The third replay win is established when one of the first promoted replays 1 to 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operation (see FIG. 23(a)). . Further, when the game state is the 1st RT state, the game state shifts to the 4th RT state when the 11th re-game winning prize or the 12th re-game winning prize is established. As already explained, the fourth RT state is a fixed RT state in which the number of games is fixed. Therefore, even if the number for transition is stopped in the fourth RT state, the transition to the first RT state does not occur. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the 1st RT state, the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the shift to the 3rd RT state are not won, so the state does not shift from the 1st RT state to the 3rd RT state.

However, in this embodiment, it is set so that transition replays 1 and 2, which trigger a shift to the fourth RT state, are not won in the first RT state. Therefore, the first RT state does not transition to the fourth RT state. In this embodiment, it is set not only from the 1st RT state but also from other game states so that the transition to the 4th RT state does not occur. The fourth RT state will be described in detail when describing embodiments that are set to allow transition to the fourth RT state.

When the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each 1BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the game, the game state shifts to the BB state.

When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state when the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established. In addition, when the second re-game win is established and when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The fourth replay winning prize and the fifth replay winning prize are established when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (Fig. 23 (b) )reference). The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In addition, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the game in which is set, the game state shifts to the BB state.

When the game state is the 3rd RT state, the game state shifts to the 2nd RT state when the third re-game winning is established. In addition, when the second re-game win is established and when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The third replay win is established when BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(c)). The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In addition, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state.

In the slot machine 10, the main controller 101 manages six types of game states: normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, fourth RT state, BB state, and CB state. The main controller 101 manages five types of display modes: mode, AT mode (assist time mode), VB mode (virtual bonus mode, pseudo bonus mode), and BB mode.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing transition of each display mode.

The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established, and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of 144 medals at maximum.

When the normal mode is shifted to the BB mode, a lottery for shifting to the AT mode may be performed in the BB mode. If the lottery for shifting to AT mode is won, the mode shifts to AT mode after the BB mode ends. If the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is not won, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the BB mode ends. When the AT mode is shifted to the BB mode, the AT mode is restored after the BB mode ends. When the VB mode is shifted to the BB mode, the VB mode is restored after the BB mode is terminated.

Normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2. Transition replay 1, transition replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order replay"). This is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not reported at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery for switching to the AT mode is performed. If the lottery for shifting to AT mode is won, the normal mode shifts to AT mode. The normal mode does not shift to the VB mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state, 4th RT state and CB state. However, in the normal mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, so it is rare to shift to the 2nd RT state to the 4th RT state. It almost corresponds to the normal game state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state, the 1st RT state or the 4th RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time can be expected to decrease by 1.59. In the case of the second RT state to the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals decreases by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The AT mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. LV.AT mode has different transition probabilities to VB mode. 1 mode to LV. It is composed of four AT modes out of four modes, and any AT mode has a higher probability of transition to the VB mode than the normal mode. When the lottery for shifting to VB mode is won, the AT mode is shifted to the VB mode. Shift to VB mode When the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) without winning the lottery, the AT mode shifts to the normal mode.

LV. 1 mode to LV. The 4 modes are set so that the probabilities of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode are different. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery to switch to the VB mode is LV. 4 mode is the highest, LV. 1 mode is set to be the lowest, and LV. 1 mode, LV. 2 mode, LV. 3 mode, LV. The order of the 4 modes is set so that the probability of winning the lottery to switch to the VB mode increases.

The AT mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state, 4th RT state and CB state. However, in the AT mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. 44 corresponds to the second RT state and the third RT state. In the AT mode, when the game state at that time is the normal game state, the first RT state, or the fourth RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.61 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is In the case of the second RT state or the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the AT mode continues at least 50 games after the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when shifting to the AT mode.

The VB mode, like the AT mode, is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell wins and when the push order replay wins. The difference between the VB mode and the AT mode is that when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won, in the AT mode the operation order for establishing the first replay winning prize is notified. , in the VB mode, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is announced (see FIG. 23(b)).

The VB mode corresponds to the normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, fourth RT state, and CB state. However, in the VB mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. Therefore, the VB mode corresponds to the third RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the reported operation order. In the VB mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state, the first RT state, or the fourth RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time can be expected to increase by 0.61. In the case of the second RT state or the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the VB mode continues at least 25 games after the game state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when shifting to the VB mode.

Regarding the shift of the display mode when the number of medals possessed by the player increases, the general flow is to shift from the normal mode to the AT mode, and then return from the AT mode to the normal mode. In the AT mode, a lottery for switching to the VB mode is performed, so if a loop occurs in which the AT mode is switched to the VB mode, and then the VB mode is returned to the AT mode, the player expects an increase in the number of owned medals. can.

Also, in AT mode, LV. 1 mode to LV. Four modes are set, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode differs in each AT mode. When shifting from the normal mode to the AT mode, basically LV. 1 mode. LV. 1 mode, a lottery for transition to VB mode is performed, and LV. A lottery for transition to 2 modes is performed. LV. If you win the lottery to switch to 2 mode, LV. 2 mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is increased. LV. 2 mode, a lottery for transition to VB mode is performed, and LV. A lottery for transition to 3 modes is performed. LV. If you win the lottery to switch to 3 modes, LV. 3 mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is increased. And LV. 3 mode, a lottery for transition to VB mode is performed, and LV. A lottery for transition to 4 mode is performed. ATLV. If you win the lottery to switch to 4 mode, LV. 4 mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is increased.

Therefore, when shifting to AT mode, LV. 1 mode → LV. 2 mode → LV. 3 mode → LV. By promoting the 4 mode and the AT mode, the probability of transition to the VB mode increases, and a loop between the AT mode and the VB mode is likely to occur.

As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured so that the player can increase the number of owned medals in each display mode of the AT mode, VB mode, and BB mode. In conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of states such as a plurality of RT states, a BB state, and a CB state are alternated by winning a prize in each replay or by stopping a transitional result. As described above, depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay is won or when the push order bell is won, the corresponding re-game winning is established or the transition roll is stopped. In addition, in the AT mode and VB mode, when the bell is won in the order of pressing, the operation order that enables the establishment of the first minor winning combination is announced, so that an increase in owned medals can be expected.

Here, when the display mode is the AT mode or the VB mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified when the push order bell or the push order replay is won as described above. There is no notification of the order of operation when winning the order bell or the push order replay. Therefore, the AT mode and the VB mode are more advantageous to the player than the normal mode in terms of whether or not there is notification of the push order bell and the operation order at the time of winning the push order replay. That is, the AT mode and the VB mode are included in the advantageous section, which is a section in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of small wins and the like by notifying the operation sequence. . In this slot machine 10, a lottery for transition to AT mode is performed by shifting to an advantageous section, and a transition to AT mode or VB mode can occur. is configured so as not to cause transition to the AT mode or the VB mode.

In contrast to the AT mode transition lottery in the advantageous section, the AT mode transition lottery is not performed in the normal section. The state and the state before winning the AT mode can also be referred to as a chance zone mode (CZ mode) as a state in which transition to the AT mode is likely to occur.

The configuration related to the display mode will be described below.

The configuration related to the display mode can be roughly divided into (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) processing based on the winning result. and (4) processing related to the notification effect on the sub side. The steps will be described in order below.

<Processing related to display mode transition lottery>
<Lottery result handling process>
(1) Display mode shift lottery processing is performed in the lottery result correspondence processing (step S312) of the lottery processing (FIG. 16) by the main controller 101. FIG. Therefore, the lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31 .

In step S701, random number shift processing is executed. Such processing is processing for random numbers used in the AT mode lottery, and will be described in detail later.

In the subsequent step S702, it is determined whether or not the advantageous interval flag is set in the flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 to determine whether the current game is in the advantageous interval. The advantageous section flag is a flag that is set based on winning a lottery for transition to an advantageous section including the AT mode and VB mode, and is cleared when the advantageous section ends. If the advantageous section flag is not set, the process advances to step S703 to execute the advantageous section transition lottery process, and then terminates the lottery result handling process.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32, first, in step S801, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S802, the advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 39, the advantageous zone transition lottery table is set so that the rate of transition to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) differs according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 38, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, and middle bell are set as triggers for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section (hereinafter, these are referred to as Also collectively referred to as “transition triggers”). These transition triggers have the same point value PV set regardless of the set value, and there is no set difference in winning probability. Also, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is set so that there is no set difference. In other words, the configuration is such that the advantageous interval transition lottery is performed with no set difference in the winning probability for the transition trigger role having the same appearance rate, and the transition rate to the advantageous interval is the same. By doing so, regardless of the set values of the gaming machines that can be installed in multiple gaming halls, the chances of shifting to the advantageous section become equal, and the inequality between players can be eliminated. Become.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S802, a process of acquiring random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step S803. Dedicated counters in the various counter areas 106e are used as random numbers for the advantageous section transition lottery, and the dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals. Then, in step S804, a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is executed, and in step S805, it is determined whether or not the lottery for transition is won. If not, the lottery processing ends as it is. If the transfer lottery has been won, in step S806, the process of setting the above-mentioned advantageous section flag is executed. With this processing, it becomes possible to make an affirmative determination in step S702 of the lottery result correspondence processing (FIG. 31) for the next game and thereafter. In the subsequent step S807, a process of setting an advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone has been won in the current game. After executing the process of step S807, this advantageous zone transition lottery process is terminated.

In the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step S702 that the advantageous zone flag is set, that is, if the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone has been won before the previous game, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, it is determined whether or not either the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The AT mode winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the lottery for shifting to the AT mode has been won, and is set when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode has been won, and the mode is shifted to the AT mode. A flag that is cleared when The AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the AT mode. This is a flag that is cleared in special zones (except when shifting to BB mode). When a negative determination is made in step S704, the first special combination process is executed in step S705.

<1st Special Win Process>
The first special combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the first special combination process, a transition lottery is performed as to whether or not the display mode should be transitioned to the AT mode. That is, in step S901, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S902, the AT mode transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. In the AT mode transition lottery table, the probability of transition to AT mode is set according to the type of lottery result (winning combination).

Specifically, in the mode lottery table in the advantageous section stored in the various table storage area 105a, the probability of winning each mode transition lottery depends on the current display mode and the type of game result that triggers the lottery. configured differently.

As shown in FIG. 39, as game results that trigger the mode transition lottery in the advantageous section, normal replay, push order replay, and push order bell are set in addition to the above shift trigger role. there is That is, the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is set so as not to cause a difference in the transition rate due to the set value, and the lottery for transition is performed based on the game result called a so-called rare combination with a particularly low winning probability, As for the lottery for transition to AT mode, etc. included in the advantageous section, a lottery chance is given to other than these rare roles, and the anticipation of each game is heightened. In the following description, these normal replay, push order replay, push order bell, and transition trigger combination are collectively referred to as a "specific combination" as a combination that triggers a lottery related to the instruction function in the advantageous section.

In the AT mode transition lottery table, the winning probability of the transition lottery is set according to the type of the specific combination. As shown in FIG. 39, for example, if the specific role is a strong cherry, there is a probability of about 51% that the AT mode shift lottery will be won, while if the specific role is a weak cherry, there is a probability of about 15%. It is set so that the lower the winning probability (appearance rate) in each game, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery.

After obtaining the AT mode transition lottery table in step S902, a process of obtaining random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery is executed in step S903. In step S903, a random number for the AT mode transition lottery is obtained from the lottery information storage area 106f of the RAM 106. FIG. The configuration of the lottery information storage area 106f and the process for storing the AT mode transition lottery random number in the area 106f will be described in detail later, but in step S903, the AT mode transition lottery random number is acquired. The process is different from the configuration of acquiring the latest counter value at the time of lottery like other lotteries (for example, advantageous zone transition lottery).

Then, in step S904, an AT mode shift lottery is executed, and in step S905, it is determined whether or not the AT mode shift lottery has been won. If the AT mode shift lottery is won, in step S906, a process of setting an AT mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. By setting the AT mode winning flag, affirmative determination is made in step S704 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). In the subsequent step S907, it is determined whether or not the AT mode won this time is the SAT mode. The SAT mode is an AT mode that starts after passing through a special zone for adding on. For example, if the initial number of games in the normal AT mode is 50, in the SAT mode the AT mode is started with the number of games added to the initial number of games of 50 plus the number of games added in the special zone for addition. . Therefore, the normal AT mode and the SAT mode have different advantages for the player, and the SAT mode is more advantageous for the player than the AT mode.

A lottery for transition to SAT mode is performed when a lottery for transition to AT mode is won (when a lottery is won in lottery processing in step S904), and this lottery for transition is set according to the type of transition trigger and display mode. It is done based on the transition lottery table for the SAT mode that has been set. In the SAT mode transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 39, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery triggered by a strong watermelon is about 51%, and the probability of winning the transition lottery is about 5%. Win SAT mode.

If it is determined in step S907 that the SAT mode has been won, then in step S908 a process of setting a special zone winning flag is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S907, or if the process of step S908 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S906. The processing of steps S909 to S912 is processing for setting the precursor mode.

Omen mode is a mode in which a winning suggestion effect that suggests that you have won an AT mode or the like is likely to occur. . The portent mode continues from 0 game to 32 games, and the number of games to be continued in the portent mode is set to differ depending on the type of winning AT mode or the like and whether or not a bonus is simultaneously won. In addition, when the AT mode and the like are won at the same time as the bonus, the winning notification of the bonus is performed after passing through the omen mode, and after the bonus state ends, the notification that the AT mode etc. was won is announced. done. Further, when the number of portent games is set to 0 games, winning notification is performed without going through the portent mode.

Specifically, in step S909, first, a process of acquiring the precursor game number table from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 is performed. As shown in FIG. 40, the predictive game count table is set such that the predictive game count to be selected differs depending on the winning display mode. Specifically, for example, when the AT mode is won, the 0th game is selected with 30%, the 1st to 5th games are selected with 60%, and the 6th to 10th games are selected with 10%. When winning the mode, 0 game is selected with 10%, 1 game to 5 games are selected with 70%, 6 games to 10 games are selected with 10%, and 11 games to 20 games are selected with 10%. , is set so that the number of precursor games tends to increase when winning the SAT mode, which is advantageous for the player.

In this embodiment, simultaneous winning of a bonus and AT mode or the like is not defined, but in a configuration of simultaneous winning, the number of precursor games may be varied depending on whether or not simultaneous winning occurs. Also, the number of precursor games may be varied depending on the game result that triggered the winning.

In step S910, a lottery process for the number of games in the current portent mode is performed based on the portent game number table obtained in step S909 and lottery counters obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. Like the random number (counter) for the advantageous interval transition lottery, the lottery counter for the number of omen games is also updated at a predetermined cycle. It is acquired and used for the lottery. In the following description, the lottery random numbers (counters) used in other lotteries (for example, the VB mode transition lottery, the AT mode additional lottery, the additional game number lottery, the special zone transition lottery, etc.) will also be particularly described. Unless otherwise specified, the configuration is the same as that of the random number (counter) for the advantageous section transition lottery, and the latest updated value is obtained at the time of the lottery.

Then, in step S911, a process of inputting the number of precursor games to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The omen counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game, and when the omen counter reaches 0, the omen mode ends, and winning notification of winning a lottery for shifting to the AT mode or the like is performed.

In step S912, a process of setting the portent command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a sub-side control device, is executed. The portent command includes information on the lottery result and the number of portent games that triggered the portent mode. Processing on the display control device 81 side based on reception of the portent command will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S912, the first special combination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S905 that the lottery for switching to the AT mode has not been won, the first special combination processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if the determination in step S704 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, it is determined whether or not either the VB mode winning flag or the VB mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning the VB mode transition lottery and is cleared when shifting to the VB mode. The VB mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the VB mode, is set when shifting to the VB mode, and is cleared when the VB mode ends. If a negative determination is made in step S706, then in step S707 a second special combination process is executed. Further, when the determination in step S706 is affirmative, in step S708, the third special combination process is executed.

<Second Special Win Process>
The second special combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the second special winning process, an addition lottery for the AT mode is performed, and a transition lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode to the VB mode or the addition specialized zone is performed. It should be noted that adding means adding (increasing) the number of continuous games (remaining number) such as AT mode, and the number of additional games corresponds to the value added (increased value) to the number of continuous games. . Further, the zone specializing in addition indicates a state in which the number of continuous AT mode games is increased with a high probability over a plurality of games. In addition, in the second special winning process, an AT mode level promotion lottery is performed, and a process for increasing the number of continuous AT mode games is performed.

That is, in step S1001, a process of grasping the AT mode level is performed. As already explained, in this embodiment, LV. 1 mode to LV. Four AT mode levels of four modes are provided, and each level has a different probability of transition to the VB mode. Therefore, in step S1001, if the current AT mode level is LV. 1 mode to LV. 4 modes are determined.

In step S1002, the VB mode lottery table corresponding to the AT mode level ascertained in step S1001 is acquired from the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. In the VB mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. As shown in FIG. 39, for example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. Also, in the VB mode lottery table for each level, the probabilities of transition to the VB mode are different as a whole. LV.1 than that of 1 mode. The LV. LV.2 than that of 2 modes. The LV.3 mode has a higher probability of transition to the VB mode. LV. The four modes are set so that the probability of transition to the VB mode is higher.

In step S1003, the table acquired in step S1002 and random numbers (counters) for lottery acquired from various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 are used to perform a VB mode transition lottery. Then, in step S1004, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S1003 corresponds to VB mode winning. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, a process of setting a VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is performed in step S1005. After that, in steps S1006 to S1009, processing for setting the number of precursor games is performed. That is, the number of precursor games table is obtained in step S1006, the number of precursor games is drawn in step S1007, the number of precursor games is set in step S1008, and the precursor command is set in step S1009. End the role process.

If it is determined in step S1004 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S1010. Steps S1010 to S1013 are processes for upgrading the AT mode level.

In step S1010, an AT mode promotion lottery process is performed. In this process, tables for promotion lottery are acquired from various table storage areas 105 a of ROM 105 , and random numbers (counters) for lottery are acquired from various counter areas 106 e of RAM 106 . A plurality of promotion lottery tables are provided according to AT mode levels. 1 mode table, LV. 2 mode table, LV. Tables for 3 modes and a total of 3 (the promotion lottery is not performed when staying in LV.4 mode) are provided. In each table, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. Also, in the table for each AT mode, LV. LV.1 than the table for 1 mode. The LV. LV. than the table for 2 modes. The table for 3 modes is set so that the promotion probability is lower, and as the AT mode level is promoted, it is set so that it becomes more difficult to be promoted to the next level.

In step S1011, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S1010 was promotion winning. In the case of promotion winning, AT mode promotion processing is performed in step S1012. In this processing, the level flags provided in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 are rewritten to a level flag one level higher than the level flag corresponding to the current AT mode level. Thereafter, in step S1013, a process of setting the promotion command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed. The promotion command includes information on the AT mode to be promoted. Upon receiving the promotion command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like so as to perform an effect for the AT mode of the level to be promoted. As an effect for the AT mode in the auxiliary display section 65, for example, different background color effects are set according to the level of the AT mode. In addition to notifying that the level has been promoted, control is performed so that the background color for the AT mode is performed in accordance with the level of the destination of the promotion.

When it is determined in step S1011 that the promotion lottery is not won, or after the processing of step S1013 is executed, processing for adding the number of continuous games in AT mode is performed in steps S1014 to S1021.

That is, in step S1014, lottery processing for adding the number of AT mode games is performed. In the additional lottery process, a table for AT mode additional lottery is acquired from various table storage area 105 a of ROM 105 , and a random number (counter) for lottery is acquired from various counter areas 106 e of RAM 106 . As shown in FIG. 41, the table for the AT mode additional lottery is set so that the probability of winning the additional lottery differs depending on the type of lottery result.

Here, in the present embodiment, the lottery for addition to the number of games in the AT mode is set so that a special combination including push-order bell, push-order replay, and normal replay is used as a trigger for transition. As shown in FIG. 41, among the specific roles, the push order bell, push order replay (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order role"), and normal replay are compared to the transition trigger role in the AT mode game. The winning probability of the number addition lottery is set low. Therefore, it is expected that the number of games in the AT mode will be increased in the case where the shift opportunity role appears rather than in the case where the winning role or the normal replay appears as the lottery result of each game. Then, it is considered that the player advances the game on the premise that he/she expects to win the transition opportunity role. On the other hand, the winning combination and normal replay have a higher winning probability in each game than the transition opportunity combination, and can be said to be a game result that appears relatively easily. By adopting such a combination, it is possible to reduce the presence of the push-up combination and normal replay as an additional opportunity combination, and to increase the unexpectedness when an additional combination occurs. In addition, the chances of these push-ups and additions based on normal replays are realistically possible during AT mode (more specifically, if the initial number of games, 50, is played 2 or 3 times, only 1 is the rate of appearance that will occur). Therefore, it is possible to favorably generate unexpected additions, such as the above-mentioned push-up and additions triggered by normal replays.

In the subsequent step S1015, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1016 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1017 to perform lottery processing for the number of additional games in the AT mode. In the lottery process for the number of added games, a table for lottery for the number of AT mode added games is obtained from various table storage areas 105a of ROM 105, and a random number (counter) for lottery is obtained from various counter areas 106e of RAM 106. FIG. As shown in FIG. 41, the AT mode additional game number lottery table is set so that the additional game number differs according to the type of the specific combination. For example, in the high cherry game, 20 to 200 games are added to the AT mode, and the average number of added games is 30 games. In addition, with weak cherries, 5 to 300 games are added, and the average number of games added is 20 games. The average value is set so that the number of games with strong cherries is larger.

In step S1018, AT mode game number addition processing is performed. In this process, a counter for managing the number of continuous AT mode games (more specifically, an AT mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) is set to a value corresponding to the number of additional games selected in step S1017. Perform addition processing. In the subsequent step S1019, an addition notification process is performed for notifying that the addition lottery has been won and the number of games.

<Additional notification processing>
Here, in the slot machine 10, a plurality of modes of addition notification are set when the number of continuous games in the AT mode is increased. More specifically, there are a plurality of modes in which the game in which the additional notification is performed is different as the mode of the additional notification, and the additional notification is given in the game in which the additional notification occurs or in a series of games triggered by the game in which the additional notification occurs. (In the following description, also referred to as "immediate addition notification"), and in the case of performing an additional notification in which the game is later than the game in which the addition occurred and the notification game is determined after the fact (In the following description, " (also referred to as “post-boarding notification”) is set.

In the instant addition notification, a series of games triggered by a game in which an addition has occurred means, for example, a case in which a sign mode or a continuous effect occurs in response to a game in which an addition has occurred. A series of games is defined as a series of games that can be continued over a plurality of games from the game in which the addition occurred. The series of games includes cases where continuous effects do not occur. The game in which the addition occurs and the game until the addition notification occurs are regarded as a series of games, and the aspect of the addition notification is also included in the immediate addition notification.

On the other hand, in the post-addition notification, the game that is determined after the game after the game in which the addition occurred is not determined in the game in which the addition occurred, but for example, just before the end of the AT mode. This is different from the series of games in the immediate boarding notification in that the notification timing is determined ex post facto as the AT mode progresses, such as a game. In other words, the notification game can be said to be a game that is set without being triggered by a game in which an addition has occurred.

An overview of the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, the immediate boarding notification is for notifying a part of the number of remaining games in the AT mode, etc. (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG), and the post-boarding notification is for the remaining games in the AT mode, etc. The number will be reported later. Assuming that the number of games to be notified first is a display remaining counter HG, and the number of games to be notified later is a counter BG, the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone ZG) is It is equal to the total value of the display remaining number counter HG and the post-adding counter BG. The display remaining number counter HG is decremented by 1 each time the game is completed, and the post-loading counter BG is not decremented unless the post-loading notification occurs even if the game is completed.

As shown in FIG. 42, in this embodiment, the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 (remaining game number display ZGP) is a predetermined number (1) while the AT mode is being executed. When this is the case, that is, when the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number (1), the post-loading notification is generated. In the post-add notification, it is reported that the number of games corresponding to the post-add counter BG (150 in the figure) has been added. In this case, the post-addition counter BG is decremented by the reported amount (becomes 0 in the figure), and the display remaining number counter HG is updated by adding the post-addition report to the remaining game on the auxiliary display section 65. The number display ZGP also becomes a value corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG (150 in the figure after completing one game).

In this way, when the extra winning is selected, a difference can occur between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in the AT mode or the like (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG). On the other hand, when the immediate boarding notification is selected, there is no difference between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in the AT mode or the like (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG). In the slot machine 10, the add-on counter BG is referred to when the add-on win is made, and whether the add-on notification is selected or the immediate add-on notification is selected depends on the current value of the add-on counter BG.

In the above-described addition notification processing in step S1019, the game for which the addition notification is to be performed is set, and when the addition notification is to be performed in the game, the execution timing of the addition notification is set. That is, as shown in FIG. 35, first, in step S1101, a process of grasping the trailing counter BG of the various counter areas 106e is performed. In subsequent step S1102, a notification game lottery process is executed. The notification game lottery process is a lottery process for determining whether the current addition notification should be a post-addition notification or an immediate addition notification. In the information game lottery process, a post-loading lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not post-loading notification is to be performed according to the value of the post-loading counter BG grasped in step S1101.

As shown in FIG. 43, the add-on lottery table is set so that the probability of selecting the add-on notification differs depending on the value of the add-on counter BG and the type of the specific combination that triggered the add-on win. there is For example, at the time of addition triggered by a strong cherry, if the subsequent addition counter BG is less than 30, the subsequent addition notification is selected at 20% (the immediate addition notification is selected at 80%). When the add-on counter BG is 30 or more and less than 100, the add-on notification is selected at 10%, and when the add-on counter BG is 100 or more, the add-on notification is selected at 5%, so that the value of the add-on counter BG is large. It is set so that the selection rate of the post-boarding notification becomes lower as the number increases.

In addition, as the type of specific role that triggered the additional winning, there are various types rather than so-called rare roles (low probability trigger result, low probability result) with relatively low winning probability such as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon. So-called normal roles (high-probability trigger result, high-probability result) with a relatively high winning probability, such as push-order replay and various push-order bells, have a higher pick-up selection rate when the pick-up counter BG value is small. is set. More specifically, in notification game lottery processing triggered by various push order replays and various push order bells, in a situation where the post-addition counter BG is less than 30, the post-addition notification is selected with a probability of 100%.

As described above, the post-addition counter BG is decremented by the addition notification after the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, basically, as the AT mode game progresses, the value of the trailing counter BG often increases. It is likely to be a small value.

That is, when an additional winning is made in the early stages of the AT mode game, the probability that the subsequent addition notification is selected is high, especially when an additional winning is triggered by a normal combination that is not a rare combination such as a push order replay or a push order bell. If it is the early stages of the AT mode, the subsequent notification is always selected. As a result, after the AT mode is started, the trailing counter BG tends to accumulate relatively early.

After the notification game lottery process is executed in step S1102, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional winning game is not won and the immediate addition notification is selected, in step S1104, the process of adding the current additional winning game to the display remaining number counter HG provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. Then, in step S1105, notification timing setting processing is executed for setting at which timing the additional notification is to be performed in the current game. The notification timing setting process is a process of setting at what timing in the current game the additional notification is to be performed.

In one game, the addition notification is set so that the execution timing differs according to the number of addition games. Specifically, as shown in the execution timing table of FIG. 44, as the execution timing of the additional notification in the current game, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order of stop operation, reel 1, reel 2, and reel 3. Then, the time of the stop operation of the first reel, the time of the stop operation of the second reel, and the time of the stop operation of the third reel are set. Then, among the stop operations of each reel, the timing at which the stop ON operation is performed when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, the timing when the stop OFF operation is performed when the pressing operation is completed, is set.

Here, a supplementary description will be given of the operating mode of the stop switches 42-44. The stop switches 42 to 44 can be displaced from an initial position arranged on the frontmost side to an operating position arranged on the farthest side. In the state of being arranged at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in a LOW state, and by operating from the initial position to the operation position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are lowered. The LOW signal is switched to the HI signal. Then, main controller 101 recognizes that the stop ON operation has been performed, which means that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been pressed, based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal.

Also, the stop switches 42 to 44 are urged toward their initial positions by springs or the like. Therefore, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are released and the operation force (pressing force) pushed toward the operation position is not applied, the stop switches 42 to 44 are moved to the initial position by the urging force of the spring or the like. return to In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are switched from HI signals to LOW signals. Based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop OFF operation has been performed, ie, the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has ended.

The addition notification is set so that it can occur both when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop ON and when the stop is OFF. In other words, in a game in which an additional notification occurs, the additional effect can occur not only at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, but also at the timing when the pressing operation ends.

In the addition notification execution timing table, when the number of games to be added is relatively small, for example, 5 games to 10 games are added, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%. , the timing of the stop OFF operation of the first reel is 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 15%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 20%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is 20%, The stop OFF operation of the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is 30%, and each is selected. In this case, the stop OFF operation of each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation of each reel, and the operation on the rear side is more likely to be selected.

On the other hand, when the number of games with a relatively large number of games to be added is, for example, 100 games or more, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%, and the stop OFF operation of the first reel is selected. is performed 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 5%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 30%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is 5%, the stop OFF operation of the third reel ( When all reels are stopped) is 45%, and each is selected. In this case as well, the stop OFF operation of each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation, and the operation on the rear side is relatively easier to be selected.

In other words, in the present embodiment, it is set so that the additional notification is more likely to occur during the stop OFF operation than during the stop ON operation of each reel. Further, when comparing the first to third reels, the stop operation (ON operation, OFF operation) of the third reel is most likely to be selected, the second reel stop operation is the second most likely to be selected, and the first reel is stopped. It is set so that it is the least likely to be selected during operation.

In terms of the relationship with the number of additional games, the greater the number of additional games, the more likely it is that the third reel stop OFF operation will be selected. In other words, when the player is aware of the occurrence of the additional notification in advance, if the additional notification does not occur by the time the third reel stop ON operation is performed, the player is greatly affected by the occurrence of the addition of a large number of games. It is considered that the third reel stop OFF operation is executed while expecting.

In step S1105, the execution timing of the addition notification in the current game is set based on the execution timing table of the addition notification. After that, the process for addition notification is terminated. In this case, the information that the current addition is notified in the current game as an immediate addition notification, and the information regarding the execution timing of the addition notification in the current game are executed following the addition notification processing. It is set as an add-on command in the add-on command setting process (step S1020). The display control device 81 that receives the add-on command including these information sets the add-on notification effect based on these information. This processing will be described later.

If it is determined in step S1103 that the post-addition lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, a process of adding the current number of additional games to the post-addition counter BG provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S1107, after performing the process of setting the post-add flag in the various flag storage area 106d, the add-on notification process is terminated.

The post-boarding flag is set by the CPU 102 of the main control unit 101 to indicate that the post-boarding notification should be performed when the value of the post-boarding counter BG is greater than 0 and the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value. It is a flag for grasping. Further, in this case, in the addition command setting processing executed subsequent to the addition notification processing, information indicating that the addition notification will not occur in the current game is set in the addition command. The display control device 81 that receives the add-on command including this information performs control so that the add-on notification is not generated in the current game.

Returning to the description of the second special combination process (FIG. 34), after the addition notification process is executed in step S1019, an addition command including the processing result of the addition notification process is sent to the display control device 81 in step S1020. After performing the process of setting it as an output target, the second special combination process is terminated. The add-on command includes information that the add-on has occurred, the number of add-on games, and the target of the add-on.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S1016, the process proceeds to step S1021. In step S1021, the AT mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second special combination process is terminated. The AT mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the condition for adding the number of games in the AT mode is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, if the bonus ends in a situation where the AT mode add-on flag is set, the AT mode is added on at the end of the bonus. That is, it is set so that the game to which the additional notification is performed differs depending on whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won.

If it is determined in step S1015 that the additional lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S1022. In step S1022, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. That is, when a player wins a special role in the AT mode and does not win a lottery for transition to the VB mode or a lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode, etc., a lottery for transition to a specialized zone is performed. In the special zone lottery process, a table for the special zone shift lottery is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a random number (counter) for the lottery is used to determine whether the display mode is to be shifted to the special zone. lottery. As shown in FIG. 39, the special zone transfer lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the transfer lottery differs depending on the type of specific combination. For example, a special zone transfer lottery based on strong cherries has a probability of about 5%, and a special zone transfer lottery based on weak cherries has a probability of about 0.8%. On the other hand, the special zone transfer lottery based on strong watermelon wins with a probability of about 2%, and the special zone transfer lottery based on weak watermelon wins with a probability of about 0.8%.

In step S1023, based on the result of the process in step S1022, it is determined whether or not the lottery for moving to the specialized zone has been won. When winning, in step S1024, a process of setting a special zone winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed. Then, in step S1025, a process for acquiring a precursor game number table is performed, in step S1026, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed, in step S1027, a process for setting the number of precursor games is performed, and in step S1028, a precursor command is executed. is set, the second special combination process is terminated. The processes of steps S1025 to S1028 are similar to the processes of steps S1006 to S1009, for example, and are processes for setting the portent mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S1023 and none of the lottery for transition to VB mode, the lottery for adding the number of games in AT mode, or the lottery for transition to specialized zone is not won, pseudo-addition notification is performed in step S1029. After performing the processing, the second special combination processing is terminated. The pseudo-additional notification process is a process for sustaining the sense of expectation by generating an effect similar to that at the time of winning even if the lottery is not won.

<Third Special Win Process>
Next, the third special combination process executed in step S708 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the third special combination process, a process for adding the number of continuous games in the AT mode and a lottery for transition to a specialized zone are performed. That is, in step S1201, AT mode game number addition lottery processing is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S1014. Note that the odds of winning the additional lottery may differ between the lottery process in step S1014 and the lottery process in step S1201.

In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S1201 was an additional winning result. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1204 to perform lottery processing for the number of additional games in the AT mode. Then, in step S1205, AT mode game number addition processing is performed, in step S1206, addition notification processing is performed, and in step S1207, the addition command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. , ends the third special combination processing. The processing of steps S1203 to S1207 is the same as the processing of steps S1016 to S1020. The number of additional games may differ between the lottery process in step S1016 and the lottery process in step S1204.

If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. In other words, even if a special winning combination is won in the VB mode and the lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode is not won, the lottery for transition to the specialized zone is performed. The specialized zone lottery process is the same as the process of step S1022, and is performed based on the table for the specialized zone transfer lottery (FIG. 39). The processing of steps S1210 to S1216 is the same as the processing of steps S1023 to S1029. Also, if it is determined in step S1203 that the bonus winning flag is set, the AT mode addition flag is set in step S1207, and then the third special combination processing is terminated. The AT mode addition flag is as described above.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). After any one of steps S705, S707 and S708 has been executed, it is determined in step S709 whether or not the result of the lottery process this time is a push order replay or a push order win for the push order bell. . In the case of winning the first prize, the first prize processing is executed in step S710. The pushing process will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S709, or if the process of step S710 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S711. In step S711, it is determined whether or not the special zone flag corresponding to the additional special zone is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. As described above, after the specialized zone winning flag is set based on winning the lottery for transition to the SAT mode or the lottery for transition to the specialized zone, the transition to the specialized zone occurs. This is a flag that is set when the player wins (when the 7th regame win is established). If the special zone flag is set in step S711, special zone processing is executed in step S712. When a negative determination is made in step S711, or after the process of step S712 is executed, this lottery result handling process is terminated.

<Processing for specialized zone>
The specialized zone processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special zone processing, first, in step S1301, the result of the current lottery processing is grasped. In the subsequent step S1302, AT mode add-on game number lottery processing is performed. In the subsequent step S1303, AT mode game number addition processing is performed. Then, in step S1304, an addition notification process is executed, and after an addition command is set in step S1305, the special zone process ends. The processing of steps S1302 to S1305 is the same as the processing of steps S1017 to S1020. However, the number of games to be selected is larger in the number-of-addition-games lottery process in step S1302 than in the number-of-addition-games lottery process in step S1017 (FIG. 41). In addition, in the specialized zone, regardless of the game result, it is set so that the number of AT mode games is always added (FIG. 41).

As described above, in the lottery result handling process, if it is not in the advantageous section, a lottery for transition to the advantageous section is performed, and if it is in the advantageous section, a lottery for transition to AT mode or VB mode or continuation of AT mode is performed. Processing for adding the number of games is performed. In other words, even if you win a special role, if it is a normal section instead of an advantageous section, the lottery for transition to AT mode or VB mode, processing for adding the number of continuous games in AT mode, etc. will basically not be performed. and limits its implementation. In other words, the normal section can be said to be a section in which execution of processing related to the instruction function such as the AT mode is restricted compared to the advantageous section. When the lottery for transition to the AT mode or VB mode is won, the fact that the lottery for transition is won is notified after the premonitory game is played. Therefore, the processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery will be described below.

<Processing for transitioning the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery>
(2) In the processing for transitioning the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, the processing for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won and the notification for transitioning the game state are performed. A process for performing is performed. Therefore, first, a description will be given of the processing related to the notification that the transfer lottery has been won.

<Processing for mode change notification>
Notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode change notification process is a process that is executed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is the specified number). The mode change notification process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. The number of precursory games is counted in a prize-winning result handling process to be described later, and the number of precursory games is decremented by one each time one game is played. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is terminated.

If the number of precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S1402 whether or not the bonus win flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning a bonus. If the bonus winning flag is set, the bonus winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1403, and then this mode transition notification processing is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the bonus winning notification command notifies that the bonus has been won, for example, by displaying "Bonus confirmed!!" It should be noted that the type of the winning bonus (either the first BB or the second BB) may be notified together.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when the bonus and the AT mode are won at the same time, the AT mode and the like are announced when the bonus announced in step S1403 ends. The processing related to the winning notification will be described in detail later, but when the winning notification such as AT mode is performed in accordance with the bonus winning notification, the winning notification such as AT mode is performed in accordance with the bonus winning notification command set in step S1403. A configuration in which a command is set is preferable.

If a negative determination is made in step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the AT mode. If the AT mode winning flag is set, the AT mode winning flag is cleared in step S1405. Then, in step S1406, the AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The AT notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state in accordance with winning the AT mode shift lottery. After that, in step S1407, an AT mode winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode winning notification command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the AT mode transition lottery. Such notification will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S1407, this mode shift notification process is terminated.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the mode of notification of winning in the SAT mode is different from the mode of notification of winning in the AT mode. Therefore, in step S1407, it is preferable to set the AT mode winning notification command so as to include information as to whether it is the SAT mode or not. The AT mode winning notification mode and the SAT mode winning notification mode may be different as long as they are identifiable by the player, and more preferably, the winning notification mode for the SAT mode, which has a higher degree of advantage. It is preferable that the mode is more flashy than the mode of notification of winning in the AT mode.

It should be noted that the AT mode and the SAT mode may be configured to share the winning notification mode. By doing so, it is possible to make it look as if the content of winning has been promoted from the AT mode to the SAT mode from the AT mode winning notification game to the start notification game, and the AT mode winning notification is made. It is possible to eliminate delays due to the difference between the game and the start notification game.

If it is determined in step S1404 that the AT mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1408 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the VB mode. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1409. Then, in step S1410, the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the game state to the 3rd RT state when the lottery for transition to the VB mode is won. After that, in step S1411, a VB mode winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the VB mode transition lottery. Such notification will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S1411, this mode shift notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1408 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1412. In step S1412, it is determined whether or not the special zone winning flag is set. If it is not set, the mode change notification process is terminated. When it is set, in step S1413, processing for clearing the special zone winning flag is performed. Then, in step S1414, a process of setting a specialized zone notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed. The special zone notification flag is a flag for executing the pressing order notification corresponding to the seventh regame winning. After the process of step S1414 is executed, the special zone winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1415, and then this mode transition notification process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone winning notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so as to notify that the specialized zone has been won.

That is, for the AT mode, VB mode, and special zone that transition through the precursor mode, the AT mode transition lottery and the VB mode transition lottery are won based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0. Even if the number of precursor games becomes 0, the AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone are not started. This is because the AT mode and VB mode as display modes are accompanied by the transition of the game state. Specifically, the AT mode is started by shifting to the 2nd RT state, and the VB mode is started by shifting to the 3rd RT state. It is due to being As for the specialized zone, there are cases where the transition of the game state is not accompanied (from the 3rd RT state to the 3rd RT state). The processing configuration is as described above.

As already explained, the 2nd RT state is entered when the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, and the 3rd RT state is entered into the second promoted replays 1 and 2. , and when the fourth and fifth replay wins are established. Then, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, or when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, This is the case where the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning the promotion replay corresponds to the third replay win or the like. Therefore, when a lottery for shifting to the AT mode or VB mode is won, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in the game in which the player wins the winning combination for shifting the game state. It is configured to allow the game state to be shifted. It should be noted that from the notification of winning the AT mode or VB mode transition lottery to the start of the AT mode or VB mode (until the game state transitions), notification as a preparation state (for example, " In preparation") is performed.

<Description on transition of display mode>
The notification process for shifting the game state is performed in the pushing process (step S710) in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). Here, prior to the description of the pushing process, the outline of the case where the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be described with reference to FIG.

<Overview of push order notification effect>
Notification of the order of operations at the time of winning a winning hand (push order notification, push order notification effect, order notification, mode notification) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the instruction monitor 68 . Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left. Notification of the pressing order on the instruction monitor 68 will be described later in detail.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, among the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Larger button display. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

To explain the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

<Push-in process>
Next, referring to the flow chart of FIG. 47, the pushing process executed in step S710 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31) will be described.

In step S1501, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is one of the first promotion replays 1-4. The affirmative determination in step S1501 means that the first replay or the third replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, the process advances to step S1502 to determine whether or not the AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 or not. As already explained, the AT notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the AT mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 45). be.

When the notification flag for AT is set, in step S1503, processing for notifying the pressing order of the third replay is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the third replay, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is reported (see FIG. 23(a)). After that, in step S1504, a process of setting a push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side, is performed, and then the main push order process is terminated. The pressing order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the pressing order notification command will be described later in detail.

In step S1503, the operation order corresponding to the third replay winning is notified, basically, when the AT mode transition lottery is won, and the AT mode winning notification is performed after the precursor mode. It is assumed that it is after switching to the AT mode and before the transition to the AT mode. That is, in the lottery table in the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are not won, and the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won only in the 1st RT state. However, even in the AT mode, the game state may fall from the 2nd RT state to the 1st RT state due to an erroneous operation, etc. Even in such a case, the first promotion replay 1 to 4 will be won. By doing so, it is possible to quickly return to the second RT state.

If a negative determination is made in step S1501, it is determined in step S1505 whether or not the lottery result of this time is one of fall replays 1-3. The affirmative determination in step S1505 means that the first replay or the second replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1506, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. When the notification flag for AT is set, in step S1507, processing for notifying the pressing order of the first re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the second replay, the operation order corresponding to the first replay win is reported (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1508, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

In this way, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the state where the lottery for transition to the AT mode is won, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is notified, thereby changing the game state to the second. It is possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1502, the pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the AT mode, there are cases where the first replay win is established and cases where the third replay win is established. , there is.

In addition, when falling replays 1 to 3 are won in a situation where the notification flag for AT is set, the game state is shifted to the first RT state by notifying the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay winning prize. It is possible to prevent it from happening. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1506, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the pushing order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the AT mode ends, the AT notification flag is cleared, and the display mode shifts to the normal mode, the second replay winning may be established by winning the fall replays 1 to 3, and the RT state will transition from the second RT state or the third RT state to the first RT state.

Also, for example, in the 1st RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the AT mode, and the operation order happens to correspond to the 3rd replay win, and the 3rd replay win is established. Even in the case of (even in the case of transition to the second RT state), the second replay winning prize can be established by winning fall replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if the AT mode is not won by chance and the game shifts to the second RT state, the game immediately shifts to the first RT state thereafter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1505, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not the current lottery result is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. A positive determination in step S1509 means that the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1510, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1511 whether or not the VB notification flag or the specialized zone notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. As already explained, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the VB mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 45). be. The specialized zone notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursory games in the precursory mode becomes 0 after winning the special zone transition lottery in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 45). be.

When the notification flag for VB or the notification flag for specialized zone is set, in step S1512, the process for notifying the pressing order of the fourth re-game or fifth re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first replay, the fourth replay, and the fifth regame, the operation sequence corresponding to the fourth regame winning or the fifth replay winning is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1513, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1510, the pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1511, then in step S1507 the process for notifying the pressing order of the first replay is executed, and in step S1508 the process of setting the pressing order notifying command is performed. Terminates the regular running process. Therefore, when winning the second promotion replays 1 and 2 without winning the VB mode or the special zone, if the AT mode is in effect, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first replay winning prize is performed, and the AT mode is performed. If it is not in the mode, the pressing order notification effect is not performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1509, it is determined in step S1514 whether or not the current lottery result is BAR replay. Affirmative determination in step S1514 means that one of the first replay, third replay, and sixth to eighth replays wins depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1515, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1516 whether or not the specialized zone notification flag is set. When the notification flag for AT is set and the notification flag for special zone is set, in step S1517, the process for notification of the pressing order of the seventh regame is executed. Specifically, among the first replay, the third replay, and the sixth to eighth regames, the operation order corresponding to the seventh regame win is reported (see FIG. 23(c)). After that, in step S1518, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1515, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the pushing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1516, then in step S1503 processing for notification of the pressing order of the third replay is executed, and in step S1504 processing for setting the pressing order notification command is performed. Terminates the regular running process. Therefore, in the case of winning the BAR replay without winning the VB mode or the specialized zone, if the AT mode is in effect, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the third replay win is performed, and the state shifts to the second RT state. is generated, and if the AT mode is not in effect, the pressing order notification effect is not performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1514, it is determined in step S1519 whether or not the result of the current lottery is winning of the bell in order of pressing. If the pressing order bell is won, it is determined in step S1520 whether or not the AT notification flag is set. When it is set, in step S1521, a process for notifying the order of pressing for notifying the order of operations corresponding to the winning of the first minor combination is executed (see FIG. 19). After that, in step S1522, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1520, the main pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process.

It should be noted that if the pressing order bell is won in a situation where the notification flag for AT is set (if affirmative determination is made in step S1520), if the game state of this time is the normal game state, it corresponds to the first minor winning prize. It is preferable not to notify the pressing order. By doing so, the transition output is stopped, and the game state is shifted to the 1st RT state, that is, after that, the first promotion replay 1 to 4 wins and the transition to the high RT state is possible. It becomes possible.

If a negative determination is made in step S1519, it is determined in step S1523 whether or not the current lottery result is transition replay. In the case of transition replay winning, the special notification process is executed in step S1524, and then the pushing process ends. Also, if a negative determination is made in step S1523, the pushing process ends. The special notification process in step S1524 is a process for shifting to the fourth RT state when winning the transition replay. In addition, as already explained, in this embodiment, it is set so that the transition replay is not won in any gaming state. Therefore, transition to the fourth RT state does not occur either. The processing of step S1524 will be described in detail when describing an embodiment that is set so as to be able to win transition replay.

<Processing for switching the display mode based on the winning result>
<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, as a result of performing the notification for shifting the game state as described above, the processing when the winning combination corresponding to the shift of the game state is won will be described (3). This process is performed in the winning result handling process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). The winning result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1601, game number management processing is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this number-of-games management process, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the precursor mode, the number of continuous games in the AT mode, VB mode, and special zone, etc., is also counted. In the following step S1602, a post-loading notification process is executed. The post-addition notification process is a process for performing the post-addition notification described with reference to FIG. On the condition that the addition information corresponding to the addition counter BG (post-addition notification) is executed. Then, the value corresponding to the executed addition notification is added to the display remaining number counter HG and subtracted from the addition counter BG, and the addition flag is cleared under the condition that the addition counter BG is 0.

In the following step S1603, it is determined whether or not the result of this stop is the third replay winning. As described above, when the third regame winning has been established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), the processing for shifting the game state to the second RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1604, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. The case where the AT notification flag is not set is the case where the third re-game winning is established without the condition for shifting to the AT mode being established. The winning result handling process is terminated as it is. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1605 whether or not the current display mode is the AT mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As described above, the AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the AT mode. In addition to the AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided as flags for specifying the display mode. In this embodiment, when the display mode is a mode (VB mode, additional specialized zone) corresponding to the RT state higher than the AT mode, the AT mode flag is the flag corresponding to that mode (VB mode flag, specialized zone flag). Therefore, for example, in step S1605, when it is determined that the AT mode flag is set, in addition to the AT mode, the VB mode and the specialized zone are included. .

In step S1605, if the AT mode flag is set, the display mode is already AT mode, so the process for dealing with winning results is terminated. On the other hand, if the AT mode flag is not set, the process for starting the AT mode is performed in steps S1606 to S1609.

That is, in step S1606, the AT mode flag is set. In the subsequent step S1607, the AT mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode start command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the AT mode will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After that, in step S1608, counting of the number of AT mode continuations is started. Specifically, the AT mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is set to the initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuation games in the AT mode.

After performing the processing of step S1608, it is determined whether or not the specialized zone flag is set in step S1609. A positive determination in step S1609 means that the AT mode won this time is the SAT mode. In this case, after clearing the special zone winning flag in step S1610, (steps S1619 to S1621). Processing for starting the additional specialized zone will be described later. If a negative determination is made in step S1609, the winning result handling process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S1603 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1611. In step S1611, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth replay wins have been established as a result of this stop. As described above, when the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, the RT state processing (FIG. 21) performs processing for shifting the game state to the third RT state. In this case, in step S1612, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is not set, it means that the fourth and fifth re-game wins are established without winning the VB mode transition lottery. , the winning result handling process is terminated. If the VB notification flag has been set, it is determined in step S1613 whether or not the VB mode flag has been set. If the VB mode flag is set, the display mode is already the VB mode, so the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag is not set, processing for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1614 to S1616.

That is, in step S1614, processing for setting the VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the AT mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because the VB mode is a mode that shifts through the AT mode, and the shift to the AT mode is always made after the VB mode ends.

After that, in step S1615, the VB mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1616, counting of the number of VB mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 25) of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is set in a VB mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1616, the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1611 that the fourth and fifth replay winnings have not been established, the process proceeds to step S1617. In step S1617, it is determined whether or not the seventh regame winning has been established as a result of this stop. In this embodiment, when the seventh replay winning has been established, that is, the middle stage of the left reel 32L has a "black BAR" symbol, the middle stage of the middle reel 32M has a "black BAR" symbol, and the middle stage of the right reel 32R has a "black BAR" symbol. When the "black BAR" pattern stops and the "black BAR" pattern stops on the middle combination line, it is configured to shift to the special addition zone. The case where the 7th re-game win is established means the case where BAR Replay 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 7th re-game win. There is (FIG. 23(c)).

If the seventh replay winning has been established, it is determined in step S1618 whether or not the specialized zone notification flag is set. When the specialized zone notification flag is set, processing for starting the specialized zone is performed in steps S1619 to S1621. As already described, when the SAT mode is started, even if the affirmative determination is made in step S1609 and the process of step S1610 is performed, the process of steps S1619 to S1621 is performed.

Specifically, in step S1619, a process of setting a specialized zone flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. The specialized zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is an additional specialized zone. By setting the specialized zone flag, the number of continuous games in AT mode or VB mode is counted. be stopped. In this case, an AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag may coexist in the various flag storage area 106d.

After that, in step S 1620 , the specialized zone start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . The display control device 81 that has received the special zone start command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the special zone will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1621, counting of the number of continuous specialized zones is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games in the special zone is set in the special zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1621, the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated.

When it is determined at step S1617 that the seventh regame winning has not been established, or when a negative determination is made at step S1618, the process proceeds to step S1622. In step S1622, it is determined whether or not the 11th and 12th regame wins have been established as the result of this stop. As described above, in the present embodiment, the eleventh and twelfth replay winnings are set so as not to be established, so a negative determination is made in step S1622 in the present embodiment. finish. In the embodiment in which the eleventh and twelfth re-game winnings can be established, it becomes possible to make an affirmative determination in step S1622. After executing the 4RT transition process, the winning result handling process is terminated. The 4th RT shift process will be described in detail when explaining the embodiment in which the 11th and 12th regames can be won.

As described above, in particular, processing for shifting the display mode separately from the RT state processing (FIG. 21) based on the winning of the combination corresponding to shifting the gaming state from the 2nd RT state to the 4th RT state. I do. This is to avoid the AT mode or the like from being started based on the winning of a winning combination corresponding to changing the game state by chance even though the display mode transition lottery has not been won. is.

In addition, at the time of transition of the display mode, among those accompanied by the transition of the game state, transition to a higher mode, that is, when shifting from the normal mode to the AT mode, when shifting from the AT mode to the VB mode, or when shifting from the AT mode When shifting from the or VB mode to the special zone, the shift is made based on the winning result of the corresponding combination. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of shifting to a lower mode, for example, when the game state shifts due to the second replay win as a fall replay or the stop of the transition roll, the display mode shift is not performed. When shifting to such a lower mode, the game state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when shifting to these lower modes, there is a possibility that the transition of the game state and the transition of the display mode are performed in separate games.

<Number of games management process>
The number-of-games management process executed in step S1601 of the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of continuous games in the AT mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted, and the number of continuous games in these display modes becomes 0. Based on this, a process for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the game number management process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is a specific number. As already explained, in this embodiment, each game can be executed with the number of bets from 1 to 3, and in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 as the specific number. If the bet is not 3 bet, the game number management process is terminated. In other words, the number of omen mode games is not counted in 1-bet or 2-bet games. Note that the counting may be performed regardless of the number of bets.

If the current game is a 3-bet game, the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set or the game is in a bonus state. If the determination in step S1702 is affirmative, in step S1703 the AT mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the special zone flag for various display modes are cleared, after which the game count management process ends. In other words, when the bonus win flag is set or during the bonus, the number of games in the AT mode or the like is not counted. If each flag is not set in step S1703, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1703, while the AT mode flag, the VB mode flag, etc. are cleared, the AT notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the end of the bonus, after going through a preparation state such as an AT mode, these flags are used to notify the pressing order for shifting the game state, and the game state before the bonus can be restored. On the other hand, when a bonus is won in a special zone, the special zone is terminated by the bonus win. Also, in step S1703, the AT mode winning flag and the like are not cleared. Therefore, when the AT mode or the like and the bonus are won at the same time, the winning notification based on these winning flags is performed after the bonus is finished.

If the determination in step S1702 is negative, it is determined in step S1704 whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. If not 0, a process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games is performed in step S1705. If the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1704 (not in precursor mode), or after the process of step S1705 is executed, the number of continuous games in each mode is counted in steps S1706 to S1723. .

That is, in step S1706, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the AT mode. If it is in AT mode, the process advances to step S1707 to determine whether it is a specialized zone in AT mode. That is, in the case of shifting to the specialized zone at the start of the AT mode as in the SAT mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1707. If it is in the special zone, the game count management process for the special zone is performed in steps S1720 to S1723. These processes will be described later.

If it is determined in step S1707 that the zone is not a specialized zone, in step S1708 the AT mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 to decrement the number of AT mode continuation games. Then, in step S1709, it is determined whether or not the AT mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the AT mode flag is cleared in step S1710, and the AT notification flag is cleared in step S1711. After that, in step S1712, an AT mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. After performing the process of step S1712, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1706 that the mode is not the AT mode, the process advances to step S1713. In step S1713, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. If it is the VB mode, the process advances to step S1714 to determine whether or not it is an additional specialized zone. If it is not the special zone for addition, in step S1715 the VB mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, thereby decrementing the number of VB mode continuation games. Then, in step S1716, it is determined whether or not the VB mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1717, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1718. After that, in step S1719, a VB mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. Upon receiving the VB mode end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will end in the current game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After performing the process of step S1719, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1714 that the zone is an additional special zone, the process proceeds to step S1720. As already explained, even if it is determined in step S1707 that the zone is the specialized zone in the AT mode, the process proceeds to step S1720. In step S1720, the special zone continuation game number is decremented by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the special zone continuation counter. Then, in step S1721, it is determined whether or not the special zone continuation counter is zero. If it is 0, the special zone flag is cleared in step S1722, and the special zone end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1723. In the display control device 81 that has received the special zone end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the special zone ends in the current game. As such notification, for example, the number of games successfully added in total in the special zone this time is notified. After performing the process of step S1723, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1713 or step S1721, the game count management process is terminated.

<End determination processing>
Next, as the processing at the end of the bonus, the end determination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the end determination process is a process executed in step S614 in the bonus state process (FIG. 27). In the termination determination process, it is determined whether or not the bonus termination condition is satisfied, and when the bonus is terminated, the AT mode or the like won after the bonus is won but before the bonus is won, or the AT mode or the like is won during the bonus. In addition to performing processing for notification, processing for adding the number of games such as AT mode is performed.

That is, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not a minor winning combination has been established. During the 1st BB and 2nd BB bonuses, the 1st role in the BB is established with a high probability, and in some cases, the 2nd role in the BB, the 3rd role in the BB, the so-called rare roles such as strong cherry and strong watermelon are established ( Figure 28). When the 1st role is won during BB, the 1st minor role is mainly won and 9 medals are paid out, and in other cases, 3 to 9 medals are paid out or medals are missed. No payout occurs. Also, during the CB, any of the CB medium and small wins 1 to CB small and medium wins 4 is won, and even if you win any of them, the first small win is mainly established and the predetermined number (15) of medals will be paid out. Step S1801 is a process for determining whether or not a small winning combination that causes a medal payout has been established among the winning combinations during the bonus or CB.

If it is determined in step S1801 that a minor winning combination has been established, then in step S1802 processing is performed to subtract the current game payout number from the remaining payout number. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, or after the processing of step S1802 is executed, it is determined in step S1803 whether or not the remaining number of payouts has become 0. If it is not 0, the end determination process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, after a bonus end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1804, in steps S1805 to S1814, processing for notification of winning such as AT mode, AT mode, etc. Processing for adding the number of continuous games is performed.

In step S1805, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. If the AT mode win flag is set, the number of precursor games is selected in step S1806, the number of precursor games is set in step S1807, and the precursor command is set in step S1808. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, in the lottery process for the number of precursor games in step S1806, a lottery is performed in which the number of precursor games is 0 with a probability of 100%. That is, in step S1807, the number of premonitory games of 0 game is always set, and the success of the AT mode or the like is announced in the next game after the bonus ending game. After executing the process of step S1808, the end determination process is terminated.

If the AT mode winning flag is not set in step S1805, it is determined in step S1809 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the portent mode of steps S1806 to S1808 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated.

In addition, the case where the bonus ends when the AT mode win flag is set is when the AT mode and the bonus are won at the same time, when the AT mode is won after the bonus win but before the bonus win, This is when the AT mode is won during the bonus, or when the bonus is won during the premonition mode of the AT mode winning notification. On the other hand, when the bonus is terminated while the VB mode win flag is set, the VB mode and the bonus are won at the same time in the AT mode, or when the VB mode is entered after the bonus win but before the bonus win. These are the case of winning, the case of winning the VB mode during the bonus, and the case of winning the bonus during the premonition mode of the notification of the winning of the VB mode.

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1809, the process proceeds to step S1810. In step S1810, it is determined whether or not the AT mode addition flag is set. If the AT mode addition flag is not set, the end determination process is terminated. If the AT mode addition flag is set, AT mode addition game number lottery processing is performed in step S1811, AT mode game addition processing is performed in step S1812, and addition notification processing is performed in step S1813. , and an addition command is set in step S1814. The processes of steps S1811 to S1814 are the same as the processes of steps S1017 to S1020. After executing the process of step S1814, the end determination process ends.

As described above, on the main controller 101 side, (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) winning result. As a result of the processing for shifting the display mode based on , the pressing order notification effect is generated by the auxiliary display section 65, the game state is shifted so as to follow the transition of the display mode, and further, A pressing order bell winning can be generated by the pressing order notification performance by the auxiliary display section 65, and a large amount of medals can be expected to be obtained.

Here, when the pressing order replay or the pressing order bell win is performed, if the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 (the pressing order notification effect by the display control device 81) is performed, in addition to the pressing order notification effect, the main control The instruction monitor 68 connected to the device 101 also informs of the pressing order. The configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 51(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the indication monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and layout as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for pushing down. For example, as shown in FIG. 51(b), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right", which is advantageous for the player. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are illuminated and "1" is displayed. Further, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible for the player to win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is a transition to an advantageous section, and a predetermined start condition including a notification condition in which an AT mode winning notification is performed and an AT notification flag is set, etc. is established, the light is lit in the game in which the start condition is established. Also, when the AT mode or SAT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the light is turned off.

That is, the navigation state (AT mode, SAT mode, high frequency mode) in which the operation order of the push order bell and the push order replay can be easily reported to the player in an advantageous manner to facilitate winning, and the navigation state can be changed. A chance state (CZ mode, first BB, high probability mode) that makes it easier to win the transition lottery, or a winning state that has won the lottery but has not transitioned to the navigation state or chance state. The section including (winning mode) is an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is illuminated during the specific section in which the benefits of the push order notification can be obtained in the advantageous section. , a section indicator (specific notification means) which is extinguished during a normal section that is not an advantageous section or during a non-specific section that is an advantageous section but is not a specific section.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display displays the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who advances the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display units (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display units. The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

Hereinafter, as processes related to lighting/lighting out of the eighth display segment N8, the first section display process and the second section display process will be described.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process executed in step S316 in the lottery process (FIG. 16), in which the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is being lit indicates the case in which, among the advantageous sections, the specific section satisfies at least the notification condition that the push order notification may occur. If a negative determination is made in step S1901 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1902.

In step S1902, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As already explained, the advantageous section flag is a flag that is set in the advantageous section transition lottery process (FIG. 32) when the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won. If the advantageous section flag has been set, it is determined in step S1903 whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag has been set. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, a process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1904. If the advantageous section winning game flag is not set in step S1903, the process proceeds to step S1905.

In step S1905, it is determined whether or not the counting of the number of games in the advantageous interval, more specifically, the counting of the number of advantageous interval games AG in the various counter areas 106e has started. If the measurement of the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has not started, processing for starting the measurement of the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is performed in step S1906. The number of games in the advantageous interval AG corresponds to grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous interval, and the process of adding one to each game in the advantageous interval is executed.

If it is determined in step S1905 that the measurement has already started, or if the process of step S1906 has been executed, the process advances to step S1907. In step S1907, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. As already explained, when the AT mode winning notification is performed and the AT notification flag is set, the pushing order notification when the pushing winning role is won becomes possible, and the above notification conditions are satisfied. . If it is determined in step S1907 that the AT notification flag is set, then in step S1908 the eighth display segment N8 is turned on to start displaying the section display. In addition, in the main controller 101, when starting to display the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator in the lighting state, a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound "Gago!") is emitted from the speaker 64. A command for sound output is output to the display control device 81 so that sound) is output. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 so as to emit the predetermined sound effect based on the sound output command. Incidentally, when the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started, an effect may be generated in the auxiliary display section 65 or another display section. The configuration may be such that the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like so that the corresponding effect is performed.

If it is determined in step S1901 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step S1909 processing is executed to continue the display during the advantageous section. Specifically, in step S1909, processing is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

If it is determined in step S1902 that the advantageous interval flag is not set, or if the game is a winning game even if the advantageous interval flag is set (after executing the processing of step S1904), the winning game Even if not, if the situation does not allow the pressing order notification to occur (if it is determined in step S1907 that the AT notification flag is not set), the process proceeds to step S1910. In step S1910, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

After executing the display start processing of the section indicator in step S1908 and after executing the display continuation processing in step S1909, the process proceeds to step S1911. In step S1911, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1910 or step S1911, the role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1912. In this process, the value of the second role ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first role ratio counter and the second role ratio counter. That is, the role ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step S1913, a process for displaying the calculation processing result of step S1912 on the role ratio monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each composed of 7 segments for display. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as seven-segment display sections. there is The display segments in the first display portion 77a to the fifth display portion 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources are controlled on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and an arbitrary combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, the role ratio monitor 77 can individually display a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a five-digit number. there is

In step S1913, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1912 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and each display section 77a to 77e in the role ratio monitor 77 is displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Control the display. Specifically, out of the total number of games, the ratio of the number of games in which the push order notification can occur is a number smaller than 1, such as "0.5012", and up to four decimal places. A number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 . After executing the process of step S1913, the section display first process ends.

It should be noted that the display control of the role ratio monitor 77 may be performed after rounding off the fifth digit below the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step S1912. In addition, since the first display portion 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display portion 77a may be omitted, or the first display portion 77a may be printed. A configuration in which "0" is always displayed by is also possible. A decimal point may be displayed by printing or the like between the first display portion 77a and the second display portion 77b.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the second section display process is a process that is executed in step S415 of the reel control process. etc. (processing for dealing with winning results) is performed.

In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the section display second process is terminated. If the advantageous interval flag is set, in step S2002, a process of counting the number of games during the advantageous interval is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. After executing the process of step S2002, in step S2003, the process of updating the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The advantageous interval increase/decrease number ZM is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the increase/decrease number of medals in the advantageous interval (the difference between the number of medals betted and the number of medals paid out in each game in the advantageous interval). In S2003, based on the winning result of the current game (previous winning result handling process and payout determination process), the number of medals increased or decreased (the number of medals paid out in the current game - the number of bets in the current game) is grasped. Then, a process of adding the medal increase/decrease number to the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM is performed. For example, if the current game is a 3-bet game and nine medals are paid out, the medal increase/decrease number is +6, and in step S2003, +6 is added to the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM. If the current game is a 3-bet game and medals are not paid out, the medal increase/decrease number is -3, and in step S2003, -3 is added to the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM.

After executing the process of step S2003, the remaining game number management process is executed in step S2004, and the remaining number management process is executed in the following step S2005. The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. The number-of-remaining-numbers management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the upper limit number of increases in the advantageous section based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode.

Specifically, regarding the number-of-remaining-games management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 54, first, in step S2101, the number of predictive games G1 is grasped. The number of precursor games G1 indicates the number of remaining precursor mode games, for example, when the current state is the precursor mode in the advantageous section, and is decremented by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 49). . In step S2102, the AT mode continuation count G2 is grasped. The AT mode continuation number G2 represents the number of remaining AT mode games, for example, when the current state is the AT mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 49). . In step S2103, the VB mode continuation number G3 is grasped. The VB mode continuation count G3 represents the number of remaining VB mode games, for example, when the current state is the VB mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 49). . In step S2104, the specialized zone continuation number G4 is grasped. The specialized zone continuation number G4 represents the number of games remaining in the specialized zone, for example, when the current status is the specialized zone in the advantageous section, and is set by one for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 49). subtracted. In step S2105, the number of remaining BB games G5 is grasped. The number of remaining BB games G5 represents the number of remaining BB mode games, for example, when the current state is the BB mode (bonus state) in the advantageous section, and is performed each time the game number management process (FIG. 49) is started. Then, it is decremented by 1 in a subtraction process (not shown) on condition that the BB mode is on.

Here, values of 0 or more may be input to these continuation numbers G1 to G5 even if the mode or zone does not correspond to the current situation. Specifically, for example, in VB mode, specialized zone, or BB mode, counting the number of remaining games in AT mode is stopped. When a transition occurs, a value of 0 or more is input to the AT mode continuation count G2 and the continuation count of each mode.

In step S2106, a process of calculating the number of remaining games ZG in the advantageous section is performed by integrating G1 to G5 grasped in each process of steps S2101 to S2105. By performing such processing, it is possible to grasp how many games the advantageous section continues. In the following step S2107, the number of games in the advantageous interval (the number of games in the advantageous interval AG) and the remaining number of games ZG are added to calculate the total number of games in the advantageous interval SG. Then, in step S2108, the number of vacant games (the number of vacant games that can be added, the number of remaining games) FG is calculated by subtracting the above-mentioned total number of games SG in the advantageous interval from 1500G, which is the upper limit number of continuous games in the advantageous interval. process.

After the processing of step S2108 is performed, it is determined in step S2109 whether or not the number of idle games FG is greater than 0, that is, whether or not there is the number of idle games and can be added. If the free game number FG is greater than 0, the remaining game number management process is terminated. On the other hand, if the free game number FG is 0 or less, the process of setting the first excess flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S2110, and then the remaining game number management process is terminated. The first excess flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is specified that the first condition for forced termination of the advantageous section is satisfied.

In the remaining number management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 55, first, in step S2201, the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM updated in step S2003 is grasped. In the subsequent step S2202, the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG (step S2106) calculated in the remaining game management processing in step S2004 and the expected net increase in the number of games in the advantageous section stored in the ROM 105 (expected increase/decrease number KM), a process of calculating the remaining increase/decrease expected number NM that can be obtained in the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is executed. In this embodiment, the expected increase/decrease number of sheets KM is the net increase in number of sheets (about +2.46 sheets) that takes into account the bonus state when the advantageous section is digested in the high RT state in the situation where the above-mentioned push order notification occurs. ) is used. That is, for example, if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is 500 games, the expected remaining increase/decrease number of cards NM is 500 games×2.46 cards=1230 cards.

In step S2203, based on the advantageous zone increase/decrease number ZM grasped in step S2201 and the expected remaining increase/decrease number NM calculated in step S2202, the current number of remaining games in the advantageous zone is taken into account to obtain during the current advantageous zone. A process of calculating the number of sheets expected to increase or decrease (total increase/decrease expected number of sheets SM) is performed. Then, in step S2204, a process of calculating the number of blank sheets FM that can be increased is performed. The processing of step S2204 corresponds to the processing of calculating the number of vacant games FG that can be added in step S2108 in the number-of-remaining-games management processing. The process of step S2204 predicts in advance that the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated under the second forced termination condition in the subsequent game. It is a process to That is, in step S2204, the total expected increase/decrease number of sheets SM calculated in step S2203 is subtracted from 2400 sheets, which is the upper limit increase in the advantageous section.

In step S2205, based on the result of processing in step S2204, it is determined whether or not the number of blank sheets FM that can be increased becomes 0 or less, and the process will be forcibly terminated under the second forced termination condition in the future. If the number of empty sheets FM is equal to or greater than 1, it is determined that the number of increments has not reached the upper limit, and the remaining number management processing is terminated. If the empty number FM is 0 or less, the process advances to step S2206 to set the second excess flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and then the remaining number management process ends. The second excess flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the second forced termination condition can be satisfied thereafter.

By setting the first excess flag and the second excess flag, in this embodiment, even if a specific role is won during the advantageous section, the execution of the lottery for adding the number of games during the AT mode is restricted. . More specifically, for example, in step S1014 or step S1201 AT mode game number addition lottery process, if the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set, the lottery process is executed. Restricted, no additional winnings (or even if winning, additional 0 games will be added). As a result, it is possible to suppress the misunderstanding that the advantageous section will continue for the upper limit number of games or more by adding to the amount that cannot be continued.

It should be noted that once the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, the remaining game number management process may not be executed in the current advantageous interval.

Returning to the description of the second section display process (FIG. 53), after executing the process of step S2005, in step S2006, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous section AG has reached the upper limit number of games of 1500, or It is determined whether or not the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM has reached 2400 or more, which is the upper limit increase number. If any of these forced termination conditions are satisfied, the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games ZM are cleared to 0 in step S2007. In the following step S2008, processing for ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed. Then, in step S2009, after performing processing for initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section, the second section display processing is terminated.

More specifically, the data initialization process in step S2009 is a process of resetting the flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous section and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section to their initial values. . For example, if the AT mode winning flag or the like is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, or the VB mode winning flag is set during the AT mode, and if the flag remains set until this initialization process, these winning clear the flag. Also, in the initialization processing, if the AT notification flag, AT mode flag, VB mode flag, special zone flag, etc. are set, these flags are also cleared. Furthermore, if the omen counter, the counter for the number of continued games such as the attack mode, etc. are greater than zero, these counters are all reset to zero. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters affecting the performance related to the push order notification regarding the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and clears the RAM for such variables and parameters. This is the process of performing

If it is determined in step S2006 that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached the upper limit value, or if it is determined that the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous section ZM has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process advances to step S2010 to normally end the advantageous section. Determine whether the conditions are met. More specifically, neither the AT mode winning flag nor the AT mode flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the number of remaining continuous games including the mode higher than the AT mode is 0. If neither the AT mode winning flag nor the AT mode flag is set, the process advances to step S2007 to perform advantageous section end processing in steps S2007 to S2009, and then end the second section display processing. If a negative determination is made in step S2010, the section display second process is terminated. In this case, the lighting display of the section indicator (the eighth display segment N8) continues.

<Regarding the display of the push order indicator and section indicator and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be described with reference to FIG.

In the present slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 56, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is extinguished (not lit) in the normal section which is not the advantageous section. In this normal section, push order notification is not performed. In other words, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have such an instruction function as opposed to the advantageous section that has an instruction function such as notification of the pressing order. A situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

In the normal section, for example, if you win a lottery to transition to an advantageous section by winning a weak watermelon role, etc., the number of games executed in the advantageous section from the game following the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established (advantageous section game counting of number AG) is started. Then, when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won in the advantageous section, and the winning notification and the AT notification flag are set, etc., when the push order notification can occur, the condition for starting the display of the section indicator is set. The eighth display segment N8 lights up assuming that it has been established.

After that, under the condition that the eighth display segment N8 is lit, the pressing order notification is generated using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. In this case, as described above, the pressing order information (“1” to “6”) is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. You can understand the order. In the push order notification, the display of the push order information starts when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and the display ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If this game is not the final game of the advantageous section, only the display of the pushing order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is terminated when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, and the eighth display is displayed. The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the pushing order is won again in the next game and thereafter, the pushing order information corresponding to the pushing order is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, or the number of increased medals in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number, etc., when the final game of the advantageous section is reached, the eighth display segment N8 is also turned off to notify the advantageous section. ends. In the present embodiment, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the payout of medals is finished in the final game of the advantageous section (by the second section display process which is the process after the payout determination process). If medals are not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. This allows the player to clearly understand that the game was the last game in the advantageous section.

As described above, the number of games in the advantageous interval is counted from the game following the game in which the lottery for transition to the advantageous interval has been won, while the pressing order is announced only during the period when the eighth display segment N8 is illuminated. Occur. In other words, even if it is an advantageous section, in a section (non-specific section) in which the eighth display segment N8 is turned off, the push order notification does not occur. In other words, by confirming whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is lit, it is possible to enjoy at least the benefits of the pushing order notification among the advantageous sections (specific section, substantial increase section). can be clearly understood. By doing so, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between a player who finishes the game without knowing that the situation is such that he/she can enjoy the benefits of the pushing order notification and a succeeding player who takes a seat after that. can be made In other words, in a situation where the eighth display segment N8 is not lit, the pressing order notification does not occur, so the game can be gracefully ended.

In addition, in the slot machine 10, regarding the game property of changing the degree of advantage by informing of the pressing order, especially regarding the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, the advantage is configured so that there is no difference in the degree of advantage due to the set value. Situations such as the AT mode where push order notification can occur are included in the advantageous section, and push order notification does not occur not only in the situation where the section display is not displayed in the advantageous section, but also in the normal section. In other words, in the game in which the benefits of the pressing order information are to be obtained, there is no difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section as the first stage. By doing so, the slot machine 10 provides a uniform advantage level for each gaming table (set value) and each game (situation), eliminates advantage/disadvantage between players, and obtains a privilege by aiming for a pattern. It is possible to realize a well-balanced game machine while fully enjoying the original game property and the relationship with the game property by the accompanying pushing order information.

<Processing related to notification effects on the sub side>
Next, as (4) processing related to notification effect on the sub side, processing for various notifications performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side will be described. As processing for various notifications, effect setting processing is provided which is executed at a predetermined cycle (cycle of 1.49 msec). Therefore, the effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the effect setting process, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in RAM 183 is executed in step S2302. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S2301, or if the process of step S2302 has been executed, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not the newly received command was a command at the time of betting. The betting time command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the betting operation being performed. In addition to the betting command set in step S207 of the normal processing, the mode transition notification processing (see 45) includes an AT mode winning notification command, a VB mode winning notification command, a bonus winning notification command, and the like. In the case of these bet time commands, a bet time effect setting process is executed in step S2304.

If a negative determination is made in step S2303, or if the processing of step S2304 has been executed, it is determined in step S2305 whether or not the newly received command was the start command. The command at the start is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery process, the first to There are precursor commands and additional commands set in the third special combination process (FIGS. 33 to 36), push order notification commands set in the push order process (FIG. 47), and the like. In the case of these start time commands, a start time effect setting process is executed in step S2306.

If a negative determination is made in step S2305, or if the process of step S2306 has been executed, it is determined in step S2307 whether or not the newly received command was a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In the case of the stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, at step S2308, effect setting processing at each stop operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2307, or if the processing of step S2308 has been executed, it is determined in step S2309 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stopped command is a command output from the main controller 101 when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and is a winning result set in step S411 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). In addition to commands, AT mode start command, VB mode start command, special zone start command, AT mode end command, VB mode end command, special zone end command, third There are a 1 fixed RT start command, a 2 fixed RT start command, and the like. In the case of these all-stop commands, a full-stop effect setting process is executed in step S2310.

If a negative determination is made in step S2309, or after the process of step S2310 is executed, other processes are executed in step S2311, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step S2311, setting effects based on commands from the main control unit 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.), and connecting without going through the main control unit 101 Based on the signal from the detected sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), the setting of the effect, the setting for error notification, etc. are performed.

Below, the effect setting process at the time of betting, the effect setting process at the time of start, the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation, and the effect setting process at the time of all stop will be described. Note that each effect setting process will be described with reference to schematic diagrams of display effects in FIGS. 67 to 72. FIG.

<Production setting processing at the time of betting>
The effect setting process at the time of betting will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning notification command is included in the betting time command received this time. When the AT mode winning notification command is included, in step S2402, a process for setting the AT mode winning notification effect is performed. In the AT mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "AT confirmed". In addition, in the AT mode winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice, "I did it!") is emitted.

If the AT mode winning notification command is not included in step S2401, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not the VB mode winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the VB mode winning notification command is included, in step S2404, processing for setting the VB mode winning notification effect is performed. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(b), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "V-BONUS confirmed". In addition, in the VB mode winning notification presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices "super lucky!") is emitted.

If the VB mode winning notification command is not included in step S2403, it is determined in step S2405 whether or not the bonus winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the bonus winning notification command is included, in step S2406, processing for setting the bonus winning notification effect is performed. In the bonus winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the text "You did it! Bonus confirmed". In addition, in the bonus winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices saying "I did it!") is emitted.

If the bonus winning notification command is not included in step S2405, it is determined in step S2407 whether or not the specialized zone winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the special zone winning notification command is included, in step S2408, processing for setting the special zone winning notification effect is performed. In the special zone winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters such as "Ride on!". In addition, in the special zone winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a thick, ecstatic male voice, "Norinori!") is emitted.

After executing any one of the processes of step S2402, step S2404, step S2406 and step S2408, or when a negative determination is made in step S2407, in step S2409, after setting other effects at the time of betting, this End the effect setting process. In the process of step S2409, for example, in response to the reception of the bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit input switches 56 to 58 corresponding to the bet number are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. Alternatively, for example, processing for returning from the demo mode in which one condition is that no game has been played for a predetermined time, or lighting a lamp around the start lever 41 to inform that the operation is valid. processing, etc.

<Start effect setting processing>
Next, the start effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2501, display mode setting processing is performed. In this processing, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main controller 101 side is the normal mode, AT mode, VB mode, or special zone, and the auxiliary display is performed in the corresponding display mode. It is set so that the display effect of the part 65 is performed. Specifically, in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side, an area for setting an AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag is provided as a flag for grasping the display mode. A corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode and cleared at the end. In step S2501, by grasping these various mode flags, the current display mode is specified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

In subsequent step S2502, processing for pending shift is executed. The pending shift process is a process for displaying pending information regarding the AT mode transition lottery, and this process will be described later in detail.

In step S2503, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is the first prize. In the case of winning the pushing order, in step S2504, processing for notification of pushing order is performed. Here, the pressing order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the pressing order notification command is included in the start time command received this time. If the pressing order notification command is not included, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the pressing order notification command is included, the process advances to step S2602.

In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the current lottery results are the first promotion replays 1-4. In the case of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, in step S2603, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the pressing order that the third replay win is established, and then the pressing order notification processing is performed. exit.

If it is determined in step S2602 that the first promotion replays 1-4 are not won, it is determined in step S2604 whether or not the current lottery result is drop replays 1-3. In the case of falling replays 1 to 3, the process advances to step S2605 to control the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to perform push order notification that the first replay win is established, and then finish the push order notification process. do.

If it is determined in step S2604 that the replays are not falling replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2606 whether or not the current lottery results are the second promotion replays 1 and 2. If it is the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2607 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect or the specialized zone winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S2404 and the special zone winning notification effect in step S2408, the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 indicate that VB winning or special zone winning has been announced. set a flag. The alerted flag is cleared upon transition to the VB mode or specialized zone. Then, in step S2607, the presence or absence of the notified flag may be determined. If the VB mode or special zone winning announcement has been completed, in step S2608, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to announce the pressing order in which the 4th and 5th regame winnings are established. , terminates the pressing order notification process. If the notification of winning in the VB mode or the special zone has not been completed, the process advances to step S2605 to perform notification of the pressing order for the first regame winning prize, and then terminate the processing for notification of the pressing order.

If it is determined in step S2606 that it is not the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2609 whether or not the current lottery result is BAR replay. In the case of BAR replay, it is determined in step S2610 whether or not the special zone winning notification effect has been executed. If it has already been announced that the special zone has been won, in step S2611, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to perform push order notification that the 7th regame win is established, and then the push order notification process is executed. finish. If the special zone winning notification has not been completed, the process advances to step S2603 to perform the pressing order notification for the third re-game winning prize, and then terminate the pressing order notification process.

If it is determined in step S2609 that it is not a BAR replay, it is determined in step S2612 whether or not the current lottery result is Bell. If the bell is won, in step S2613, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the pressing order that the bell wins as the first minor combination, and then the pressing order notification processing is terminated. .

If a negative determination is made in step S2612, it is determined in step S2614 whether or not the current lottery result is transition replay. If the transition replay is won, the special notification execution process is executed in step S2615, and then the push order notification process is terminated. The processing of steps S2614 and S2615 is processing for embodiments in which transition replay may be won, and these processing will be described in detail later. If a negative determination is made in step S2614, the pressing order notification process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start (FIG. 59), if it is determined in step S2503 that the winning combination is not pushed, it is determined in step S2505 whether or not the transition opportunity combination has been won. If the transition opportunity is won, a process for notification of the transition opportunity is performed in step S2506. The transition trigger notification process will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S2505, or after the processing of step S2504 or step S2506 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2507. In step S2507, it is determined whether or not an add-on command has been received as the current start command. When the add-on command is received, in step S2508, the process of setting the add-on effect in advance is performed so that the add-on effect for the number of games corresponding to the add-on command is executed when the game is stopped. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 67(a) to 67(c), the auxiliary display section 65 displays a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games. In addition, in the additional effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “kyukyukyukyuuuin!”) is emitted.

Details of the processing for setting the additional effect in step S2508 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2701, a process of grasping the number of added games to be notified is performed based on the added command received this time. In the following step S2702, processing for grasping notification timing is executed. The notification timing is the timing for executing the additional effect, and the timing is determined by the process (additional notification process) on the side of the main controller 101 described above. Information on the determined timing is set in the above-mentioned add-on command and output. Therefore, on the side of the display control device 81, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the addition effect should be executed by reading the addition command. As the notification timing, a game in which an additional effect should be executed and a timing corresponding to the stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 are set.

After grasping the notification timing in step S2702, it is determined in step S2703 whether or not the result of grasping in step S2702 is that an additional effect is to be performed in the current game. The case where the addition notification is not performed in the current game is the case where the subsequent addition notification is selected, and in this case, the setting processing of the addition effect is finished as it is. If an additional effect is to be performed in the current game, it is determined in step S2704 whether or not any of the reels is stopped and ON as the execution timing of the additional effect in the current game. If it is the stop ON time, in step S2705, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set, and the setting is made so that the additional effect is generated when the target reel is operated to stop ON. Specifically, a process of setting any of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. These flags are flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing of occurrence of the additional effect. Further, in step S2705, the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games to be generated at the time of the stop ON operation is read from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in the predetermined effect data setting area. I do. When the CPU 181 grasps that the additional performance is generated at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, the CPU 181 reads the performance data temporarily stored in the performance data setting area so that the additional performance is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2704, it is determined in step S2706 whether or not the stop OFF operation of the first reel or the second reel has been performed. If these reels are to be stopped and turned OFF, in step S2707, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set so that the additional effect is generated when the target reel is stopped and turned OFF. Specifically, a process of setting either the first reel stop OFF operation flag or the second reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. These flags are also flags for the CPU 181 to comprehend the timing of generating the additional effect. Also, in step S2707, the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is read out from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in the predetermined effect data setting area.

When a negative determination is made in step S2706, in step S2708, the current additional effect is set to occur when all the reels are stopped (when the third reel is stopped and turned OFF). Specifically, a process of setting a third reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. Also, in step S2708, temporary storage processing of effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is performed. After executing the processing of step S2705, step S2707 or step S2708, the setting processing of the additional effect is terminated.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start, if the addition command is not received in step S2507, or after the process of step S2508 is executed, the effect setting process during bonus is executed in step S2509, and the process proceeds to step S2510. Then, in step S2511, after setting other start effects, the start effect setting process is terminated. The during-bonus effect setting process and the continuous effect setting process will be described later in detail. In the process of step S2511, for example, an effect indicating the lottery result is set corresponding to the start of the game, or the lamp around the start lever 41 is extinguished to notify that the operation has been accepted.

<Production setting processing at each stop operation>
Next, the effect setting processing at the time of stop operation performed in step S2308 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2801, it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed during the stop operation of each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, the process advances to step S2802 to determine whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and ON is set as the effect of the current game. If not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2803 whether or not the stop ON operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the set stop ON operation effect. If it is not the stop ON operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. If it is the stop ON operation of the target reel, in step S2804, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the stop ON operation effect is performed, and then this setting process ends.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop ON operation effect, as shown in FIG. 67(a), the auxiliary display section 65 An additional performance will occur at . Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

Further, for example, if the current game is a winning push order and a push order notification effect is set, the corresponding reel stops based on each stop ON operation, so that the push order notification effect is the next operation target. It changes to the production that shows the reel that becomes. Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating before the effect at the time of the stop ON operation, the display that the first reel is to be operated is displayed as shown in FIG. 46(a). . Then, when the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the next reel to be operated (right reel 32R in the figure) shown in FIG. 46(b) is displayed. change in performance. Further, if two reels are rotating before the effect at the time of the stop ON operation, a display is made in which the second reel is to be stopped as shown in FIG. When the reels are stopped, the display changes to the display indicating that the third reel is to be stopped (FIG. 46(c)).

If a negative determination is made in step S2801, the process advances to step S2805 to determine whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 among the stop operations of the reels is completed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2805, the process advances to step S2806 to determine whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned OFF is set as the effect of the current game. If it is not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2807 whether or not the stop OFF operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the set stop OFF operation effect. If it is not the stop OFF operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. In the case of the stop OFF operation of the target reel, in step S2808, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop OFF operation is performed, and then this setting process ends.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop OFF operation effect, as shown in FIG. At the timing when the hand is released, an additional performance is generated on the auxiliary display section 65. - 特許庁Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2805, the effect setting process is terminated.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of all stop will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the AT mode start command is included in the currently received stop command. When the AT mode start command is included, in step S2902, processing for setting AT mode start effect is performed. In the AT mode start presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 69A, the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "AT start!! LV.1". In addition, in the AT mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice, "Let's go!") is emitted.

Incidentally, the display of "LV.1" in the AT mode start effect corresponds to the AT mode level. That is, the AT mode started this time is LV. This is a display indicating the 1 mode. When the AT mode level is LV. When the mode is promoted to the 2nd mode (when the promotion command is received), the characters "LV.2" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 as promotion effects. Also, if the AT mode level is LV. When promoted to 3 mode, the text "LV.3" is displayed, and LV. When promoted to 4 mode, the characters "LV.4" are displayed.

If the AT mode start command is not included in step S2901, it is determined in step S2903 whether or not the AT mode end command is included as the currently received stop command. When the AT mode end command is included, in step S2904, processing for setting AT mode end effect is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 69(b), in the AT mode ending effect, characters "AT END" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the current AT mode (including VB mode and special zone) is displayed. , and the total number of payouts for the current AT mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus). In addition, in the AT mode termination presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "see you later" in a high-pitched voice of a woman) is emitted.

If the AT mode end command is not included in step S2903, it is determined in step S2905 whether or not the VB mode start command is included as the currently received stop command. If the VB mode start command is included, in step S2906, processing for setting the VB mode start effect is performed. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "777 Lucky!!". In addition, in the VB mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices "bonus start!") is emitted.

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2905, it is determined in step S2907 whether or not the VB mode end command is included in the currently received stop command. When the VB mode end command is included, in step S2908, processing for setting a VB mode end effect is performed. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(b), the characters "V-BONUS END" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the AT mode continuation game at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. The number of continuous games (including VB mode and special zone) is displayed, and the total payout number of AT mode (including VB mode, special zone and bonus) at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. In addition, in the VB mode end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices saying "It's still going on") is emitted.

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2907, it is determined in step S2909 whether or not the special zone start command is included in the currently received stop command. When the special zone start command is included, in step S2910, processing for setting the special zone start effect is performed. In the specialized zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Add Challenge!" A character is displayed to indicate that In addition, in the special zone start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Let's go" in a boy's voice) is emitted.

If the special zone start command is not included in step S2909, it is determined in step S2911 whether or not the special zone end command is included in the currently received stopping command. When the special zone end command is included, in step S2912, processing for setting the special zone end effect is performed. In the special zone end presentation, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the total number of games added in the special zone this time. In addition, in the special zone end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “kyukyukyukyuuuin!”) is emitted. It is preferable to change the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effects emitted from the speaker 64 according to the total number of additional games.

If the special zone end command is not included in step S2911, it is determined in step S2913 whether or not the bonus end command is included as the currently received stop command. When the bonus end command is included, in step S2914, processing for setting the bonus end effect is performed. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of payouts obtained during the bonus, and if the bonus is shifted to AT mode, VB mode, or special zone, AT mode ( Display the total number of payouts for VB mode, special zone, and bonus). In addition, in the bonus end effect, a character or the like suggesting these contents is performed according to the suitability of the AT mode and the number of additional games.

After executing any of steps S2902, S2904, S2906, S2908, S2910, S2912, and S2914, or after making a negative determination in step S2913, the process proceeds to step S2915. In step S2915, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the additional effect when the additional effect is set. As already explained, the setting of the additional effect is performed in step S2507 in the start effect setting process. Specifically, in the setting process of the additional effect (FIG. 61), when the generation timing of the additional effect of this time is set at the time of full stop, as shown in FIG. , 32R are stopped, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display portion 65. - 特許庁Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

After that, in step S2916, processing for pending display is executed. The pending display processing is processing for displaying pending information regarding the AT mode transition lottery, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step S2917, after setting other effects at the time of stop, the main effect setting process is terminated. In step S2917, for example, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, sound effect corresponding to the payout number of the winning combination is emitted from the speaker 64, or control is performed during replay. The speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the automatic betting.

As described above, based on various commands from the main controller 101, the display control device 81 performs various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. In addition, on the display control device 81 side, in addition to notification of the transition of the display mode, processing for effects during various games is performed.

<Production processing during various games>
In this embodiment, effects during bonuses and continuous effects are provided as effects during various games. The effect during the bonus is a effect performed in each game during the bonus state that is shifted based on the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. A continuous effect is a effect that makes the player expect an advantageous result (winning a bonus, AT mode, VB mode, etc.), and is performed over a plurality of times (four times in this embodiment). This is an effect that can be continued, and is an effect in which it is notified whether or not the advantageous result was obtained in the final round of the game.

<Bonus production setting process>
First, the effect setting processing during bonus will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The during-bonus effect setting process is a process executed in step S2509 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 59).

In the bonus effect setting process, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the bonus game is started from the current game. The bonus game corresponds to the game from the game after winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB to the end of the bonus. The affirmative determination in step S3001 means that the 1st BB or the 2nd BB winning has been established in the previous game. In this case, in step S3002, a process of grasping the bonus type of this time is performed. More specifically, it is determined whether the current bonus game is based on the first BB winning or the second BB winning. Then, in step S3003, a bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type ascertained in step S3002 is set. When a negative determination is made in step S3001, or after the processing of step S3003 is executed, the during-bonus effect setting processing is terminated.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the contents of the bonus effect are different between the bonus game based on the first BB winning and the bonus game based on the second BB winning to such an extent that the player can identify them. More specifically, in the bonus game based on the 1st BB winning, the auxiliary display section 65 is set with a bonus effect in which live-action moving image effects are performed, and in the bonus game based on the 2nd BB winning, the animation A bonus effect is set in which the effect is performed by. Also, the sound effects (songs) output from the speaker 64 are different between the first BB and the second BB.

Both bonus effects are effects that are performed independently regardless of the progress of the game, and are set to be performed repeatedly as long as the bonus game continues. For example, a five-minute animation performance or animation performance is set as a unit performance, and when the unit performance ends after five minutes have passed since the start of the bonus performance, the unit performance is set to start again from the beginning. Note that the effect on the auxiliary display section 65 may be stopped at the screen at the end of the unit effect, and only the sound effect (song) may be repeated. Moreover, the effects on the auxiliary display section 65 may be performed in synchronization with the progress of each game, and only the sound effects (songs) may be performed independently regardless of the progress of each game.

<Processing for continuous production>
The outline of the continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG.

For example, as shown in FIG. 72(a), at the start of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of times the continuous effect is continued is displayed (in the figure, four stages are displayed corresponding to the continuous effect of four games). It shows the daruma dropping performance). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued (the figure shows the effect that the first daruma drop is successful, It indicates that the continuous production will continue). If the continuous effect is interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify that the continuous effect will end in the middle (for example, an effect that the daruma drop in the first step fails). ). The effects regarding whether or not to continue the continuous effects are the same in each game in the continuous effects.

As shown in FIG. 72(b), at the start of the second game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is performed (in the figure, the remaining three daruma drop effects). Then, at the end of the second game, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued (the figure shows the effect that the second daruma drop is successful, indicating that the continuous effect is continued). ).

As shown in FIG. 72(c), at the start of the third game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is performed (in the figure, the remaining two daruma drop effects). Then, at the end of the third game, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued. ).

As shown in FIG. 72(d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the continuous effect, a display indicating that it is the final game of the continuous effect is performed (in the figure, a daruma drop effect is shown). Then, at the end of the final game, an effect is produced to indicate whether or not the result was advantageous to the player (the drawing shows the effect that the daruma drop in the final stage was successful).

As described above, in the continuous effect, the effect of the previous game is inherited and the effect of the next game is set, and the effect of each game has continuity. In addition, it is possible to clearly recognize what game the current game is from the start of the continuous effect (how many games are there until the end of the continuous effect).

Here, in each game of the continuous effect, whether or not the continuous effect continues to the next game is set so that the continuation rate increases as the game of the continuous effect progresses. That is, at the end of the first game of the continuous effect, there is the highest possibility that the discontinuation of the continuous effect will be reported, and the more the game progresses, the lower the possibility that the discontinuation will be reported. Therefore, in the continuous effect, the player's level of interest greatly differs depending on what game the current game is in the continuous effect, and as the game progresses from the start game to the end game, the player's interest becomes high. .

Hereinafter, as the processing related to the above-described continuous effect, the process for notifying the transitional role (step S2506) and the continuous effect setting process (step S2510) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 59) will be described.

<Transition trigger notification process>
65, first, in step S3101, a chance effect lottery process for determining whether or not to set a chance effect as the present game effect is executed. In the chance effect, as shown in FIG. 71(b), for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters "Chance!!" to correspond to and display each. In addition, in the chance presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "kyui") is emitted. In the chance effect lottery process, for example, a lottery is performed so that the chance effect occurs about half the time when the transition opportunity role is won. It should be noted that the winning probability of the chance effect lottery process may differ depending on the type of transition opportunity combination, display mode, game state, set value, and the like. In subsequent step S3102, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S3101 has been won. If the player wins, in step S3103, a chance effect is set to be performed as the effect of the current game.

Here, in the slot machine 10, a game mode recommended for establishing a winning of each minor combination including the shift trigger combination will be described.

Among the winable hands in each game, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon are set as the so-called small winning combinations that cannot be won depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. . More specifically, as already explained, the strong cherry is a combination that can win any one of the 28th minor combination, the 32nd minor combination to the 35th minor combination, and the 28th minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L, The 32nd to 35th minor symbol symbols are the “cherry” symbol and the “second replay” symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at the timing when the seventh "red bell" symbol to the twentieth "white bell" symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L, None of the 28th minor symbol, the 32nd to 35th minor symbols, ie, the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol, can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a strong cherry combination may be missed.

In addition, the weak cherry is a combination that can win any one of the 27th minor combination, the 32nd minor combination to the 35th minor combination, and the 27th minor combination symbol, the 32nd minor combination symbol to the 32nd minor combination symbol for the left reel 32L. The 35 small combination symbols are a "cherry" symbol and a "second replay" symbol. Even in this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the seventh "red bell" symbol to the twentieth "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, None of the 27th minor symbol, 32nd minor symbol to 35th minor symbol "Cherry" symbol and "2nd replay" symbol can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a weak cherry combination may be missed.

The strong watermelon is a winning combination that can win either the 30th or 41st minor combination, and the 30th or 41st minor combination symbol for the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the ninth “red 7” symbol to the third “white bell” symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, the 30th The minor symbol and the 41st minor symbol "watermelon" cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the strong watermelon combination will be missed.

The weak watermelon is a winning combination that can win either the 29th or 41st minor combination, and the 29th or 41st minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol. Even in this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the ninth "red 7" symbol to the third "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, The 29th minor symbol and the 41st minor symbol "watermelon" cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the weak watermelon combination will be missed.

Then, when the left reel 32L is stopped while leaving the possibility of winning for any of these combinations that can be missed, the fourth "cherry" symbol to the sixth "second replay" symbol are displayed on the left reel 32L. It is necessary to perform a stop operation when reaching the upper stage. In the following description, the operation mode of the left reel 32L is also referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode) as an operation mode that does not cause a failure. It is also called a mode (second operation mode).

In the chance effect set in step S3103, it is suggested that the winning combination of this time is one of the transition trigger roles, but it is set so that it is impossible or difficult to determine which transition trigger role it is. It is That is, when the chance effect is performed, the winning combination of this game is likely to be either a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon, etc., but it is either a strong cherry or a weak cherry. It is not possible to distinguish whether it is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon, or whether it is a strong cherry or a strong watermelon. Therefore, the player operates the left reel 32L in the above-described specific operation mode so as not to cause any failure even if any of the transition timing combinations is won.

Further, the chance effect is not always generated in the game in which the transition opportunity role is won, but is generated under the condition that the game is won in the chance effect lottery process (step S3101). Then, it is recommended to operate the left reel 32L in the above-mentioned specific operation mode every game from the normal time so as not to miss the transition opportunity.

If a negative determination is made in step S3102, or if the process of step S3103 has been performed, the process advances to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included as the current starting command. If no portent command is included, it is determined in step S3105 whether or not an additional command is included as the command at the start of this time. If the add-on command is not included, it is determined in step S3106 whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus is not won, that is, if the lottery result is a transition trigger role such as a strong cherry or a weak watermelon, the lottery for transition to the AT mode or VB mode or the lottery for adding the number of continuous games is won. If not and the bonus has not been won, in step S3107, lottery processing in the pseudo-prediction mode is executed. The pseudo precursor mode is visually difficult to distinguish from the precursor mode. The pseudo precursor mode is a mode that ends without informing the player of an advantageous result based on the completion of the number of pseudo precursor games.

In step S3107, a table for the pseudo-prediction mode lottery is acquired from the table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, and a lottery counter is acquired from the counter area 183b, and a lottery is performed to determine whether the pseudo-prediction mode is to be executed. conduct. In the table for the pseudo-prediction mode lottery, the probability of winning the pseudo-prediction mode lottery is set differently depending on the type of transition opportunity that has been won. It is set so that the probability of winning the lottery in the pseudo omen mode is high.

In step S3108, based on the processing result of step S3107, it is determined whether or not the lottery for the pseudo precursor mode has been won. If the lottery has been won, in step S3109, lottery processing for the number of games in the pseudo-prediction mode is performed. This process corresponds to step S909 and the like on the main controller 101 side, and randomly determines the pseudo precursor game number of 1 out of 1 to 20 by lottery. However, as described above, unlike the portent modes based on various winnings, the number of pseudo portent games is determined to be 20 games or less. Also, in the lottery for the number of pseudo precursor games, 0 games are not selected. In subsequent step S3110, the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S3109 is set in the continuous effect counters provided in the various counter areas 183b. The continuous effect counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result is announced, and is decremented by one for each game. For example, in a configuration in which 4 games are continuously produced, the continuous production is started in the game in which the continuous production counter is 4, and the result is notified in the game in which the continuous production counter is 0. In the present embodiment, when an omen mode or a pseudo omen mode is set, the omen mode or the pseudo omen mode is terminated after a continuous effect. By inputting the number of pseudo precursor games to the continuous production counter in step S3110, when the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode corresponds to the start of continuous production (remaining four games), the continuous production is started. It will happen.

In step S3111, a process of setting a pseudo flag indicating the pseudo precursor mode in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. In the following step S3112, a continuous effect flag is set. After that, the transition trigger notification process is terminated. In addition, when the affirmative determination is made in any one of steps S3104 to S3106, or when the negative determination is made in step S3108, the transition triggering role notification processing is terminated as it is.

<Continuous production setting process>
Next, the continuous effect setting process performed in step S2510 of the start time effect setting process (FIG. 59) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3201, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included in the start command currently received. If an omen command is included, in step S3202, the number of omen games in the omen mode included in the omen command is input to a continuous effect counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the omen mode corresponds to the start of the continuous effect (remaining four games), the continuous effect is started. In step S3202, when the number of precursor games of the 1st to 3rd games is input to the continuous effect counter, the continuous effect is started from the middle. For example, when 2 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S3202, the continuous effect is started from the current game, and is performed from the third game of the continuous effect shown in FIG. 72(c). Further, when 0 is input to the continuous effect counter, that is, when the winning notification of the AT mode or the like is performed without going through the precursor mode, the continuous effect is not executed. After performing the process of step S3202, a continuous effect flag is set in step S3203.

If a negative determination is made in step S3201, or if the process of step S3203 has been executed, the process advances to step S3204. In step S3204, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous effect flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is performed in step S3205. Then, in step S3206, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect. When the continuous effect counter is the number corresponding to the continuous effect, it is determined whether or not the pseudo flag is set in step S3207. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process advances to step S3208 to acquire the present prognostic effect table from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S3209, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the effect table for the indication and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous effect is performed. Perform processing to set as The effect data of the continuous effect specified from the present effect table for indication is effect data indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, and the continuous effect counter is If it is 0, it is effect data indicating that the current continuous effect ends with success.

If it is determined in step S3207 that the pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3210. In step S3210, a pseudo-prediction effect table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S3211, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the effect table for pseudo precursor and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous effect is performed. Perform processing to set as If the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the effect table for the pseudo precursor is effect data indicating that the continuous effect will continue until the next game or effect data indicating that the continuous effect will not continue. If the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data indicates that the current continuous effect ends in failure.

Incidentally, the effect data specified from the pseudo-prediction effect table when the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3 includes data for which no continuous effect is set. For example, when the continuous effect counter is 3 and 2, the effect data of the continuous effect is not set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game in FIG. When the effect data for the first game of effect is set and the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data for the second game of continuous effect indicating that the continuous effect is not continued to the next game in FIG. 72(b) is set. By doing so, it is possible to set an effect in which the continuous effect is interrupted in the game in which the number of pseudo-prediction games in the pseudo-prediction mode is 0.

After performing the processing of step S3209 or step S3211, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is 0 in step S3212. When the continuous effect counter is 0, a process of clearing the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag is performed in step S3213. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. When a negative determination is made in step S3204, step S3206 or step S3212, or after performing the process of step S3213, the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, lottery processing is performed on the side of the main controller 101 based on the insertion of medals as game media and the start operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are activated. When the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are started to rotate and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop, and the combination of symbols stopped on the active line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, the corresponding combination is selected. A plurality of RT states with different probabilities of being replayed as a result of lottery processing are provided in a configuration in which a privilege is given, and the RT state shifts when a corresponding promotion replay or falling replay is won. Whether or not the corresponding replay wins a prize is determined by the result of the lottery and the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the notification of the order of operation is performed according to the result of the lottery process. This is done by winning a shift lottery to shift to an advantageous section, and then winning a lottery to shift to the AT mode included in the advantageous section and shifting to the AT mode. A pressing order bell is provided as a result of the lottery process, and depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to win a prize for the pressing order bell and obtain medals. Then, by shifting to the AT mode and shifting to a second RT state or a third RT state as an RT state in which the replay probability is improved, in the RT state, the pressing order bell winning is established in a state in which the replay probability is improved. It is possible to win a lot of medals.

As already explained, when shifting to the AT mode, the initial number of games (50) is set, and the game can be played in the AT mode over the initial number of games. If an additional lottery is won in the AT mode or the like, the number of continuous games in the AT mode is added, and the number of games that can be played in the AT mode is increased. As a result, the number of medals that can be obtained in the AT mode can also be increased.

When the number of remaining games in AT mode is 0 and the number of remaining games in other display modes in the advantageous section is 0, or when the conditions for forced termination of the advantageous section (complete 1500 games or increase 2400 cards) are met. , end processing of the advantageous section (AT mode) is performed in the second section display processing. As already explained, in the end processing of the advantageous section, various parameters (various types of information) in the advantageous section are initialized so that the information in the advantageous section is not inherited after the advantageous section ends. , the advantageous section and the normal section can be clearly distinguished.

The lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery of the slot machine 10 will be described below.

As already explained, the AT mode shift lottery is executed in the first special combination process of the game after shifting to the advantageous section in the lottery result handling process. The AT mode transition lottery includes a lottery result of lottery processing in the game in which the transition lottery is performed (in the following description, also referred to as "game lottery result" or simply "lottery result"), an AT mode transition lottery table, It is based on a random number (counter value) for lottery. The lottery result of each game is the result of lottery processing performed based on the start operation of each game (operation of the start lever 41). On the other hand, the random number for the lottery is acquired in advance in the game before the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing as processing for acquiring in advance a random number for AT mode transition lottery. The random number acquisition process is a process executed at step S416 in the reel control process (FIG. 18), and is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. In other words, among the stopping operations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the third stopping operation is performed based on the third stop OFF operation.

In step S3301, a process of obtaining the AT counter C provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is executed. The AT counter C corresponds to a lottery random number used for the AT mode transition lottery. The AT counter C is a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 1 to 128 and returns to 1 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 128). The AT counter C is periodically updated, for example, incremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started.

It should be noted that, like the free-running counter and hardware circuit used to determine the suitability of the role, a dedicated free-running counter and hardware circuit are used, and before the processing of step S3301 (for example, at the time of the third stop OFF operation) A hardware circuit may latch the value of the free-running counter and read the latched value in step S3301. Note that the latched value may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 106 until the process of step S3301 is performed.

In step S3302, a process of storing the value of the AT counter C obtained in step S3301 in the lottery information storage area 106f of the RAM 106 is executed. The lottery information storage area 106f, as shown in FIG. 74, comprises a storage area RE and an execution area AE. The memory area RE consists of a plurality of memory areas, and includes a first memory area RE1 to a tenth memory area RE10.

In the first storage area RE1 to the tenth storage area RE10, when the conditions for acquiring the AT counter C are satisfied, the AT is stored in the order of the first storage area RE1→second storage area RE2→third storage area RE3 . . . A counter C is stored chronologically. Since ten storage areas are provided as a plurality of storage areas, up to ten random numbers for lottery used for the AT mode transition lottery can be stored.

In step S3302, the value of the AT counter C acquired in step S3301 is stored in the area with the smallest number (the youngest area) among the empty areas in the first storage area RE1 to the tenth storage area RE10. For example, when the value of the AT counter C is stored in each of the first storage area RE1 to the ninth storage area RE9, and the tenth storage area RE10 is an empty area, in step S3302, in step S3301 The acquired value of the AT counter C is stored in the tenth storage area RE10.

Note that the configuration is not limited to storing the value of the AT counter C as it is, and the configuration may be such that information corresponding to the value of the AT counter C is stored. may be stored after being converted to .

In step S3303, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If the advantageous interval flag is set, the processing for setting the AT command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed in step S3304, and then the random number acquisition processing is terminated. The AT command includes information corresponding to the value of the AT counter C stored this time as well as information corresponding to the value of the AT counter C stored in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10. Therefore, the display control device 81 can grasp the information of each storage area RE1 to RE10 in the lottery information storage area 106f by receiving the AT command.

If it is determined in step S3303 that the advantageous interval flag has not been set, this random number acquisition process ends without outputting an AT command. Therefore, in the game before winning the advantageous section transition lottery, although the AT counter C is acquired, the AT command is not output. Incidentally, in a game in which the advantageous interval shift lottery is won, that is, in a game in which the advantageous interval starts from the next game, the advantageous interval flag is set in the lottery result handling process as described above. Therefore, in the random number acquisition process started after the lottery result handling process, the AT command output setting is started in the game (the game won in the advantageous zone transition lottery).

The random number acquisition process is started regardless of the lottery result of each game, and the AT counter C is acquired regardless of the lottery result of each game. That is, the AT counter C is acquired independently of the lottery result of the game at the time of acquisition.

Next, random number shift processing for sequentially shifting the random numbers for the AT mode lottery stored in the storage areas RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106f will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The random number shift process is a process performed in step S701 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31).

In step S3401, the lottery random number information (information corresponding to the AT counter C) stored in the first storage area RE1 among the storage areas RE1 to RE10 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the first A process of clearing the random number information stored in the storage area RE1 is performed. The execution area AE is an area for storing random number information used for the AT mode transition lottery when the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the current game. Then, in the AT mode transition lottery in the first special combination process (FIG. 33), in the process of acquiring the random number for the lottery in step S903, the information corresponding to the AT counter C stored in the execution area AE is Acquired as random number information used for the AT mode transition lottery. That is, the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the information shifted to the execution area AE among the information of the AT counter C acquired in advance.

In the subsequent step S3402, processing is performed to shift the information stored in each of the storage areas RE2 to RE10 to the lower area side. Specifically, the information stored in the second storage area RE2 is stored in the first storage area RE1, and the information stored in the second storage area RE2 is cleared. The information in each area is shifted in the order of second memory area RE2, fourth memory area RE4→third memory area RE3, . . . tenth memory area RE10→ninth memory area RE9. In this case, only information is shifted from the tenth storage area RE10 to the ninth storage area RE9, and new information is not shifted. That is, the information in the tenth memory area RE10 is cleared, and the tenth memory area RE10 becomes an empty area.

In the subsequent step S3403, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If the advantageous section flag is set, then in step S3404 the shift command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the random number shift process ends. If the advantageous section flag is not set in step S3403, the random number shift processing is terminated.

Here, the case where the advantageous section flag is set in step S3403 means that the advantageous section transition lottery has been won in the game prior to the current game, and the current game is in the advantageous section. means that That is, regarding the output of the AT command (step S3304), the output of the AT command is started from the game in which the advantageous section transition lottery is won. The output is started in the game following the game in which the winning game was won.

<AT mode transition lottery table>
As described above, the AT mode transition lottery uses the information of the AT counter C acquired in advance based on the third stop OFF operation of each game. For the AT mode transition lottery, in addition to lottery random number information as the AT counter C, lottery results of each game and an AT mode transition lottery table are used. Therefore, the relationship between the value of the AT counter C and the lottery result of each game will be described below with reference to the AT mode shift lottery table of FIG.

In the AT mode transition lottery table, the lottery result of each game is associated with the value of the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition lottery. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result of the game is normal replay, the value of the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition lottery is "3", and if the lottery result of the game is the push order bell, The value of the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition lottery is "7". If the lottery result of the game is strong cherry, the value of the AT counter C that wins the AT mode shift lottery is "1" to "64", and if the lottery result of the game is weak watermelon, AT mode The values of the AT counter C that win the transfer lottery are "5", "65" to "76".

That is, for example, when "7" is acquired as the AT counter C and the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the game in which the AT counter C is stored in the execution area AE, the lottery result of the game is positive. If it is the first bell, you will win the AT mode transition lottery. On the other hand, even if the AT mode transition lottery is performed in a game in which "7" is similarly stored in the execution area AE as the AT counter C, the lottery result of the game is weak watermelon. If you do, you will not win the AT mode transition lottery.

In addition, in the AT mode transition lottery table, the AT counter C value for winning the SAT transition lottery is also determined. , the AT mode transition lottery is won, and if the AT counter C is "13", the SAT transition lottery is also won. In addition, when the lottery result of the game is strong watermelon, if the AT counter C is "5" to "8" or "65" to "94", the AT mode transition lottery is won, and the AT counter C is "5". , 65, and 66 will win the SAT transfer lottery.

In addition, in the AT mode transition lottery table, an AT counter C different from the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition lottery and the SAT transition lottery for each game lottery result wins the pseudo portent mode transition lottery. is associated with the counter value. As already explained, in the case of winning the transition trigger role and not winning various mode transition lotteries, BB lotteries, etc., the display control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side, sets a pseudo sign. may be performed (FIG. 65). In the setting of such a pseudo omen on the sub side, the display effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect by the speaker 64 are the same as the omen mode or the effect is difficult to distinguish, and finally, the non-winning is notified (the winning It is intended to prevent notification). On the other hand, the AT counter C corresponding to the pseudo sign specified in the AT mode transition lottery table is such that the spinning effect and freezing effect of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are the same as in the sign mode as the pseudo sign. This is for making identification difficult, and for setting a pseudo precursor mode on the main controller 101 side. A detailed description of the processing related to the pseudo precursor mode on the side of the main controller 101 is omitted, but for example,
In the omen mode when the AT mode transition lottery is won, the rotation control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is different from the normal rotation control, and the rotation start timing is made different for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R (normal The rotation is started at the same time). Then, in a game in which an AT mode transition lottery is performed, if the lottery result of the game and the AT counter C correspond to a pseudo sign (for example, a strong cherry and an AT counter C of "65" to "128" If there is, it may be configured such that the above-mentioned special rotation control is generated at a predetermined probability as a pseudo precursor mode.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing whether or not the AT mode shift lottery is won according to the lottery result of each game, using the value of the AT counter C as a reference.

For example, if the value of the AT counter C is "5", if the lottery result of each game is strong cherry, weak cherry, you will win the AT mode transition lottery, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, the middle bell is also won, and the AT mode shift lottery is also won by pressing order replay. In other words, in a situation where the AT counter C of "5" is acquired, it can be said that it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery. On the other hand, when the value of the AT counter C is "10" to "18", the AT mode shift lottery is won when the lottery result of each game is strong cherry and weak cherry, but at other normal times The winning lottery result does not win the AT mode shift lottery. In other words, in a situation where the AT counter C of "10" to "18" has been acquired, it is difficult to win the lottery for the AT mode transition, since only strong cherries and weak cherries are won. Then, when "100" to "120" are acquired as the AT counter C, the AT mode shift lottery is not won regardless of the lottery result of each game. In other words, in the situation where the AT counter C of "100" to "120" is acquired, the AT mode transition lottery is not won.

In addition, the slot machine 10 is configured to win the AT mode shift lottery even in the first BB hand, the second BB hand, and the third BB hand, which can be won in the first BB state or the second BB state. That is, when the first special winning process (FIG. 33) is activated in a game in the first BB state or the second BB state, the lottery result of the game in the first BB state or the second BB state, the AT counter C, the AT An AT mode transition lottery is performed according to a mode transition lottery table. In this case, if the lottery result of the game is the first role in BB and the AT counter C is "128", the AT mode transition lottery is won, and the second role in BB is "121" to "128", "1" to "8" are associated with the third combination as values for winning the AT mode transition lottery.

In the situation where "121" to "128" are acquired as the AT counter C, the AT mode shift lottery is not won in each lottery result that can be won in the normal game state, and the first BB state and the second BB state are not won. In the lottery result that can be won in , it is set so that the AT mode shift lottery can be won. In other words, depending on the acquired AT counter C, there is a value that does not win the AT mode transition lottery depending on the game state. will also become

<Processing for pending display>
In the present embodiment, the relationship between the AT counter C obtained in advance and the lottery results of each game as described above is used to determine which lottery result will win the AT mode transition lottery, or is likely to win the lottery. The auxiliary display unit 65 performs specific notification suggesting information such as whether or not. The pending display process shown in FIG. 78 is a process for performing a pending display as the specific notification. 63).

In step S3501, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set. If any flag is set, the pending display process is terminated. If neither flag is set, it is determined in step S3502 whether an AT command has been received. If the AT command has not been received, the hold display process is terminated. If the AT command has been received, the process advances to step S3503.

As already explained, when an AT command is received, it is determined in the random number acquisition process (FIG. 73) on the main controller 101 side that the advantageous interval flag is set. Therefore, if it is determined in step S3501 that the AT mode winning flag or AT mode flag is not set, and if it is determined that an AT command is received in step S3502, after winning the advantageous section transition lottery and that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won (CZ mode, non-specific section). In other words, in a situation where the advantageous section transition lottery is won and the AT mode is not yet won, each process (steps S3503 to S3509) for holding display as specific notification is performed. In other words, the pending display can be started in a situation where the advantageous section transition lottery is won and before the AT mode is won. The pending display will not start even after winning.

In step S3503, based on the information contained in the received AT command, the information of the AT counter C corresponding to each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10 is stored in the pending information storage area 183c of the RAM 183. FIG. Although detailed description with drawings is omitted, the holding information storage area 183c on the display control device 81 side has the same configuration as the lottery information storage area 106f on the main control device 101 side, and is equivalent to 10 games (AT Each memory area (first storage area to tenth storage area) is provided so as to be able to store AT counter C information for 10 mode transition lotteries), and the AT counter C of the game targeted for the AT mode transition lottery. has an execution area for storing information on In step S3503, based on the received AT command, the information of the AT counter C of the first storage area RE1 on the main controller 101 side is stored in the first storage area of the pending information storage area 183c, and then stored in the second storage area. The information of the AT counter C in the area RE2 is stored in the second storage area of the pending information storage area 183c... The information of the AT counter C in the tenth storage area RE10 is stored in the tenth storage area of the pending information storage area 183c Then, the information of the AT counter C in the execution area AE is stored in the execution area of the pending information storage area 183c.

In subsequent step S3504, a hold display lottery process is performed. The pending display lottery process is a lottery process for determining whether or not the display corresponding to the AT counter C acquired at this acquisition opportunity is to be performed on the auxiliary display section 65 .

Here, the pending display performed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 79( a ), a reserved display area Dr is set in the lower part as a predetermined display area in the auxiliary display section 65 . The suspension display area Dr is partitioned so that the same number of unit suspension display areas Dr1 to Dr10 as the maximum number of AT counters C stored in the suspension information storage area 183c are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. Specifically, the reserved display area Dr includes a first unit reserved display area Dr1, a second unit reserved display area Dr2, a third unit reserved display area Dr3, a fourth unit reserved display area Dr4, and a fifth unit reserved display area. Dr5, a sixth unit reserved display area Dr6, a seventh unit reserved display area Dr7, an eighth unit reserved display area Dr8, a ninth unit reserved display area Dr9, and a tenth unit reserved display area Dr10 are set. In addition to the pending display area Dr, on the left side of the pending display area Dr (on the left side of the first unit pending display area Dr1) is displayed the pending display of the AT counter C stored in the execution area of the pending information storage area 183c. An execution display area Dp is set for performing The execution display area Dp is partitioned as an area larger than the unit reservation display areas Dr1 to Dr10, and the reservation display for the AT mode transition lottery of the game and the AT mode transition lottery after the game. A player can clearly distinguish this from the hold display.

As shown in FIG. 79(b), a first special image P1 to a tenth special image P10 are set as pending displays to be displayed in the execution display area Dp and the pending display area Dr. The first special image P1 to the tenth special image P10 are special images (fourth special image P4 to eighth special image P8) that confirm winning the AT mode transition lottery if the game lottery result corresponds to the lottery result. , in the following description, also referred to as a "deterministic special image") and a special image that may not win the AT mode transition lottery even if the game lottery result corresponds to the lottery result (first special image P1 to A special image P3, a ninth special image P9, a tenth special image P10 (also referred to as "suggestive special images" in the following description).

For example, the first special image P1 as a suggestive special image is an AT counter C that is highly likely to win the AT mode transition lottery if the lottery result of a game in which an AT mode transition lottery is performed is a strong cherry or a weak cherry. This suggests that The second special image P2 as a suggestive special image indicates that the AT counter C is highly likely to win the AT mode transition lottery if the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed is strong watermelon or weak watermelon. It suggests. The third special image P3 as a suggestive special image is a so-called rare image such as a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon, a chance A, a chance B, a middle bell, etc., in addition to a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon, etc. This suggests that the AT counter C has a high possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery if it is a combination (transition opportunity combination).

The fourth special image P4 as a definitive special image suggests that the AT counter C wins the AT mode transition lottery if the lottery result of the AT mode transition lottery game is strong cherry. The fifth special image P5 as a deterministic special image suggests that the AT counter C wins the AT mode transition lottery if the lottery result of the AT mode transition lottery game is strong cherry or weak cherry. is. The sixth special image P6 as a definitive special image suggests that the AT counter C wins the AT mode transition lottery if the lottery result of the AT mode transition lottery game is strong watermelon. The seventh special image P7 as a definitive special image suggests that the AT counter C wins the AT mode transition lottery if the lottery result of the AT mode transition lottery game is strong watermelon or weak watermelon. is. The eighth special image P8 as a definitive special image suggests that the AT counter C wins the AT mode transition lottery if the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed is the above rare combination. be.

Of the suggestive special images, the ninth special image P9 and the tenth special image P10 suggest that whether or not the lottery result of the corresponding game can be obtained differs depending on the gaming state of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed. and can also be referred to as a state system special image. Specifically, the ninth special image P9 as a state system special image is a state different from the BB state (hereinafter referred to as , simply referred to as "normal time"), it suggests that the AT counter C has a high possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery. On the other hand, the tenth special image P10 as the state system special image is used for the AT mode transition lottery if the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed is a lottery result that can be won in the first BB state or the second BB state. This suggests that the AT counter C has a high possibility of winning.

These special images P1 to P10 are set to have different characters, colors, etc. to be displayed so that the player can distinguish between them. For example, the first special image P1, the fourth special image P4, and the fifth special image P5 display characters corresponding to the "cherry" symbols attached to the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It is possible to recognize that it is advantageous to win a cherry winning, and the first special image P1 is a yellow cherry, the fourth special image P4 is a red cherry, and the fifth special image P5 is a green cherry. The special images P1, P4, and P5 have different colors (background colors), and are set so that the respective differences can be clearly recognized. Further, for example, the second special image P2, the sixth special image P6, and the seventh special image P7 are displayed with characters corresponding to the "watermelon" symbols attached to the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It is possible to recognize that it is advantageous to win any watermelon, and the second special image P2 is a yellow watermelon, the sixth special image P6 is a red watermelon, and the seventh special image P7 is a green watermelon. In addition, the special images P2, P6, and P7 have different colors (background colors), and are set so that the respective differences can be clearly recognized. In the figure, different dot hatches are used to express different colors.

In FIG. 79(a), the second special image P2 is displayed in the first unit reserved display region Dr1, the fourth special image P4 is displayed in the third unit reserved display region Dr3, and the seventh unit reserved display region Dr7 The ninth special image P9 is displayed, the tenth special image P10 is displayed in the ninth unit reserved display area Dr9, and the first special image P1 is displayed in the execution display area Dp. In this case, if you win the strong cherry or weak cherry in this game, it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery. It is shown that it is easy to win.

Returning to the description of the pending display process, the pending display lottery process performed in step S3504 is a pending display corresponding to the AT counter C acquired this time among the AT commands received this time (basically, the tenth unit pending display A lottery is made to determine whether or not to display the pending display corresponding to the area Dr10. Regarding the winning probability of such a lottery, in the present embodiment, it is set so that the display lottery is won with a probability of about 1/5 and the pending display is displayed. In this case, the winning probability is set so that the winning probability of the holding display lottery is larger than the reciprocal of the number of the plurality of unit holding display areas Dr1 to Dr10, and the plurality of unit holding display areas Dr1 to Dr10 At least one (two in the above probability) is set as a probability that the pending display is displayed on average.

After executing the process of step S3504, it is determined whether or not the holding display lottery is won in step S3505. If the prize has not been won, the pending display processing is terminated as it is, and if the prize has been won, the process advances to step S3506. In step S3506, a process of acquiring the special image table stored in the various table storage area 182a is performed.

As shown in FIG. 80, each selectable special image P1 to P10 is associated with the value of the AT counter C and set in the special image table. More specifically, for example, when the value of the AT counter C is "5", the special images are the first special image P1, the second special image P2, the third special image P3, the fourth special image P4, and the fifth special image. P5, sixth special image P6, seventh special image P7, eighth special image P8, and ninth special image P9 are set to be selectable. As already explained, if the value of the AT counter C is "5", if the lottery results of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed are strong cherry and weak cherry, the player wins the lottery for AT mode transition. Watermelon, Weak Watermelon, Chance A, Chance B, and the middle bell are all wins. In other words, the hold display suggests that winning the above results in the games corresponding to the first special image P1 to the ninth special image P9 is likely to win the AT mode transition lottery.

Further, for example, when the value of the AT counter C is "10" to "18", it is set so that the first special image P1, the fourth special image P4, and the fifth special image P5 can be selected as special images. there is As already explained, when the value of the AT counter C is "10" to "18", the AT mode transition lottery is won when the lottery results of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed are strong cherries and weak cherries. is set to In other words, if you win a strong cherry or a weak cherry in the game corresponding to the first special image P1, the fourth special image P4, and the fifth special image P5, it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery. It is suggested.

On the other hand, when the value of the AT counter C is "100" to "120", it is set so that the first special image P1 and the second special image P2 can be selected as special images. As already explained, when the value of the AT counter C is between "100" and "120", it is set so that the AT mode transition lottery will not be won regardless of the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed. ing. In other words, even if you win the strong cherry in the game corresponding to the first special image P1, you may not win the AT mode transition lottery, and even if you win the strong watermelon in the game corresponding to the second special image P2, The pending display suggests that the AT mode transition lottery may not be won.

Then, when the value of the AT counter C is "128", the tenth special image P10 can be selected as the special image in addition to the first special image P1. As already explained, when the value of the AT counter C is "128", the AT mode transition lottery will not be won if the AT mode transition lottery is performed normally, and the AT mode transition lottery will be performed in the first BB state or the second BB state. It is set so that if the player wins, he/she can win the AT mode shift lottery. That is, if the game corresponding to the tenth special image P10 is executed in one of the BB states, and the lottery result of the game corresponds to the lottery result (third hand in BB), the AT mode shift lottery is won. is suggested by its reserved indication.

After acquiring the special image table in step S3506, special image selection processing is executed in step S3507. As described above, the special image table is set so that a plurality of special images can be selected with respect to the value of the AT counter C, and the ratio of which special images are selected is also predetermined. (not shown in the figure). The ratio is generally as follows: suggestive special images (first special image P1 to third special image P3, ninth special image P9, tenth special image P10) and definitive special images (fourth special image P4 to eighth special image P10). If the AT counter C is associated with both the special image P8), it is set so that the deterministic special image is more likely to be selected than the suggestive special image. If the AT counter C is associated with the deterministic special image, it is always associated with the suggestive special image. is displayed more frequently.

Also, in suggestive special images and deterministic special images, when the same AT counter C is acquired for those associated with a lottery result with a high appearance rate or those associated with a plurality of lottery results. It is set so that it can be easily selected even if Specifically, the first special image P1 and the third special image P3 are the suggestive special images. P3 is associated with other rare roles in addition to strong cherries and weak cherries. Therefore, the third special image P3 has a higher probability of winning the lottery result of the associated game than the first special image P1, and the type of lottery result associated with the third special image P3 is also higher than that of the first special image P1. are larger than the first special image P1. Further, as deterministic special images, the sixth special image P6 and the seventh special image P7 are associated with strong watermelon while the sixth special image P6 is associated with strong watermelon. It is also associated with weak watermelon. Therefore, the seventh special image P7 has a higher probability of winning the lottery result of the associated game than the sixth special image P6, and the type of lottery result associated with the seventh special image P7 is also higher than that of the sixth special image P6. is greater than the sixth special image P6.

Regarding the selection ratio, more specifically, for example, when the value of the AT counter C is "5", the suggestive special image and the definite special image are used as the first special image P1 to the ninth special image P9 as described above. associated with an image. In this case, the first special image P1, the second special image P2, 3%, the third special image P3, and the ninth special image P9 are selected as suggestive special images at 3%, 4%, and 5%, respectively. As special images, the fourth special image P4 is selected at 10%, the fifth special image P5 at 15%, the sixth special image P6 at 15%, the seventh special image P7 at 20%, and the eighth special image P8 at 25%. The ratio is set so that Further, when the value of the AT counter C is "10" to "18", as described above, the suggestive special images are used as the first special image P1, the fourth special image P4, and the fifth special image P5 and deterministic special images. In this case, the first special image P1 as the suggestive special image is selected at 10%, the fourth special image P4 as the definitive special image is selected at 30%, and the fifth special image P5 is selected at 60%. The ratio is determined as follows. When the value of the AT counter C is "100" to "120", the first special image P1 as the special image and the second special image P2 are associated with the suggestive special image as described above. In this case, the ratio is determined so that 40% of the first special image P1 is selected and 60% of the second special image P2 is selected.

In the special image selection process in step S3507, a special image to be displayed is selected by lottery or the like based on the predetermined ratio as described above. Then, in step S3508, a process of displaying the selected special image in the unit holding display area corresponding to the AT counter C acquired at this acquisition opportunity is executed. More specifically, the image data corresponding to the selected special image is read out from the ROM 182, and is stored in the empty area with the lowest number (basically the tenth storage area) among the empty areas of the pending information storage area 183c. The AT counter C is stored, and the auxiliary display section 65 is set so that the selected special image is displayed in the unit reserved display area (basically the tenth unit reserved display area Dr10) corresponding to the area in which it is stored. Control.

In the subsequent step S3509, a status display start process is executed. The status display start process is a process for starting a status display for suggesting or explaining the relationship between the special image to be displayed this time and the game status. Such status display start processing will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S3509, the pending display start process ends.

<Processing for hold shift>
Next, the suspension shift processing for shifting the display area of the suspension display started as described above in accordance with the progress of the game will be described with reference to FIG. 81 . The pending shift process is a process executed in step S2502 in the start effect setting process (FIG. 59) in the display control device 81. FIG.

In step S3601, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received from main controller 101 . If no shift command has been received, the pending shift process is terminated. If the shift time command has been received, in step S3602, a process of clearing the pending display in the execution display area Dp is performed. More specifically, when a special image is displayed as a hold display in the display area for execution Dp, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled to erase the special image, and the special image is displayed in the display area for execution Dp. If it is not displayed, it remains in that state. Then, in step S3603, a process of shifting the pending display of the first unit pending display area Dr1 to the execution display area Dp is performed. More specifically, when the reserved display of the special image is displayed in the first unit reserved display area Dr1, the reserved display is displayed in the execution display area Dp, and the first unit reserved display area The auxiliary display part 65 is controlled to erase the pending display displayed in Dr1, and when the pending display is not displayed in the first unit pending display area Dr1, that state is maintained. In subsequent step S3604, a process of shifting the pending display of each unit pending display area to a lower display area is performed. More specifically, the reserved display of the special image displayed in the second unit reserved display region Dr2 is displayed in the first unit reserved display region Dr1, and the reserved display displayed in the second unit reserved display region Dr2 is displayed. 3rd unit reserved display area Dr3 → 2nd unit reserved display area Dr2, 4th unit reserved display area Dr4 → 3rd unit reserved display area Dr3 ... 10th unit reserved display area Dr10 → 9th unit The reserved display of each unit reserved display area is shifted such as the reserved display area Dr9. In this case, as for the unit reserved display area in which the reserved display is not performed, the state in which the reserved display is not performed is shifted to the unit reserved display area on the lower side as it is. Then, only the pending display is shifted from the tenth unit pending display region Dr10 to the ninth unit pending display region Dr9, and no new pending display is shifted. That is, the pending display of the tenth unit pending display area Dr10 is cleared, and the tenth unit pending display area Dr10 is in a state where the pending display is not performed.

In subsequent step S3605, status display update processing is executed. The status display update process is a process for updating the display contents of the status display started by the above status display start process in accordance with the progress of the game (according to changes in the status). Such status display update processing will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S3605, the pending display start process ends.

Here, in the above-described pending display processing, it is determined that the pending display is started before winning the AT mode transition lottery. On the other hand, in the pending shift processing, the processing for shifting the pending display in steps S3602 to S3605 is determined to be executed regardless of the presence or absence of the AT mode win flag or the AT mode flag. That is, the pending display is started after winning the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section and before winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode, and the shifting of the pending display is performed even after winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode. By doing so, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of the AT mode transition lottery using the hold display, while avoiding the phenomenon in which whether the AT mode transition lottery is successful or not is entirely clear depending on the presence or absence of the shift. there is

Although the detailed description with reference to the drawings is omitted, it is preferable that each holding display is terminated when the AT mode winning notification is performed.

<Relationship between AT mode transition lottery and hold display>
How the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the AT counter C obtained in advance will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG.

In FIGS. 82(a1) and 82(b1), FIG. 82(a1) shows the holding display area Dr and the execution display area Dp in the auxiliary display section 65 before the game starts (at the time of starting). 82(b1) indicates a storage area RE and an execution area AE in the lottery information storage area 106f. For example, "20" is stored as information corresponding to the AT counter C in the execution area AE, and the first special image P1 is displayed as a pending display corresponding to the AT counter C in the execution display area Dp. As a random number used for the AT mode transition lottery for the next game, "8" is stored as information corresponding to the AT counter C in the first storage area RE1, and the AT counter C is stored in the first unit reserved display area Dr1. A second special image P2 is displayed as a pending display corresponding to . In this situation, the case where the start lever 41 is operated to start the next game, and the strong watermelon is won in the lottery processing of the next game will be described.

Based on the operation of the start lever 41, random number shift processing and reserved shift processing are performed. FIGS. 82(a2) and 82(b2) show a situation in which the AT counter C information and hold display are shifted by one game from the situation of FIGS. 82(a1) and 82(b1). The information of the AT counter C stored in the 1 storage area RE1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the second special image P2 displayed in the first unit reserved display area Dr1 is shifted to the execution display area Dp. In this case, the second special image P2 in the execution display area Dp suggests that if the lottery result of the current game is strong watermelon or weak watermelon, it is likely that the AT mode transition lottery will be won. In addition, in FIGS. 82(a1) and 82(b2), the tenth storage area RE10 and the tenth unit reserved display area Dr10 become free areas as a result of the random number shift processing and the reserved shift processing. showing.

As already explained, the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the information of the AT counter C shifted to the execution area AE, the lottery result information of the current game, and the AT mode transition lottery table. In FIGS. 82(a2) and 82(b2), the AT counter C shifted to the execution area AE is "8", the lottery result of this game is strong watermelon, and this information is transferred to the AT mode. After referring to the lottery table (FIG. 76), the AT mode transition lottery in this case will win the AT mode transition lottery. Note that the AT mode transition lottery is executed in the first special combination process in the lottery result correspondence process as described above, and based on the start operation of the start lever 41, the lottery process of this game and the AT mode A transfer lottery will be held.

As described above, in the game in which the strong watermelon was won (the game in which the AT mode transition lottery was won), when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, as shown in FIG. A watermelon prize can be established. The random number acquisition process is executed based on the third stop OFF operation, and in FIG. It indicates that the counter C is acquired. Then, by storing the AT counter C in the tenth storage area RE10, as shown in FIG. 83(a), the first special image P1 as a hold display corresponding to the AT counter C can be displayed. Become.

As described above, in the configuration in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT counter C acquired in advance, the pending display corresponding to the AT counter C is performed, so that the AT mode transition lottery can be won. It is possible to proceed with the game after grasping the contents of the lottery results in advance. Then, for example, if the fourth special image P4 corresponding to the strong cherry is displayed in the third unit reserved display area Dr3 as a reserved display corresponding to three games later, then three It is also possible to play three games with a wish to win a hard cherry after the game, which greatly improves the fun of each game.

Here, the winning probability of the lottery result of each game is defined by the lottery table set for each game state, and the winning probability of the specific role that triggers the AT mode transition lottery is also different between normal and BB. can differ. FIG. 84 shows the winning probabilities for each state of each specific combination that triggers the AT mode transition lottery.

In the normal replay, although there is a difference in winning probability between the normal game state and the 1st RT state to the 3rd RT state, winning is possible in any state. On the other hand, during BB in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, it is set so as not to win the normal replay. Further, the pressing order replay is set so that winning is possible in the 1st to 3rd RT states, but is not possible in the normal game state and during BB. The push order bell is set so that the player can win normally, but not in the BB. In other words, the normal replay, the push order replay, and the push order bell can be said to be normal roles that are mainly won during normal times and are not won during BB. Then, in the situation where the AT counter C corresponding to these normal roles is acquired, if the AT mode transition lottery is performed normally, the player can win the lottery, but if the AT mode transition lottery is performed during the BB, the player will not win the lottery. However, in this embodiment, the AT counter C corresponding to the normal hand is also associated with the 3rd hand in the BB (FIG. 76). Therefore, in a situation where the AT counter C corresponding to the normal combination is acquired, it is possible to win the lottery if the AT mode shift lottery is performed in both the normal time and the BB time.

The 1st BB hand, the 2nd BB hand and the 3rd BB hand are BB hands that can be won only at the time of BB. Then, in a situation where AT counters C corresponding to these BB roles are acquired, winning is possible if an AT mode shift lottery is held during BB, but winning is not possible if an AT mode shift lottery is held during normal times. In this embodiment, of the AT counter C corresponding to the BB hand, a value associated with the normal hand and a value not associated with the normal hand are set (FIG. 76). Therefore, in the AT mode shift lottery using the value of the AT counter C corresponding to the BB hand, which is also associated with the normal hand, a win can be made both at the time of BB and at normal time. In the AT mode transition lottery using the value of the AT counter C that is not associated with the normal combination, the player can win only at BB.

The rare roles such as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, and middle bell are common roles that can be won in both normal and BB. However, the respective winning probabilities are set so that the winning probability during the normal time and the winning probability during the BB are overwhelmingly more likely to be won during the BB. In other words, in the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C associated with these common roles, it is overwhelmingly easier to win during BB than during normal times.

Of the common roles, strong cherry and weak cherry have a higher winning probability in the first BB state than in the second BB state. Also, the strong watermelon and the weak watermelon have a higher winning probability in the second BB state than in the first BB state. Therefore, in the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C associated with strong cherries and weak cherries, the first BB state is easier to win than the second BB state, and is associated with strong watermelons and weak watermelons. In the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C, winning is easier in the second BB state than in the first BB state.

The relationship with the special image as the pending display corresponding to the AT counter C will be described with reference to FIG.

As already explained, the first special image P1 as a suggestive special image suggests that it is easy to win the AT mode shift lottery at the time of a strong cherry or a weak cherry, and the fourth special image P4 as a definite special image. indicates that the lottery for shifting to AT mode is won at the time of strong cherries and the fifth special image P5 at the time of strong cherries or weak cherries. Since it is easier to win strong cherries and weak cherries during BB than during normal times, in the situation where the first special image P1, the fourth special image P4, and the fifth special image P5 are displayed, the AT mode transition lottery Also, it is easier to win during BB than during normal times. In addition, since strong cherries and weak cherries are more likely to be won in the first BB state than in the second BB state, it is easier to win in the AT mode shift lottery in the first BB state than in the second BB state.

In addition, the second special image P2 as a suggestive special image suggests that it is easy to win the AT mode shift lottery at the time of strong watermelon or weak watermelon, and the sixth special image P6 as a definitive special image is strong watermelon. Sometimes, the seventh special image P7 indicates that the AT mode transition lottery will be won at the time of strong watermelon or weak watermelon. Since it is easier to win a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon during BB than during normal times, in the situation where the second special image P2, the sixth special image P6, and the seventh special image P7 are displayed, the AT mode transition lottery Also, it is easier to win during BB than during normal times. Moreover, since strong watermelons and weak watermelons are more likely to be won in the second BB state than in the first BB state, it is easier to win in the AT mode shift lottery in the second BB state than in the first BB state.

The ninth special image P9 as a suggestive special image suggests that the AT mode transition lottery is likely to be won during the normal role, and the tenth special image P10 is that the AT mode transition lottery is likely to be won during the BB role. It suggests. Therefore, in the situation where the ninth special image P9 is displayed, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery in the normal time than in the BB time, and in the situation where the tenth special image P10 is displayed, the AT mode It is easier to win the transfer lottery during BB than during normal times.

These various special images start to be displayed in the game in which the AT counter C is stored in the tenth storage area RE10, and are subject to the AT mode transition lottery in the game in which the AT counter C is shifted to the execution area AE. Therefore, the display start game and the game targeted for the AT mode transition lottery are different. Then, the game state of the display start game and the game state of the game targeted for the AT mode transition lottery may differ. In other words, the special image that started to be displayed during the normal time may be subject to the AT mode transition lottery during the BB. For example, even if the game in which the display of the first special image P1 is started is normal, if the game targeted for the AT mode transition lottery is BB, the AT mode transition lottery will be targeted as it is during the normal time. will also have great expectations for winning the transfer lottery. In the present embodiment, in the AT mode transition lottery using such an AT counter C obtained in advance, the difference between the state at the time of acquisition and the state at the time of the transition lottery is notified as a status display. A configuration for displaying the status will be described below.

<Processing for starting status display>
As a configuration relating to status display, first, the process for starting status display will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The status display start process is a process that is executed in step S3509 when a pending display is started in the pending display process. As already explained, the pending display process is a process executed in the effect setting process at the time of all stop, and is executed at the end of the game. In the process for starting the status display, the contents of the status display are determined based on the contents of the game to be finished this time (game result, winning result, number of payouts, etc.).

In step S3701, it is determined whether or not the special image as the pending display to be displayed this time is a special image corresponding to cherry. More specifically, it is determined whether the special image to be displayed this time is any one of the first special image P1, the fourth special image P4, and the fifth special image P5. As described above, in the game in the first BB state, strong cherries and weak cherries are likely to be won. It is easy to win the lottery when it becomes an object of the mode transition lottery.

Therefore, if the special image to be displayed this time is the cherry-compatible special image, the process proceeds to step S3702. It is determined whether or not it is in the state of If an affirmative determination is made in step S3702, the process advances to step S3703 to execute a process of displaying an advantage when winning the 1st BB as the current situation display, and then ends the process for starting the situation display. The display of advantage when winning the 1st BB is a notification suggesting that if the target special image is in the 1BB state of the game targeted for the AT mode transition lottery, it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery. As an advantageous display at the time of winning the 1st BB, for example, as shown in FIG. It is preferable to display three and display "AT chance with 7 7 7".

If a negative determination is made in step S3702, the process advances to step S3704. In step S3704, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is not the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, and is the carryover state after winning the 1st BB. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3704, the process advances to step S3705 to execute the process of performing the first countdown display as the current situation display, and then ends the process for starting the situation display. The first countdown display is a notification suggesting that if the target special image is in the first BB state by the time the AT mode transition lottery target game is reached, it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery. This is a notification suggesting that the 1st BB, which is currently doing so, should win the prize immediately. As the first countdown display, for example, as shown in FIG. 88(b), while pointing (with a speech bubble) to the special image to be displayed this time, three characters of the "red 7" pattern corresponding to the first BB winning prize are displayed. It is preferable to display and display "Let's win 7, 7, 7 within 9 games!". In this case, the special image to be displayed this time is 10 games after the AT mode transition lottery target game. The AT mode transition lottery for images is executed in the first BB state.

If a negative determination is made in step S3704, the process advances to step S3706. In step S3706, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the first BB state. If it is in the 1BB state, it is determined in step S3707 whether or not the number of remaining payouts up to the maximum payout number in the 1BB state is greater than 45. As already explained, in the first BB state, there is a high probability that the winning of the first prize during the BB will be established and nine medals will be paid out. In step S3707, the case where the number remaining up to the maximum number of payouts is 45 or less means that the number of medals to be paid out is limited to 3 or 5, and even if some games do not pay out medals, It is highly probable that the first BB state has already ended after 10 games in which the special image for starting the AT mode shift lottery is targeted. More specifically, if 9 medals are paid out 5 times during the 9 games up to 1 game before the special image to be displayed this time is targeted for the AT mode transition lottery, the special image is targeted. The game is after the end of the first BB state. Therefore, if it is determined in step S3707 that the number of remaining payouts is 45 or less, the status display start processing is terminated. In this case, no status display is performed for the special image to be displayed this time.

If it is determined in step S3707 that the number of remaining payouts is greater than 45, the process proceeds to step S3708. In step S3708, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining payouts is greater than 70. 70 or less means that if 9 medals are paid out 8 times or more during the 9 games until the special image to be displayed this time becomes the target of the AT mode transition lottery, the special image is eligible. The game that is set is the case after the end of the first BB state. In addition, even if nine medals are paid out seven times, if five medals are paid out twice, or if five medals are paid out once and three medals are paid out once, the special image will be applied. The game that is set is the case after the end of the first BB state. In other words, even if 9 medals are paid out 7 times in 9 games, if 3 medals are paid out in the remaining 2 times, or if no medals are paid out even in 1 of the remaining 2 times, the relevant game is played. The game targeted for the special image is in the first BB state. Also, if nine medals are paid out 6 times or less in nine games, the game for which the special image is targeted is in the first BB state regardless of the number of medals paid out in the remaining games. If it is determined in step S3708 that there are more than 70 cards, in step S3709 processing for displaying a corresponding chance is executed as the current situation display, and then the process for starting situation display ends. The corresponding chance display is a notification that suggests that if the target special image is the target of the AT mode transition lottery, there is a high possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery. As the corresponding chance display, for example, as shown in FIG. 88(c), it is preferable to display "It's intense heat!"

If a negative determination is made in step S3708 and the number of remaining payouts in the first BB state is greater than 45 but is 70 or less, then the special image to be displayed this time is the game until the AT mode transition lottery is made. , 3 or 5 medals are paid out, or depending on the number of games in which no medals are paid out, there is a possibility that the game after 10 games targeted for the AT mode transition lottery will be in the 1 BB state. is. In other words, the game after 10 games will be the first BB depending on the lottery results during the 9 games until the special image to be displayed this time becomes the target of the AT mode transition lottery, and the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. This is the case where it can be different whether the game is in a state or not. In this case, in step S3710, as the current status display, the process for displaying the end delay is executed, and then the process for starting the status display ends. The display for delaying the end should maintain the current state until the target special image becomes the target of the AT mode transition lottery, that is, the current state until the target special image becomes the target of the AT mode transition lottery. This is a notification suggesting that there is a high possibility of winning the AT mode transition if the . As a display for delaying the end, for example, as shown in FIG. 88(d), a display stating "Don't finish the bonus until my turn!!" should be done.

If it is determined in step S3701 that the special image to be displayed this time is not the special image for cherry, the process proceeds to step S3711. In step S3711, it is determined whether or not the special image as the pending display to be displayed this time is the special image corresponding to the watermelon. More specifically, it is determined whether the special image to be displayed this time is any one of the second special image P2, the sixth special image P6, and the seventh special image P7. As described above, in the game in the 2BB state, it is easy to win a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon. When it becomes the target of mode transition lottery, it is easy to win.

Therefore, if the special image to be displayed this time is the watermelon corresponding special image, the process proceeds to step S3712, and the current game state is not the first BB state or the second BB state, and before winning the first BB or the second BB. It is determined whether or not it is in the state of If an affirmative determination is made in step S3712, the process advances to step S3713 to execute a process of displaying an advantage when winning the 2nd BB as the status display of this time, and then terminates the process for starting status display. The display of advantage when winning the second BB is a notification suggesting that if the target special image is in the second BB state of the game targeted for the AT mode transition lottery, it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery. As an advantageous display when winning the 2nd BB, for example, three characters with a "white BAR" pattern corresponding to the 2nd BB winning are displayed while pointing (with a balloon) a special image to start displaying this time. It is preferable to display "AT chance at white BAR" (see FIG. 90(b)).

If a negative determination is made in step S3712, the process proceeds to step S3714. In step S3714, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is not the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, and is the carryover state after winning the 2nd BB. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3714, the process advances to step S3715 to execute the process of displaying the second countdown as the current situation display, and then the process for starting the situation display ends. The second countdown display is a notification suggesting that it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery if the target special image is in the second BB state by the time the game becomes the object of the AT mode transition lottery, and has already been won. This is a notification suggesting that the second BB, which is currently running, should win the prize as soon as possible. As the second countdown display, for example, three characters with a “white BAR” design corresponding to the 2nd BB winning are displayed while pointing (using a speech bubble) to the special image to be displayed this time, and “White BAR within 9 games” is displayed. White BAR Let the white BAR win!!" (see FIG. 89(b)). In this case, the special image to be displayed this time is 10 games after the target game for the AT mode transition lottery. Similar to the first countdown display, the image will be displayed in the second BB state.

If a negative determination is made in step S3714, the process proceeds to step S3716. In step S3716, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the second BB state. If it is in the 2BB state, it is determined in step S3717 whether or not the remaining number of payouts up to the upper limit number of payouts in the 2BB state is greater than 45. If it is determined in step S3717 that the number of remaining payouts is 45 or less, the status display start process is terminated. In this case, no status display is performed for the special image to be displayed this time.

If it is determined in step S3717 that the number of remaining payouts is greater than 45, the process proceeds to step S3718. In step S3718, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining payouts is greater than 70. If the number is more than 70, in step S3719, as the current situation display, the process for displaying the corresponding chance is executed, and then the process for starting the situation display ends. The correspondence chance display is as described above.

If a negative determination is made in step S3718, then in step S3720 the processing for displaying the status display start delay is executed as the current status display, and then the status display start process is terminated. The indication for the end delay is as described above.

Incidentally, in the above process for starting the status display, for example, if the status display has already occurred for another special image, the start of the status display for this special image is restricted (do not start, status display is not performed). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game content from becoming complicated due to redundant display of the situation.

<Status display update process>
As a configuration relating to the status display, the status display updating process will be described next with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The status display update process is a process executed in step S3605 when the pending display is shifted in the pending shift process.

In step S3801, it is determined whether or not status display is being executed. If the status display is not being executed, there is nothing to be updated, so the process for updating the status display is terminated. If the status display is being executed, the process advances to step S3802. In step S3802, it is determined whether or not the special image, which is the target of the status display, has been shifted to the fifth unit reserved display area Dr5 by this shift processing. If the special image has been shifted to the fifth unit reserved display area Dr5, in step S3803, processing for ending the status display for the shifted special image is performed, and then this status display updating process is terminated.

That is, in this embodiment, the status display is started when the special image is displayed in the tenth unit reserved display area Dr10, and ended when it is shifted to the fifth unit reserved display area Dr5. In other words, the status display is performed from 10 games to 6 games before the AT counter C obtained in advance becomes the target of the AT mode transition lottery, and the status from 5 games to 1 game before (the game concerned) is displayed. Display execution is restricted. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 90(b), in a situation where the second special image P2 in the sixth unit reserved display area Dr6 is displayed as being advantageous when the second BB is won, the second BB is won. When the target second special image P2 is shifted to the fifth unit reserved display area Dr5 without the second winning display, the second winning advantage display is terminated at the time of the shift. By doing so, suggestions of content that is relatively difficult to achieve, such as the advantageous display when winning the 1st BB or the advantageous display when winning the 2nd BB, will reduce the number of remaining games until the AT mode transition lottery. By continuing to display even a slight situation, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged.

It should be noted that whether or not to continue the display may be changed depending on the content of the status display being displayed. For example, if the status display being displayed is an advantageous display when winning the 1st BB or an advantageous display when winning the 2nd BB, the status display is terminated when shifting to the fifth unit reservation display area Dr5, while another status display (second 1 countdown display, second countdown display, corresponding chance display, end delay display), the situation display may not end when shifting to the fifth unit reserved display area Dr5. In addition, the timing to end the display may be changed, and if the status display being displayed is an advantageous display when winning the 1st BB or an advantageous display when winning the 2nd BB, the status is shifted to the fifth unit reserved display area Dr5. While ending the display, if it is another status display (first countdown display, second countdown display, response chance display, end delay display), when shifting to the third unit reservation display area Dr3 (fifth unit reservation When shifting to a region different from the display region Dr5, the status display may be terminated at a timing later than the shift to the fifth unit reserved display region Dr5.

If a negative determination is made in step S3802, the process advances to step S3804. In step S3804, it is determined whether or not the status display to be updated is an advantageous display when winning the 1st BB or an advantageous display when winning the 2nd BB. If any of the BB winning display is advantageous, the process advances to step S3805 to determine whether or not the corresponding BB winning notification has been made. More specifically, in the case where the advantageous display at the time of winning the first BB is executed, the bonus winning notification effect (step S2406) is performed, and the type of bonus for which the bonus winning notification effect is performed is notified. When the notification effect of winning the 1st BB occurs, affirmative determination is made in step S3805, and when the advantageous display when winning the 2nd BB is executed, bonus winning notification effect (step S2406) is performed, and a notification effect of winning the 2nd BB is generated as a notification of the type of bonus targeted for the bonus winning notification effect, an affirmative determination is made in step S3805. In other words, even when the advantageous display at the time of winning the first BB is executed and the bonus winning notification effect (step S2406) is performed, the bonus winning notification effect is performed. If the notification of the type is not performed, or if the notification effect of winning the 2nd BB is generated as the notification of the bonus type, a negative determination is made in step S3805, and an advantageous display is performed when the 2nd BB is won. and even if the bonus winning notification effect (step S2406) is performed, the type of bonus targeted for the bonus winning notification effect is not notified or the bonus type is not performed. When the notification effect of winning the 1st BB occurs as the notification of the type of , a negative determination is made in step S3805. If a negative determination is made at step S3805, at step S3806, the processing for continuously displaying the advantageous display for winning the BB that is being executed is performed, and then this status display update processing is terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3805, then in step S3806 processing is performed to switch the display content to the target bonus countdown display, and then this status display update processing ends. In this case, in the countdown display, the number of games remaining in the countdown is determined according to the number of games until the AT mode transition lottery is performed, and the number of games is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 89(a), a bonus for winning the first BB in a situation where the first special image P1 in the seventh unit reserved display area Dr7 is displayed with an advantage when winning the first BB When the winning notification effect is generated, the target first special image P1 is shifted to the sixth unit reserved display area Dr6, and the first countdown display "Within 5 games, 7 7 7 Let me win a prize!!" should be displayed.

Therefore, when the advantageous display at the time of winning the BB is performed, the advantageous display at the time of winning the BB ends before the performance of notifying the winning of the bonus is generated, so that the winning of the bonus is detected before the performance of notifying the winning of the winning. can be eliminated. In addition, even if the 2nd BB is won when the advantageous display is displayed when the 1st BB is won, or when the 1st BB is won when the 2nd BB is favorably displayed, the type of the bonus is notified. Until is performed, the advantageous display at the time of BB winning is continuously displayed. Further, even when the bonus type is notified, if the bonus type is different from the target type, the advantageous display at the time of winning the BB is continuously displayed. By doing so, it is possible to maintain the expectation for winning the target bonus.

If a negative determination is made in step S3804, the process advances to step S3808. In step S3808, it is determined whether the status display to be updated is the first countdown display or the second countdown display. If any of the countdown displays are displayed, it is determined in step S3809 whether or not the corresponding BB winning has been established in the previous game. That is, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game in the target first BB state or second BB state. If a negative determination is made in step S3809, then in step S3810 the countdown display is updated, and then the status display update process ends. In the countdown display updating process, the display of the number of remaining games is updated by subtracting 1 in accordance with the shift of the special image.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3809, then in step S3811 processing is performed to switch the display content to corresponding chance display, and then this status display update processing ends. For example, as shown in FIG. 89(b), in a situation where the second countdown display is performed for the sixth special image P6 in the seventh unit reserved display area Dr7, when the second BB prize is established, the second It is preferable to switch the countdown display to the correspondence chance display.

If a negative determination is made in step S3808, the process proceeds to step S3812. In step S3812, it is determined whether or not the status display to be updated is the response chance display. If it is the corresponding chance display, it is determined in step S3813 whether or not the remaining number of payouts up to the upper limit number of payouts in the current bonus state is greater than 45. If the number of remaining payouts is greater than 45, in step S3814, processing for continuing the corresponding chance display is performed, and then this status display update processing is terminated. If the number of remaining payouts is 45 or less, then in step S3815 the process of switching the display content to the end delay display is performed, and then this status display update process is terminated. For example, as shown in FIG. 90(a), in a situation where the corresponding chance display is performed for the fifth special image P5 in the seventh unit reserved display area Dr7, the remaining number of payouts becomes 45 or less, and the target When the fifth special image P5 is shifted to the sixth unit reserved display area Dr6, it is preferable to switch to the end delay display.

Here, the case where it is determined in step S3813 that the remaining number of payouts is 45 or less means that, for example, when the corresponding chance display is started in a situation where the number of remaining payouts is 72, 9 in three games in a row. It is assumed that the number of medals to be paid out is 45, and the number of medals to be paid out is shifted to the sixth unit reserved display area Dr6. Since the status display is terminated by shifting to the fifth unit reserved display area Dr5, when it is determined that the remaining number of payouts is 45 or less in the situation where the corresponding chance display is performed in step S3813, the corresponding This is a case where the game is started with 71 or 72 chances displayed, and 9 medals are paid out in 3 consecutive games from the start. In other words, when the number of remaining payouts is 73 or more and the corresponding chance display is started, even if 9 medals are paid out in three consecutive games from the start, it is determined that the number of remaining payouts is 45 or less in step S3813. Even if the corresponding chance display starts with 71 or 72 medals, if 9 medals are not paid out even once in 3 games from the start, the process proceeds to step S3813. Therefore, it will not be determined that the number of sheets is 45 or less.

If it is determined in step S3812 that the response chance display is being performed, this means that the status display to be updated is the end delay display. In this case, in step S3816, the processing for continuing the display for delaying the end is performed, and then this processing for updating the status display is terminated.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a configuration in which an AT counter C is acquired in advance and stored in a lottery information storage area 106f, and an AT mode transition lottery is performed using the stored AT counter C and a game lottery result, the game state is shifted. Even if this occurs, the AT mode shift lottery is performed using the AT counter C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f. That is, the AT mode transition lottery can be performed during BB using the AT counter C obtained during normal times, and the AT mode transition lottery can be performed during normal times using the AT counter C obtained during BB. The lottery result of the game may be different between the normal time and the BB time, and even if the same AT counter C is used, the probability of winning the AT mode transition may be different. By using such a relationship, depending on the AT counter C acquired in advance, for example, in normal times, there are cases where it is better to shift to the BB state and cases where it is not. It is possible to entertain the AT mode transition lottery while playing.

The probabilities of winning the specific role that triggers the lottery for shifting to the AT mode are different between the normal time and the BB time. By doing so, the relationship between the AT counter C acquired in advance and whether or not to cause the transition to the BB state during normal operation can be different, and the above-mentioned game characteristics can be favorably improved. Realization is possible.

In the first BB state and the second BB state, the odds of winning the specific role that triggers the AT mode shift lottery are different. By doing so, the relationship between the AT counter C acquired in advance and the transition to the first BB state or the second BB state differs during normal operation. It is possible to entertain the AT mode shift lottery while taking into account the state.

In addition, since the information that the 1BB win or the 2BB win is held as the 1BB win flag or the 2BB win flag until the 1BB win or the 2BB win occurs, the 1BB win or the 2BB win Then, in relation to the AT counter C, the winning game of the winning BB can be adjusted.

As a pending display when each AT counter C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f is targeted for the AT mode transition lottery, what kind of lottery result in the game will result in winning the AT mode transition, Alternatively, it is configured to specify whether or not it is likely to win an AT mode transition win, and to display each of the special images P1 to P10 as a notification corresponding to the specified result. By doing so, it is possible to challenge the game after grasping what kind of lottery result should be from the pending display, and the game performance in performing the AT mode transition lottery is improved. can be dramatically improved.

Moreover, in addition to the pending display such as the special images P1 to P10, the status display informs whether or not the state transition should occur. It is possible to easily understand the contents of the game in the changing game characteristics. As a result, even a player unfamiliar with the game can understand what kind of lottery result should be drawn from the contents of the reserved display, and whether or not the game state should be shifted. It is possible to play a game while playing.

In the random number acquisition process, the AT counter C is acquired regardless of whether the advantageous interval flag is set. By doing so, it is less likely that the AT counter C is not acquired when moving to the advantageous section, and the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C is preferably performed from the time of winning the advantageous section transition. It becomes possible to

On the other hand, the hold display as a prefetch notification of the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C occurs after the transition to the advantageous section. By doing this, advance notification of the AT mode transition lottery can be made within the meaning of providing a stepwise lottery such as shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section and receiving the AT mode transition lottery in the advantageous section. can be done.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described first embodiment, the special image as a hold display is configured to be displayed when the hold display lottery that is individually performed for each hold (AT counter C) is won, but a predetermined condition is met. Based on that, it may be configured to perform the holding display even if the holding display lottery is not won. FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing the pending display process in this modified example.

In the pending display processing in this modification, it is determined in step S3901 whether or not the AT mode win flag or AT mode flag is set, and in step S3902 it is determined whether or not an AT command has been received. In step S3903, based on the received AT command, the information of the AT counter C is stored in the corresponding area. The processing of steps S3901 to S3903 is the same as the processing of steps S3501 to S3503.

After the process of step S3903 is performed, in this modification, it is determined whether or not a bonus winning notification effect has occurred and the type of bonus has also been notified in step S3904. More specifically, at the start of the current game, as the effect setting process at the time of betting, setting of a bonus winning notification effect including the effect of winning the 1st BB or winning the 2nd BB is performed, and whether the effect has occurred. determine whether or not If it has not occurred, in steps S3905 to S3910, a process of generating a pending display is performed through a pending display lottery process. The processing of steps S3905 to S3910 is the same as the processing of steps S3504 to S3509.

If it is determined in step S3904 that a bonus winning notification effect has occurred at the start of the current game, the process proceeds to step S3911. In step S3911, it is determined whether or not there is an undisplayed unit pending display area (no special image is displayed) due to non-winning in the pending display lottery. If it exists, the process advances to step S3912 to acquire the information of the AT counter C from the storage area of the pending information storage area 183c corresponding to the unit pending display area with the smallest number among the undisplayed unit pending display areas. process. Then, in step S3913, the special image table is acquired, in step S3914 special image selection processing is executed, and in step S3915 processing for displaying the selected special image in the corresponding unit reserved display area is executed. These processes are the same as those in the case of winning the holding display lottery.

After executing the process of step S3915, it returns to step S3911 and it is determined whether the undisplayed unit reservation display area still exists. Since the special image is displayed in all the unit reserved display areas, a negative determination is made in step S3911. When the special images are displayed in all the unit reserved display areas, the process advances to step S3916 to perform processing for selecting a special image for displaying the status among the special images displayed this time. In this case, since the bonus winning announcement has already been made as described above, the status display will be either the first countdown display or the second countdown display. The corresponding special image is the subject of the status display. More specifically, if the 1st BB is won, the cherry special image will be displayed, and if the 2nd BB is won, the watermelon special image will be displayed. . Then, if there are a plurality of special images that can be the target of the countdown display, the special image corresponding to the area with the smallest number among the storage areas of the pending information storage area 183c is the target of the current status display. Select as

In this case, as shown in FIG. 92, for example, in a situation where the special image is displayed in the second unit reserved display area Dr2 and the sixth unit reserved display area Dr6, the bonus winning notification effect of winning the first BB occurs, the specific notification is started in the unit reserved display area where the special image was not displayed. More specifically, triggered by the bonus winning notification effect, the first unit reserved display area Dr1, the third unit reserved display area Dr3 to the fifth unit reserved display area Dr5, the seventh unit reserved display area Dr7 to the tenth unit reserved display. A special image is displayed in the area Dr10. In this case, the special images corresponding to these unit reserved display areas Dr1, Dr3-Dr5, Dr7-Dr9 were once unsuccessful in the reserved display lottery, and the non-successful bonus winning notification effect It can be said that it is an opportunity to display what has become. As for the tenth unit reserved display area Dr10, since the special image is displayed without going through the reserved display lottery, the bonus winning notification effect restricts the execution of the reserved display lottery or the execution of the reserved display lottery. It can be said that it is an opportunity to restrict non-election in the future.

In FIG. 92, among the newly displayed special images, the first special image P1 as the cherry-based special image is displayed in the seventh unit reserved display area Dr7, and the first special image P1 is the target. A countdown display is started as a status display.

By doing so, when one of the BBs is won in the normal time and it becomes possible to shift from the normal time to the BB time, each AT counter C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f It is possible to know the contents of That is, in the AT mode transition lottery, the content of the AT counter C can be grasped by the pending display in a situation where the state can be shifted to a state in which the winning probability of the special combination that triggers the AT mode transition lottery is different. In this way, for example, as a configuration in which no hold display is performed at normal times, it is possible to make it possible to avoid annoyance in terms of production, and pinpoint hold when necessary. By performing the display, it is also possible to preferably expect the production effect of the hold display.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, when the winning bonus type is notified, and if there is no special image corresponding to the winning bonus among the displayed special images, the bonus winning is continued until the corresponding special image is displayed. delay. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing the BB winning game adjustment process executed by the display control device 81 . The process for adjusting the BB winning game is, for example, a process that is executed in the setting process (step S2511) of other start effects in the start effect setting process (FIG. 59), and the game is started based on the operation of the start lever 41. Runs on start.

In step S4001, it is determined whether or not bonus winning notification has been executed as the last betting effect. When the bonus winning notification has been performed, it is determined in step S4002 whether or not the winning notification of the first BB has been performed. In the case of the first BB winning notification, it is determined in step S4003 whether or not a cherry-based special image is displayed in any unit reserved display area. Note that if this modification is applied to modification 1, the unit pending display area that starts to be displayed anew upon notification of the bonus win may also be subject to determination in step S4003. When a cherry-based special image is displayed in any of the unit reserved display areas, the status display of the first countdown display for the cherry-based special image is started by the status display start processing and the status display update processing. is the case. In other words, by quickly winning the first BB, the AT counter C corresponding to the cherry-based special image can bring the AT mode transition lottery target game to the first BB state. In step S4003, if a cherry-type special image is displayed in any of the unit reserved display areas, this BB winning game adjustment processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4003 that the cherry-based special image is not displayed in any of the unit reserved display areas, this BB End the winning game adjustment process. Winning delay display means that the winning BB is not immediately won, and the winning of the BB is delayed until the special image corresponding to the winning BB is displayed (until the AT counter C corresponding to the winning BB is obtained). This is a display for notifying that the situation should be set. More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 94, in the case where the bonus winning notification effect of winning the 1st BB is generated, the cherry special image corresponding to the 1st BB is not displayed in each unit reserved display area. In this case, a message indicating that BB winning should be avoided is displayed until the first special image P1, the fourth special image P4 or the fifth special image P5 is displayed as the cherry special image.

When it is determined that the bonus winning notification effect executed in step S4002 does not correspond to the first BB, it means that it corresponds to the second BB. In this case, the process advances to step S4004 to determine whether or not a watermelon-based special image is displayed in any unit reserved display area. When a watermelon-based special image is displayed in any of the unit pending display areas, the status display of the second countdown display for the watermelon-based special image is started by the status display start processing and status display update processing. is the case. In other words, by promptly winning the second BB, the AT counter C corresponding to the watermelon-based special image can put the game in the second BB state for the AT mode transition lottery. In step S4004, if a watermelon-based special image is displayed in any of the unit reserved display areas, this BB winning game adjustment processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4004 that the watermelon-based special image is not displayed in any of the unit reserved display areas, then in step S4005 the process of displaying the winning delay is executed, and then this BB End the winning game adjustment process. In the winning delay display in this case, it is preferable to display that the BB winning should be avoided until the second special image P2, the sixth special image P6 or the seventh special image P7 is displayed as the watermelon special image.

If it is determined in step S4001 that the bonus winning effect is not being performed in the current game, the process proceeds to step S4006. In step S4006, it is determined whether or not the prize winning display is being executed. If the winning delay display has not been performed, this BB winning game adjustment process is terminated. If the prize winning display is delayed, the process advances to step S4007 to determine whether or not the first BB is being carried over. The case in which the first BB is in the carryover state is the case in which the winning delay display is performed to the effect that the BB winning should be avoided until the above-mentioned cherry-based special image is displayed. In this case, in step S4008, it is determined whether or not a cherry-based special image was displayed in the tenth unit reserved display area Dr10 in the reserved display processing of the previous game (based on the third stop OFF operation). When the cherry-based special image is displayed, processing for ending the winning delay display is performed in step S4010. Then, in step S4011, after the winning indication is displayed, this BB winning game adjustment process is terminated. The winning instruction display is a display for notifying that the BB winning should be established immediately. For example, as shown in FIG. 94, when the fifth special image P5 as a cherry-based special image is displayed in the tenth unit reserved display area for Dr10 in a state where the delayed winning display corresponding to the first BB is performed, It is preferable to display on the auxiliary display section 65 that the 1st BB winning will be established quickly (for example, display "Aim for RED 7"!!).

If it is determined in step S4007 that the 1st BB carryover state is not in progress, it means that the 2nd BB carryover state is in effect, and the BB winning prize is displayed until the watermelon special image is displayed as the winning delay display during execution. This is a case where a delayed winning display is displayed to the effect that the winning should be avoided. In this case, in step S4009, it is determined whether or not a watermelon-based special image has been displayed in the tenth unit reserved display area Dr10 in the reserved display processing of the previous game (based on the third stop OFF operation). When the watermelon-based special image is displayed, processing for ending the winning delay display is performed in step S4010, and after a winning instruction is displayed in step S4011, this BB winning game adjustment processing ends.

As described above, in relation to the BB state in which the transition is possible, it is specified whether or not the AT counter C obtained in advance is likely to win the AT mode transition, and the transition to the BB state is caused promptly. By notifying whether or not, it is possible to realize not only a game aiming at BB winning which is likely to be AT mode transition winning, but also a game in which the BB state transition timing is adjusted after BB winning.

In particular, in this modified example, after the state transition becomes possible, the configuration acquires the AT counter C corresponding to the state in which the transition is possible (the state until the corresponding AT counter C is acquired). Since the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT counter C acquired in advance, the AT counter provided for the AT mode transition lottery is selected from the acquired AT counters C. A game in which the player selects C is possible. As a result, the player himself/herself can participate in the AT mode transition lottery, and the amusement of the game is significantly improved.

Incidentally, the end delay display in the first embodiment is a notification indicating that the current state should be maintained until the target special image becomes the target of the AT mode transition lottery, and the above end delay display. is a notification indicating that the current state should be maintained until the AT counter C corresponding to the target special image is obtained.

<Modification 3>
In the above-described first embodiment, the description has been made on the assumption that the pattern arrangement is capable of distinguishing between the 1st BB winning and the 2nd BB winning. good too. In addition, in the bonus winning notification effect in the present modified example 3, the configuration is such that the type notification as to which one of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB has been won is not performed.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an outline of arrangement of symbols attached to the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R in this modified example. In FIG. 95, only the "Red 7" pattern corresponding to the 1st BB prize and the "White BAR" pattern corresponding to the 2nd BB prize are displayed. "Replay" pattern, etc.) are omitted. In addition, in the third modification, in addition to the downward-sloping line L4, the middle line L2 and the upward-sloping line L5 are also set as active lines.

In this modification, a "white BAR" symbol is arranged at the 17th position on the left reel 32L, and a "red 7" pattern is arranged at the adjacent 18th position. In the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" pattern is arranged at the 17th position, and the "white BAR" pattern is arranged at the 18th position adjacent thereto. On the right reel 32R, a "red 7" pattern is arranged at the 18th position, and a "white BAR" pattern is arranged at the 19th position adjacent thereto.

In this case, for example, when the 18th "red 7" symbol is aimed at the left reel 32L and the stop operation is performed to establish the first BB winning, and the 18th "red 7" symbol stops at the upper row, the 17th "red 7" symbol is stopped. The "white BAR" pattern stops in the middle row, leaving room for the 2nd BB prize. That is, at this time point, it cannot be determined from the stop result whether the 1st BB prize is established or the 2nd BB prize is established. Furthermore, as pinching, after that, the right reel 32R is aimed at the 18th "red 7" symbol, and the stop operation is performed. stops in the middle row, leaving room for the 2nd BB prize. In other words, a double tense of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB occurs, and it cannot be determined whether the 1st BB winning or the 2nd BB winning is established until the middle reel 32M is stopped.

In this way, by making it difficult to grasp whether or not to transition to an advantageous bonus state in relation to the displayed special symbols as the pending display until the bonus winning is established, it is possible to wait until the bonus winning is established. It is possible to further enhance the excitement.

<Second embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, as the random number for the AT mode transition lottery, the common AT counter C is used for the normal time and the BB time, but in this embodiment different random numbers are used. FIG. 96 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the lottery information storage area 106f in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the lottery information storage area 106f is provided with an execution area AE and a storage area RE. An area REA and a BB storage area REB for storing a random number for AT mode transition lottery at the time of BB are provided. The normal storage area REA has a plurality of storage areas, and like the storage area RE in the first embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery for 10 games in the first storage area REA1 to the tenth storage area REA10 is performed. An area that can store information on random numbers for use is set. Also, in the BB storage area REB, a first storage area REB1 to a tenth storage area REB10 are set.

That is, in the present embodiment, as the random number information for the AT mode transition lottery, the first storage area REA1 to the tenth storage area REB10 in the normal storage area REA and the first storage area REB1 to the first storage area REB1 in the BB storage area REB are used. Random number information for AT mode transition lottery for each 10 games can be stored in each of the 10 storage areas REB10.

In this embodiment, normal AT counters CA are provided in various counter areas 106e as random numbers for AT mode transition lottery for normal times, and BB AT counters are provided in various counter areas 106e as random numbers for AT mode transition lottery for BBs. A CB is provided. Both the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB, like the AT counter C in the first embodiment, are incremented by 1 in order within the range of 1 to 128 and reach the maximum value (that is, 128). It is a loop counter that returns to 1 afterward. The normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB are periodically updated and, for example, incremented by one each time timer interrupt processing is started.

As for the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB, dedicated free-running counters and hardware circuits are used in the same way as the free-running counters and hardware circuits used to determine whether a winning combination is correct. The hardware circuit latches the value of the free-running counter before the acquisition timing of the AT counter CB for CA and BB (for example, at the time of the third stop OFF operation), and acquires the AT counter CA for normal use and the AT counter CB for BB. The configuration may be such that the latched value is read at times.

FIG. 97 collectively shows the AT mode transition lottery table when the normal AT counter CA is used and the AT mode transition lottery table when the BB AT counter CB is used.

When the AT mode transition lottery is conducted, the values for winning the AT mode transition are different between the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB in values corresponding to strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon. , and values in other game results are common. More specifically, as a value for winning the AT mode transition at the time of strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon, more values are associated with the BB AT counter CB than with the normal AT counter CA, In the AT mode transition lottery that is performed at the time of these strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon, it is easier to win the lottery using the BB AT counter CB than the lottery using the normal AT counter CA. is set to Further, the values corresponding to the strong cherry and weak cherry have a relationship in which the value of the BB AT counter CB includes the value of the normal AT counter CA, and the values corresponding to the strong watermelon and weak watermelon are the normal AT counter values. The value of CA and the value of AT counter CB for BB are set to have different relationships.

More specifically, as the value for winning the AT mode transition lottery that is performed when the strong cherry is won, "1" to "64" are associated with the normal AT counter CA, whereas the BB AT counter CB is associated with the value. , "1" to "95" are associated. In addition, as the value for winning the AT mode transition lottery that is performed when the weak cherry is won, "1" to "18" are associated with the normal AT counter CA, whereas "1" to "18" are associated with the BB AT counter CB. 1” to “32” are associated. In other words, the value of the BB AT counter CB is set to include the value of the normal AT counter CA as the winning value for the strong cherry or weak cherry.

On the other hand, in the normal AT counter CA, ``5'' to ``8'' and ``65'' to ``94'' are associated as values for winning the AT mode transition lottery that is performed when the strong watermelon is won. On the other hand, in the BB AT counter CB, "5" to "8" are associated with "33" to "58" and "95" to "128". In addition, as a value for winning the AT mode transition lottery that is performed when a weak watermelon is won, the normal AT counter CA associates "5" with "65" to "76", whereas the BB In the AT counter CB, "5" is associated with "33" to "58". That is, except for "5" to "8" for strong watermelon and "5" for weak watermelon, other values are set to be mutually different values.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the random number acquisition process is a process executed based on the third stop OFF operation among the operations of the stop switches 42-44.

In step S4101, it is determined whether or not the game to end this time is a game in the bonus state of the first BB state or the second BB state. If it is not in the bonus state, the process advances to step S4102 to execute processing for acquiring the normal AT counter CA. Then, in step S4103, the normal AT counter CA acquired in step S4102 is stored in the corresponding storage area in the normal storage area REA. More specifically, among the empty areas in the memory areas REA1 to REA10, the area with the smallest number (basically the tenth memory area REA10) is stored with the normal AT counter CA. After that, in step S4104, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set, and if it is set, in step S4105, the normal AT command A is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Execute the process. The normal AT command A is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp the information of the normal AT counter CA stored in each storage area REA of the normal storage area REA.

If the advantageous section flag is not set in step S4104, or if the process of step S4105 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S4106. In step S4106, the BB storage area REB is checked to determine whether or not the BB AT counter CB is stored in all of the storage areas REB1 to REB10. If the random number is stored in all areas, the random number acquisition process ends. If there is an area that is not stored, the process advances to step S4107 to execute processing for acquiring the AT counter CB for BB. Then, in step S4108, a process of storing the BB AT counter CB obtained in step S4107 in the corresponding storage area in the BB storage area REB is performed. More specifically, a process of storing the BB AT counter CB in the area with the smallest number among the empty areas in each of the storage areas REB1 to REB10 is executed. Then, in step S4109, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set, and if it is set, in step S4110, the BB AT command B is set as an output target to the display control device 81. After executing the processing for obtaining the random number, the random number acquisition processing ends. The AT command B for BB is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp the information of the AT counter CB for BB stored in each storage area REB of the storage area REB for BB. If the advantageous section flag is not set in step S4109, the random number acquisition process is terminated.

That is, in the random number acquisition process when the bonus state is not in effect, the normal AT counter CA is acquired and stored in the corresponding storage area, and the BB AT counter is calculated on the condition that there is an empty area in the BB storage area REB. Acquisition processing and storage processing of CB are also performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4101 that the game is in the bonus state, the process advances to step S4111 to perform the reverse processing of steps S4102 to S4110. That is, the BB AT counter CB is acquired and stored in the corresponding storage area, and the normal AT counter CA acquisition process and storage process are also performed on condition that there is an empty area in the normal storage area REA.

More specifically, in step S4111, the process of acquiring the AT counter CB for BB is executed, and in step S4112, the process of storing the AT counter CB for BB in the area with the smallest number among the empty areas of the storage area REB for BB. I do. Then, in step S4113, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set, and if it is set, in step S4114, a process of setting AT command B for BB is executed. If the advantageous section flag is not set in step S4113 or after the process of step S4114 is executed, in step S4115, whether the normal AT counter CA is stored in all areas of the normal storage area REA is determined. determine whether or not If it is stored in all areas, the random number acquisition process ends. If there is an empty area, then in step S4116 processing is performed to acquire the normal AT counter CA, and in step S4117 the normal AT counter CA is set in the area with the smallest number among the empty areas in the normal storage area REA. Perform the process of storing. Then, if the advantageous interval flag is set in step S4118, the normal AT command A is set in step S4119, and then the random number acquisition process is terminated. If the advantageous interval flag is not set, the random number acquisition process is terminated without setting the normal AT command A.

Next, random number shift processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the random number shift process is a process executed in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31) at the start of the game (step S701).

In step S4201, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game in the bonus state of the first BB state or the second BB state. If it is not in the bonus state, the process advances to step S4202 to perform shift processing of the normal storage area REA. That is, in step S4202, the normal AT counter CA stored in the first storage area REA1 of the storage areas REA1 to REA10 is shifted to the execution area AE, and A process of clearing the information of the normal AT counter CA is performed. In the AT mode transition lottery in the first special combination process (Fig. 33), the information corresponding to the normal AT counter CA stored in the execution area AE is obtained as the random number information used in the current AT mode transition lottery. do. In other words, the AT mode transition lottery in the normal time not in the bonus state is performed based on the normal AT counter CA out of the pre-obtained normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB.

In the subsequent step S4203, processing is performed to shift the normal AT counters CA stored in the storage areas REA2 to REA10 to the lower area side. Specifically, the information stored in the second storage area REA2 is stored in the first storage area REA1, and the information stored in the second storage area REA2 is cleared. → second storage area REA2, fourth storage area REA4 → third storage area REA3 . . . tenth storage area REA10 → ninth storage area REA9. In this case, only information is shifted from the tenth memory area REA10 to the ninth memory area REA9, and new information is not shifted. That is, the information in the tenth memory area REA10 is cleared, and the tenth memory area REA10 becomes an empty area.

If it is determined in step S4201 that it is in the bonus state, the flow advances to step S4204 to shift the BB storage area REB. That is, in step S4204, the BB AT counter CB stored in the first storage area REB1 among the storage areas REB1 to REB10 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the AT counter CB stored in the first storage area REB1 is shifted to the execution area AE. A process of clearing the information of the AT counter CB for BB is performed. In the AT mode transition lottery in the first special combination process (Fig. 33), the information corresponding to the AT counter CB for BB stored in the execution area AE is acquired as the random number information used in this AT mode transition lottery. do. That is, the AT mode transition lottery during the bonus state is performed based on the BB AT counter CB out of the pre-obtained normal AT counter CA and BB AT counter CB.

In the subsequent step S4204, processing is performed to shift the BB AT counters CB stored in the respective storage areas REB2 to REB10 to the lower area side. Specifically, this is the same as the shifting of the normal storage area REA, and the tenth storage area REB10 becomes a free area by such shift processing.

After executing the processing of step S4203 or step S4205, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in step S42006. If the advantageous section flag is set, then in step S4207 the shift command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the random number shift process ends. If the advantageous section flag is not set in step S4206, the random number shift processing is terminated.

Although detailed description with drawings is omitted, a normal suspension information storage area and a BB suspension information storage area are set in the suspension information storage area 183c of the display control device 81 in this embodiment, As with the normal storage area REA and the BB storage area REB on the main controller 101 side, each can store 10 pieces of random number information for the AT mode transition lottery.

As shown in FIG. 100( a ), in the present embodiment, a normal reserved display area Dra and a BB reserved display area Drb are set in the lower part as predetermined display areas in the auxiliary display section 65 . The reserved display area Dra and the reserved display area Drb for BB are set as areas aligned vertically. The normal reserved display area Dra is partitioned so that the same number of unit reserved display areas Dra1 to Dra10 as the maximum number of normal AT counters CA stored in the normal storage area REA are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. . The BB reserved display area Drb is also partitioned so that the same number of unit reserved display areas Drb1 to Drb10 as the maximum number of BB AT counters CB stored in the BB storage area REB are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. ing. In addition, in parallel with the normal reserved display area Dra and the BB reserved display area Drb, on the left side (left side of the first unit reserved display area Dra1 and the first unit reserved display area Drb1), execution of the reserved information storage area 183c An execution display area Dp is set for holding the normal AT counter CA or the BB AT counter CB stored in the area AE.

Although a detailed description of the pending display processing (FIG. 79) and pending shift processing (FIG. 81) on the display control device 81 side will be omitted, in the pending display processing in this embodiment, normal processing is performed in step S3502. When the AT command A for normal use is received, the information of the normal AT counter CA is stored in the corresponding area of the normal use hold information storage area, and when the BB AT command B is received, the BB hold information is stored. The information of the AT counter CB for BB is stored in the area corresponding to the area (step S3503). Then, a holding display lottery is performed to determine whether or not to display a holding display based on the counter acquired this time (step S3504), and if the holding display lottery is won, a corresponding special image is displayed (step S3508).

In the pending shift process in this embodiment, based on the reception of the shift time command, the special image in the display area for execution Dp is cleared (step S3602), and the first unit pending display on the side to be shifted this time is displayed. A process of shifting the special image of the area to the execution display area Dp is performed (step S3603). More specifically, if the shift command is output when the normal storage area REA is shifted, the special image in the first unit reserved display area Dra1 in the normal reserved display area Dra is displayed in the execution display area Dp. If it is a shift-time command output when the BB storage area REB is shifted, the special image of the first unit reserved display area Drb1 in the BB reserved display area Drb is displayed in the execution display area Dp shift to

That is, as shown in FIG. 100(b), during normal operation, each special image displayed in the normal reserved display area Dra is shifted for each game and displayed in the execution display area Dp. It is understood that the AT mode transition lottery is targeted. On the other hand, each special image displayed in the reserved display area for BB Drb waits without being shifted. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, during BB, each special image displayed in the BB reservation display area Drb is shifted for each game and displayed in the execution display area Dp to shift to the AT mode. It is understood that it will be the target of the lottery. On the other hand, each special image displayed in the normal reserved display area Dra waits without being shifted.

That is, in the normal time, while grasping the special image when it is BB time, it is possible to carry over the special image until winning the BB, and when the special image in the normal time shifts to the BB time , it is possible to receive the AT mode shift lottery at BB without consuming the special image at normal time. In this way, separate AT counters are separately stored, and an AT counter to be consumed (shifted) is selected according to the state, so that the AT counter for each state can be handled more reliably. In such a state, it becomes possible to target the AT mode transition lottery.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB are provided as the random number information used for the AT mode transition lottery, and the normal AT counter CA is used during normal times. An AT mode transition lottery is performed, and at the time of BB, an AT mode transition lottery is performed using an AT counter CB for BB.

The AT mode transition lottery is performed using the lottery result of each game in addition to the lottery random number information such as the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB, which is the first embodiment. As described above, for example, when the probability of winning the AT mode transition with a predetermined lottery result (for example, strong cherry) is adjusted for each game state, the winning probability of the predetermined lottery result is made different for each game state. There is a method. However, there is a limit to increasing or decreasing the winning probability of a predetermined lottery result in each game, and changing the winning probability of a predetermined lottery result can also affect the medal payout rate.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the random number information for the corresponding lottery is changed so that the AT mode transition is won in the predetermined lottery result, so that the winning probability of the predetermined lottery result does not change greatly. However, it is possible to change the probability of winning the AT mode transition depending on the game state. In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, random number information for lottery is provided for each game state, so that not only the probability of winning the AT mode transition in each game state, but also the transition winning The degree of freedom of the attached random number information is greatly improved.

In this case, for example, it is possible to make the update ranges of the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB different. The minimum probability of lottery using random numbers is basically the reciprocal of the maximum value (number of random numbers) of the update range of random numbers for the lottery. The update range should be widened. On the other hand, if the update range of the random numbers is too wide, there may be structural problems, such as complicating the association of the lottery table. In other words, it is preferable to adjust the range of the random numbers for the lottery in consideration of the winning probability of the target lottery and the processing load. In this regard, if the update ranges of the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB are configured to differ from each other as described above, it becomes possible to customize the random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery for each state. .

Moreover, in the present embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the normal AT counter CA during normal operation, the AT counter CB for BB is neither used nor shifted, and the AT counter CB for BB is not used during BB. , and the normal AT counter CA is neither used nor shifted. Because of this, as in the first embodiment, in normal times, it is necessary to win the target bonus before the acquired AT counter C becomes the target of the AT mode transition lottery. Unlike games, in this embodiment, the BB AT counter CB that has already been acquired is not consumed normally, so it is possible to grasp the advantages and disadvantages of the AT mode transition lottery for the next bonus over a relatively long period of time. becomes. In other words, if the random number for the lottery corresponds to the 1BB, the next bonus will be expected to be the 1BB, and if the random number corresponds to the 2BB, the next bonus will be the 2BB. The point to be expected is common to the first embodiment, but in the first embodiment, the notice was for a short period of time, such as 10 games, which is the number of reserved areas. A long-term advance notice is possible in that the random numbers for the lottery are held until the bonus is obtained. Therefore, it is possible to arouse expectations for the bonus over a longer period of time.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, as described above, the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB are provided for each game state, and the special image corresponding to the normal AT counter CA and the special image corresponding to the BB AT counter CB are displayed. are displayed in parallel on the auxiliary display unit 65, the counters CA and CB are shifted regardless of the game state. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing random number shift processing in this modified example.

In step S4301, it is determined whether or not the player is in the bonus state. If it is not in the bonus state, in step S4302, shift processing from the normal storage area REA to the execution area AE is performed. That is, in step S4302, the normal AT counter CA stored in the first storage area REA1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the normal AT counter CA stored in the first storage area REA1 is cleared. conduct. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S4202 described above. In the subsequent step S4303, as in step S4203, processing for shifting the normal AT counters CA stored in the storage areas REA2 to REA10 to the lower area side is performed.

After executing the process of step S4303, in step S4304, the process of clearing the data in the first memory area REB1 of the BB memory area REB is executed. Then, in step S4305, processing is performed to shift the BB AT counters CB stored in the storage areas REB2 to REB10 in the BB storage area REB to the lower area side. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S4204 described above. That is, in this modification, the AT counter CB for BB in the storage area REB for BB is shifted even if it is not in the bonus state and is not subject to the AT mode transition lottery.

If it is determined in step S4301 that it is in the bonus state, in step S4306, shift processing from the BB storage area REB to the execution area AE is performed. That is, in step S4306, the BB AT counter CB stored in the first storage area REB1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the BB AT counter CB stored in the first storage area REB1 is cleared. conduct. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S4204 described above. In the following step S4307, similarly to step S4205, a process of shifting the BB AT counters CB stored in the respective storage areas REB2 to REB10 to the lower area side is performed.

After executing the process of step S4307, in step S4308, the process of clearing the data in the first memory area REA1 of the normal memory area REA is executed. Then, in step S4309, processing is performed to shift the normal AT counters CA stored in the respective memory areas REA2 to REA10 in the normal memory area REA to the lower area side. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S4203 described above. That is, in this modification, the normal AT counter CA in the normal memory area REA is shifted during the bonus state even if the AT mode shift lottery is not targeted.

After executing the process of step S4305 or step S4309, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in step S4310. , and then terminate the random number shift process. If the advantageous section flag is not set, the random number shift process is terminated without setting the output of the shift command.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 103, in the normal state, each special image displayed in the normal reserved display area Dra is shifted for each game and displayed in the execution display area Dp, whereby the AT mode is displayed. It is understood that it will be subject to the transfer lottery. Furthermore, even in the normal state, each special image displayed in the BB reserved display area Drb is shifted for each game. Also, during BB, each special image displayed in the BB reservation display area Drb is shifted for each game and displayed in the execution display area Dp, so that the AT mode transition lottery can be made. grasped. Furthermore, even during BB, each special image displayed in the normal reserved display area Dra is shifted for each game.

Normally, the special image in the BB reservation display area Drb is not shifted to the execution display area Dp, and the special image is simply cleared. Also, during BB, the special image in the normal reservation display area Dra is not shifted to the execution display area Dp, and the special image is simply cleared. Therefore, the player can clearly grasp which special image, the normal reserved display area Dra or the BB reserved display area Drb, is the target of the AT mode shift lottery.

By doing so, it is possible to grasp in which game state it is advantageous to receive the AT mode transition lottery while comparing the special images of the normal reservation display area Dra and the BB reservation display area Drb. As a result, it is possible to favorably improve the playability using the AT counter acquired in advance.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the game state to which the game is shifted after the end of the game is made different between the first BB state and the second BB state. That is, as shown in FIG. 104(a), when the first BB state ends, as in each of the above embodiments, the normal game state is entered, but when the second BB state ends, each of the above Unlike the embodiment, it is assumed that the state is shifted to the fourth RT state. The fourth RT state is a fixed RT state in which the number of games to be shifted to the normal game state is fixed after completing the prescribed number of games (FIG. 21), and in this modification, 10 games are set as the prescribed number of games. In this modified example, the contents of the lottery for each game in the fourth RT state are configured to be the same or substantially the same as the contents of the lottery for each game in the normal game state. The difference is that the state does not shift to the first RT state even if is stopped. The lottery table for the fourth RT state may be the lottery table for the normal game state (FIG. 17).

In this modified example, the fourth RT state is used as a high-probability state in which the AT mode shift lottery is likely to be won in the AT mode shift lottery. That is, as shown in FIG. 105, in the AT mode transition lottery using the normal AT counter CA, the probability of winning the AT mode transition in the normal gaming state, the 1st RT state to the 3rd RT state, and the 4th RT state is different. More specifically, in the normal game state and the 1st RT state to the 3rd RT state, for strong cherries, "1" to "64" of the normal AT counter CA are set as values for winning, In the fourth RT state, "1" to "128" of the normal AT counter CA are set as winning values for strong cherries. As for weak cherries, in the normal game state and the 1st RT state to the 3rd RT state, "1" to "18" of the normal AT counter CA are set as winning values, In the 4RT state, "1" to "128" of the normal AT counter CA are set as winning values. As for the strong watermelon, "5" to "8" and "65" to "94" of the normal AT counter CA are set as winning values in the normal game state and the 1st RT state to the 3rd RT state. On the other hand, in the fourth RT state, "1" to "95" of the normal AT counter CA are set as winning values. As for the weak watermelon, in the normal game state and the 1st RT state to the 3rd RT state, "5" and "65" to "76" of the normal AT counter CA are set as winning values. In the fourth RT state, "1" to "95" of the normal AT counter CA are set as winning values. In this way, AT mode transition wins are more likely to occur in the 4th RT state than in the normal game state and the 1st to 3rd RT states at the time of strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon.

In addition, in the present modification, the upper limit payout number that serves as a termination trigger is made different between the first BB state and the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 104(b), the first BB state ends when 216 medals are paid out, as in the above embodiments, and when 9 medals are paid out in each game. , the first BB state ends in 24 games (shortest). On the other hand, for the second BB state, 36 coins are set as the upper limit payout number. That is, in step S612 of the bonus state process (FIG. 26), 216 is set if the BB that won this time is the first BB, and 36 is set if it is the second BB. In this case, as for the second BB state, if nine medals are paid out every game, the second BB state ends after four games (shortest).

That is, in this modification, when the 2nd BB is won, compared to the 1st BB, the number of medals that can be expected to be obtained in the transition bonus state is small, but after that, the 1st as the AT mode high probability state for 10 games 4RT state is set.

In such a configuration, a normal AT counter CA and a BB AT counter CB are provided for each game state in the modified example 1, and a special image corresponding to the normal AT counter CA and a BB AT counter CB are provided. The bonus winning timing and the bonus ending timing are each suspended by applying a configuration in which the respective counters CA and CB are shifted regardless of the game state after displaying the special image in parallel on the auxiliary display unit 65. It is possible to entertain the user in relation to the special image in the display area.

That is, as shown in FIG. 106(a), the first special image P1 is placed in the fourth unit reserved display area Drb4 in the reserved display area Drb for BB, out of the reserved display area Dra for normal use and the reserved display area for BB Drb. It is assumed that the second BB is won in a situation where the first special image P1 is displayed in the tenth unit reserved display area Dra10 of the normal reserved display area Dra. As described above, in the first BB state and the second BB state, it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery. It is preferable for the player to receive it at BB instead.

In addition, after the second BB state, it shifts to the fourth RT state, and even in the fourth RT state, it becomes easier to win the AT mode shift lottery, so the AT mode shift for the first special image of the tenth unit reserved display area Dra10 It is preferable for the player to receive the lottery during the fourth RT state during normal times. Therefore, in this modified example, as a status display for the special image in the tenth unit reserved display area Dra10 as described above, for example, a display such as "Chance after BB" is displayed.

In this case, for example, when the second BB is won in the game shown in FIG. 106B, which is the next game after the game shown in FIG. You will be able to receive a mode transition lottery. That is, of the normal reserved display area Dra and the BB reserved display area Drb, the special image (BB AT counter CB) of the BB reserved display area Drb is used for the AT mode transition lottery.

As described above, the 2BB state is defined as the maximum payout number of 36, and can be completed in 4 games at the shortest when 9 payouts, which is the maximum payout number per game, occur. In other words, the second BB state can last for at least 4 games. Then, the first special image P1 displayed in the fourth unit reserved display region Drb4 in FIG. 106(a) and the third unit reserved display region Drb3 in FIG. 106(b) is at least in the second BB state. will be used for the AT mode transition lottery.

However, if the lottery result of each game in the second BB state is not the lottery result corresponding to the payout of 9 cards, or the number of payouts may be reduced or no payout may occur depending on the operation sequence or timing of the stop switches 42-44. Then, the second BB state will end after more than four games. In that case, the tenth unit reserved display area Dra10 in FIG. 106(a) and the first special image P1 displayed in the ninth unit reserved display area Dra9 in FIG. Depending on the number, whether or not it will be used for the AT mode transition lottery under normal conditions, more specifically, under conditions of the fourth RT state, differs.

For example, in the 2 BB state, when nine payouts occur in each game and the shortest four games are completed, the first special image P1 displayed in the ninth unit reserved display area Dra9 in FIG. The second BB state ends in the game displayed in the sixth unit reserved display area Dra6, and as shown in FIG. 106(c), the game displayed in the fifth unit reserved display area Dra5 A fourth RT state is initiated. Since the fourth RT state continues for 10 games, the first special image P1 displayed in the fifth unit reservation display area Dra5 is used for the AT mode transition lottery under the circumstances of the fourth RT state. Become.

On the other hand, when the second BB state ends in 12 games with three payouts per game, as shown in FIG. After the displayed first special image P1 has already been cleared from the normal reserved display area Dra, the fourth RT state after the end of the second BB state is started. That is, in this case, the benefit of the first special image P1 displayed in the ninth unit reserved display area Dra9 in FIG. 106(b) cannot be enjoyed.

As described above, since the minimum number of games to be completed differs depending on whether the BB state to be shifted to is the first BB state or the second BB state, the AT counter C corresponding to the pending display being displayed has a relationship with the pending display. The presence or absence of the possibility of performing the AT mode transition lottery based on the BB state after the BB state is different. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the AT mode transition lottery after the BB state as well, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of BB state to be shifted.

Moreover, whether or not the second BB state ends in the minimum number of games to be finished depends on the lottery result of the game and the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the game. and are added to the game, and the playability of the relationship with the pending display being displayed is further enhanced.

Incidentally, the lottery results that can be won in each game in the first BB state and the second BB state are the results that can cause medals to be paid out. It can be said that the result of the lottery in which the winning is possible constitutes part or all of the termination condition.

In addition, regarding the above modification 2, on the premise that the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB are used, the game characteristics using the relationship between the first BB state, the second BB state, and the fourth RT state will be explained. However, in the configuration in which the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB are shifted irrespective of the game state, the common AT counter C is used regardless of the game state as in the first embodiment to shift the AT mode. It is good also as a structure which performs a transfer lottery.

<Third Embodiment>
In each of the above-described embodiments, it is assumed that the random numbers "(AT counter C, normal AT counter CA, BB AT counter CB) used for the AT mode transition lottery have already been obtained, and are provided for the AT mode transition lottery. Although it has been explained that the random number information is replenished in the random number acquisition process, in the present embodiment, the explanation is based on the situation where the random number information for the AT mode transition lottery is not acquired. That is, as already explained, the random number acquisition process is executed based on the third stop OFF operation, and if the random number information is not stored in the lottery information storage area 106f, the first specific winning combination Therefore, in the slot machine 10, when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on, the random number information to be used for the AT mode transition lottery is acquired in advance. More specifically, as already described, when the power is turned on, the main process is started by the main controller 101. The initial random number acquisition process as a process for acquiring random number information used for the AT mode transition lottery is It is set to be started together with the winning probability setting process set during the main process.

In the following description, the configuration for acquiring the AT counter C in the first embodiment as the random number information for the AT mode transition lottery will be described. In the configuration in which the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB are provided as random numbers for the normal use, the acquisition processing for the respective counters CA and CB may be performed. It is good also as a structure which acquires CB.

As already explained, the process of setting the probability of winning is started when the setting change operation is performed when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on when the power is turned on. . When the winning probability setting process is started, the set value is updated by the operation of the start lever 41, and the set value indicates that the start lever 41 was operated after the setting key detection sensor 73a was turned off. , the setting value at that time is set as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated.

In the initial random number acquisition process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 107, it is determined in step S4401 whether or not a setting change operation has been performed. That is, it is determined whether or not the winning probability setting process has been started. If no setting change operation has been performed, the initial random number acquisition process is terminated.

Here, as already explained, the lottery information storage area 106f is provided in the RAM 106 in the main control unit 101, and the winning probability setting process is performed in the main process when the power is turned on. It is activated when initialization processing (RAM reset processing, RAM clear processing) of (game state information, winning flag, etc.) is performed. In other words, when it is determined in step S4401 that the winning probability setting process has not been started, the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on without performing the RAM 106 initialization process. In this case, the various information in the RAM 106 before the power cutoff (for example, the day before) is taken over (read out), and the state before the power cutoff is restored. That is, when it is determined in step S4401 that the winning probability setting process has not been activated, the AT counter C acquired before the power shutdown is taken over.

If it is determined in step S4401 that a setting change operation has been performed, the process advances to step S4402 to determine whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been performed. If the setting confirmation operation has not been performed, it waits in that state. When the setting confirmation operation is performed, that is, when the start lever 41 is operated after the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off in the process of setting the winning probability, the lottery information storage area is entered in step S4403. It is determined whether or not the AT counter C is stored in all the storage areas of 106f. As described above, when the winning probability setting process is activated, the initialization process has been performed. Therefore, basically, when proceeding from step S4402 to step S4403, an empty area is created in step S4403. It will be determined that there is If it is determined in step S4403 that there is an empty area, the process advances to step S4404.

In step S4404, random number update processing for lottery is performed. In such processing, the AT counter C is updated by adding a random value. That is, the value of the AT counter C is initialized to the initial value (1) by performing the initialization processing as described above. Step S4404 is processing for updating the initial value as a random value.

Specifically, the slot machine 10 is provided with a random number circuit for a free-running counter that is started when the power is turned on. The random number circuit generates random numbers from 1 to 128, and updates and generates random numbers separately and independently even while the main process is running (that is, during execution of the initial random number acquisition process). In step S4404, the random number at the time of activation in step S4404 is obtained from the random number circuit, and the obtained random number is added to the current AT counter C. FIG.

Then, in step S4405, a process for obtaining the updated AT counter C is performed. After that, in step S4406, the process of storing the AT counter C in the area with the smallest number among the empty areas is performed. The processes of steps S4405 and S4406 are the same as the processes of steps S3301 and S3302.

After executing the process of step S4406, the process returns to step S4403 to determine whether or not there is an empty area in the lottery information storage area 106f. If there is an empty area, the process advances to step S4404 again to update the AT counter C, and then acquire and store the AT counter C. FIG. By doing so, when obtaining the AT counters C for a plurality of games at once, it becomes difficult to obtain the AT counters C having the same value or consecutive values. The update cycle of the random number circuit is set so as to be asynchronous with the cycle cycle of steps S4403 to S4406.

Since the AT counter C is stored in all areas, a negative determination is made in step S4403, and the process proceeds to step S4407. In step S4407, the AT command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then this initial random number acquisition process ends. The AT command set here is output to the display control device 81 in timer interrupt processing after the main processing ends. As a result, the game can be played in a state in which the AT counter C is already stored in all areas of the lottery information storage area 106f at the beginning of the execution of the initialization process.

Incidentally, when the initialization process is executed when the power is turned on, the advantageous section flag is also cleared, so after the initialization process, the game is started not in the advantageous section but in the normal section. Then, in this embodiment, after the power is turned on, the configuration is such that the AT command can be output and the hold display can be performed even in the normal section. By doing so, the setting processing of the winning probability is performed when the power is turned on, and a game such as predicting whether or not the winning probability (set value) has been changed can be performed by the presence or absence of the pending display. becomes possible.

Note that, as in the above-described other embodiments, the AT command may be output under the condition that it is in the advantageous section even in the initial random number acquisition process.

By doing so, in a configuration in which the AT counter C is obtained in advance and the AT mode transition lottery is performed, the event that the AT mode transition lottery cannot be performed because the AT counter C has not been obtained can be prevented. You can keep it from happening.

In particular, in the above-described embodiment, the initial random number acquisition process is performed in the winning probability setting process in the main process when the power is turned on. In this situation, the lottery information storage area 106f of the AT counter C is already full. Therefore, even in the first game after the power is turned on, the AT mode shift lottery can be favorably performed.

In the normal random number acquisition process, the acquisition of the AT counter C is performed during the third stop OFF operation among the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44. In the setting process of (1), the set value is confirmed based on the operation of the start lever 41 . In this way, some kind of operation for obtaining the AT counter C is intervened. The value of the AT counter C also tends to be random.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described third embodiment, the random number information for the vacant area of the lottery information storage area 106f is acquired based on the setting value confirmation operation. It is good also as a structure which acquires. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing initial random number acquisition processing in this modified example.

In step S4501, it is determined whether or not a setting change operation has been performed, and if not, the initial random number acquisition processing ends. If a setting change operation has been performed, it is determined in step S4502 whether or not there is an empty area in the lottery information storage area 106f. Such processing is the same as the processing of step S4403. If there is an empty area, the process advances to step S4503 to perform processing for executing operation instruction notification. The operation instruction notification is, for example, a notification for causing the administrator to perform an operation for obtaining a random number for AT mode transition lottery. For example, when the acquisition operation is to operate the start lever 41, the auxiliary display section 65 may display "Please operate the start lever." It may also be configured to display numbers, such as the letter "S").

In this case, it is preferable that the operation for changing the set value (winning probability) and the operation for acquiring the AT counter C be distinguishable on the gaming machine side and the administrator side. More specifically, the operation for changing the set value (winning probability) and the operation for acquiring the AT counter C may be performed at different timings.

Thereafter, in step S4504, it is determined whether or not an acquisition operation has been performed, and the process waits until the acquisition operation is performed. If an acquisition operation has been performed, random number update processing is performed in step S4505, AT counter C acquisition processing is performed in step S4506, AT counter C storage processing is performed in step S4507, and then step S4502. back to The processing of steps S4505 to S4507 is the same as the processing of steps S4404 to S4406.

If it is determined in step S4502 that there is no empty area, the process advances to step S4508 to determine whether or not a setting value confirmation operation has been performed, and waits until the confirmation operation is performed. If the confirmation operation has been performed, the AT command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S4509, and then the initial random number acquisition process ends.

By doing so, in the configuration in which the AT counter C is acquired based on the administrator's operation, there is a one-to-one relationship between the acquisition operation and the acquired random number information. As a result, the acquisition timing of the AT counter C tends to be random, and the value of the AT counter C to be acquired tends to be random.

<Modification 2>
A random number for the AT mode transition lottery may be obtained by using a random number such as another counter other than the AT counter C. FIG. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing initial random number acquisition processing in this modified example.

In step S4601, it is determined whether or not a setting change operation has been performed, and in step S4602, it is determined whether or not a setting value confirmation operation has been performed. Then, in step S4603, it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in the lottery information storage area 106f. The processing of steps S4601 to S4603 is the same as the processing of steps S4401 to S4403. If it is determined in step S4603 that there is an empty area, the process advances to step S4604.

In step S4604, random number update processing is performed. The updating process is basically the same as the AT counter C updating process in step S4404 and the like, but in this modified example, the random number updating process for other counters and the like is also performed. In this modified example, random numbers such as other counters will be described using, as examples, a lottery counter used for an additional lottery, a lottery counter used for a VB mode transition lottery, and a lottery counter used for a special zone transition lottery.

As shown in FIG. 110, the lottery counter used for the additional lottery is a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of 1 to 256 and returns to 1 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 256). A lottery counter used for the additional lottery is periodically updated, and is incremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated, for example. The lottery counter used for the VB mode transition lottery is a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 1 to 128 and returns to 1 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 128). The lottery counter used for the VB mode transition lottery is also updated periodically, and is incremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated, for example. The lottery counter used for the special zone transfer lottery is a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 1 to 64 and returns to 1 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 64). The lottery counter used for the special zone transfer lottery is also periodically updated, for example, incremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

These lottery counters are also updated by the timer interrupt processing after the main processing ends, but are initialized to the initial value (1) by performing the initialization processing as described above when the initial random number acquisition processing is started. It is Therefore, in step S4604, these lottery counters are also updated with random values. In this case, when updating the AT counter C, the random numbers obtained from the random number circuit are added as they are. A predetermined value is added) is executed, and then the calculated value is added, and a second calculation ( For example, adding a second predetermined value) is executed, and then the calculated value is added. By performing a third operation different from the operation (for example, adding a third predetermined value) and then adding the operation value, the updated values from the initial value can be different values.

Moreover, it is good also as a structure which makes an initial value each different. Also, random number circuits for updating may be prepared separately, and the random number circuits may have different updating cycles, so that each lottery counter can be updated to a different value.

In step S4605, a process of acquiring a random number for AT mode transition lottery is performed. In this case, in this modification, in addition to the AT counter C, a free-running counter (a counter latched by a hardware circuit) for lottery used in the lottery process of each game, a lottery counter used for an additional lottery, and a transition to the VB mode. Acquisition processing of the lottery counter used for the lottery and the lottery counter used for the special zone shift lottery is performed. As described above, not only the AT counter C but also the lottery counter used for the additional lottery, the lottery counter used for the VB mode transition lottery, and the lottery counter used for the special zone transition lottery are updated in step S4604. are updated as random values. A random value is individually latched by the hardware circuit for the lottery free-run counter (the counter latched by the hardware circuit) used for the lottery process of each game.

These lottery free-run counters used in the lottery process of each game, lottery counters used for additional lotteries, lottery counters used for VB mode transition lotteries, lottery counters used for specialized zone transition lotteries, etc. This is a random number for lottery provided separately from the counter C. In this modification, random numbers for lottery provided separately from the AT counter C are used for the AT counter C. FIG.

At least one of the separately provided lottery random numbers (specifically, a lottery free-run counter used in the lottery process of each game) is updated at a cycle different from the update cycle of the AT counter C. It is a thing. More specifically, the lottery free-run counter used in the lottery process of each game is updated at an update cycle shorter than the AT counter C update cycle. Further, the free-running counter starts to be updated regardless of the progress of the main processing when the power is turned on.

In step S4606, conversion processing of the counter acquired in step S4605 is performed. Specifically, each lottery counter as a random number separately provided above is converted into a value corresponding to the random number for the AT mode transition lottery. As shown in FIG. 110, the various table storage area 105a stores a conversion table for each counter, and in step S4606, AT mode conversion is performed using the counter acquired in step S4605 and the conversion table. Convert as a random number that can be used for transition lottery.

For example, the lottery free-run counter used in the lottery process of each game has a value between 0 and 65535, and if a value between 0 and 511 is obtained, the AT counter C If a value of 512 to 1023 is obtained, the AT counter C is converted to 2, and if a value of 65024 to 65535 is obtained, the AT counter C is converted to 128. In addition, the lottery counter for the additional lottery has acquired any value between 1 and 256, and if 1 or 2 is acquired, it is converted to 1 as the AT counter C, and 3 or 4 is acquired. If 255 or 256 is obtained, it is converted to 128 as AT counter C. In this way, for counters whose update range is wider than that of the AT counter C (counters that can have large values), a conversion table is set by associating one AT counter value with a plurality of counter values.

Also, for example, the VB mode transition lottery lottery counter obtains any value between 1 and 128, and if 1 is obtained, it is converted to 1 as the AT counter C, and 2 is obtained. If it is, it is converted to 2 as the AT counter C, and if 128 is acquired, it is converted to 128 as the AT counter C. In other words, the conversion table is set so that the obtained counter value becomes the value of the AT counter as it is for the counters whose update range is the same as that of the AT counter C. If 1 is acquired, it is converted to 128 as AT counter C, if 2 is acquired, it is converted to 127 as AT counter C, and if 128 is acquired, it is converted to 1 as AT counter C. For example, the conversion table may be set so that the AT counter has a value different from the obtained counter value.

The lottery counter for the special zone transfer lottery has acquired any value between 1 and 64, and if 1 is acquired, it is converted to 1 or 2 as AT counter C, and 2 is acquired. If 64 is obtained, it is converted to 127 or 128 as AT counter C. That is, for a counter whose update range is narrower than that of the AT counter C (a counter that cannot have a large value), the conversion table is set such that one counter value is associated with a plurality of AT counter values. In this case, which value of the AT counter C is to be converted is determined by lottery or the like. For example, when 1 is acquired as the lottery counter for the special zone transfer lottery, 50% is converted to 1 as the AT counter C, and 50% is converted to 2 as the AT counter C. It should be noted that which AT counter C is converted into may not be divided evenly. and 80% is converted to 2 as AT counter C.

In addition, in each conversion table, the conversion destination AT counters may partially overlap. For example, when 1 is acquired as a lottery counter for the special zone transfer lottery, 30% is converted to 1 as AT counter C, 30% is converted to 2 as AT counter C, and 40% is converted to AT counter C. is converted to 3, and 2 is acquired as a lottery counter for special zone transition lottery, 40% is converted to 2 as AT counter C, 30% is converted to 3 as AT counter C, A configuration in which 30% is converted to 4 as the AT counter C may be used.

After executing the process of converting each counter to the AT counter C in step S4606, the process of storing the converted value in the empty area of the lottery information storage area 106f is carried out. In this case, for example, the AT counter C, the conversion value of the lottery free-run counter used for the lottery processing of each game, the conversion value of the lottery counter used for the additional lottery, and the conversion value of the lottery counter used for the VB mode transition lottery. , the converted values of the lottery counters used for the special zone transfer lottery may be stored in the order of the area with the smallest number among the empty areas, or the converted value of which counter is stored in any empty area. A configuration may be adopted in which whether or not is randomly determined by lottery or the like.

After executing the process of step S4606, the process returns to step S4602, and if there is no empty area, a negative determination is made in step S4602, and the process proceeds to the AT command setting process of step S4607. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S4407.

By the way, in this modification, as described above, five random numbers can be obtained in one round of processing from step S4603 to step S4607. AT counter C (or its equivalent value) is stored in . In this respect, ten random numbers are acquired for the AT counter C, and the AT counter C may be stored in all areas in one round of the processing of steps S4603 to S4607. In this case, one AT counter C and nine other random numbers may be prepared so that ten random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery can be obtained at once. 10 random numbers may be prepared, and ten random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery may be obtained at once. In the latter case, if the AT counter C were to remain at its initial value, there would be no point in acquiring it, or the lottery results would be the same each time. When obtained, it becomes possible to substitute another random number.

Also, assume that the number of random numbers to be acquired for the AT counter C is 3, the AT counter C is stored in 9 areas in 3 rounds of the processing of steps S4603 to S4607, and 1 AT counter C is stored in the remaining 1 round. The number of counters acquired in step S4605 may differ according to the number of free areas, such as the number of empty areas.

Further, in the configuration in which a plurality of random numbers different from the AT counter C are acquired and converted into the AT counter C, as in the above modification, a configuration may be adopted in which among the plurality of random numbers, the one with the shortest update cycle is acquired first. good. By doing this, for example, when obtaining the random number, it will be obtained in order from the initial value that is most likely to have already been updated, and the value close to the initial value will always be obtained. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience of increasing the possibility.

<Modification 3>
In place of or in addition to the configuration in which the random number for the AT mode transition lottery is pre-obtained when the winning probability setting process is started when the power is turned on, the configuration may be such that the random number is pre-obtained in the game after startup. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing initial random number acquisition processing in this modification. The initial random number acquisition process of this modification is started at a predetermined cycle, for example, every time the timer interrupt process is started, it is started within the timer interrupt process or as a separate process from the timer interrupt process.

In step S4701, it is determined whether or not there is an empty area in the lottery information storage area 106f. In step S4701, affirmative determination is also made when not only each storage area RE but also the execution area AE in the lottery information storage area 106f is empty. If a negative determination is made in step S4701, this initial random number acquisition process ends.

If it is determined in step S4701 that there is an empty area in the execution area AE or storage area RE, the flow advances to step S4702 to determine whether or not the game is in progress. Incidentally, in step S4702, the start lever 41 is operated to start rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped based on the third stop OFF operation to correspond to the winning result. One game is defined as the period until the processing (e.g., payout of medals) is completed, and it is determined that the game is in progress during this period. If it is determined that the game is not in progress, the process advances to step S4703 to determine whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated as a game start operation. It should be noted that when the start lever 41 is operated, valid bets may be set as a condition for determining the start operation. If the start operation has not been performed, the initial random number acquisition process is terminated.

If it is determined that the start operation has been performed, the process advances to step S4704 to perform AT counter C acquisition processing. Then, in step S4705, the AT counter C is stored. If the execution area AE is an empty area, the AT counter C is stored in the execution area AE in step S4705. When the AT mode shift lottery is performed in the lottery result handling process during the normal process, if the AT counter C is not stored in the execution area AE, it is preferable to wait until the storage process in step S4705 is completed. If the AT counter C is stored in the execution area AE in step S4705, the AT counter C is stored in the area with the smallest number among the empty areas in the storage area RE. After executing the process of step S4705, this initial random number acquisition process ends.

If it is determined in step S4702 that the game is in progress, the process advances to step S4706. In step S4706, it is determined whether or not the first stop ON operation has been performed. If the first stop ON operation has been performed, in step S4707 the AT counter C acquisition process is performed, and in step S4708 the AT counter C is stored in the area with the smallest number among the free areas of the storage area RE. , terminates the initial random number acquisition process.

If it is determined in step S4706 that the first stop ON operation has not been performed (the first stop ON operation has already been performed), the process proceeds to step S4709. In step S4709, it is determined whether or not the second stop ON operation has been performed. If the second stop ON operation has been performed, in step S4710 the AT counter C acquisition process is performed, and in step S4711 the AT counter C is stored in the area with the smallest number among the free areas of the storage area RE. , terminates the initial random number acquisition process.

If it is determined in step S4709 that the second stop ON operation has not been performed (the second stop ON operation has already been performed), the process proceeds to step S4712. In step S4712, it is determined whether or not the third stop ON operation has been performed. If the third stop ON operation has been performed, in step S4713 the AT counter C acquisition process is performed, and in step S4714 the AT counter C is stored in the area with the smallest number among the free areas of the storage area RE. , terminates the initial random number acquisition process. If it is determined in step S4712 that the third stop ON operation has not been performed (the third stop ON operation has already been performed), this initial random number acquisition processing is terminated.

As described above, since the acquisition of the AT counter C in the initial random number acquisition process is also performed by the player's operation, the AT mode transition lottery is performed within the scope of the player's own responsibility. Therefore, compared with the configuration obtained by the operation of the manager of the game hall, etc., it becomes easier for the player to accept the result, and the transparency of the game is ensured.

Note that, for example, only one AT counter C or the like may be acquired in the initial random number acquisition process at power-on, and the rest may be acquired in accordance with the game progress operation as described above.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, transition to the fourth RT state can occur in the first RT state. Then, at the time of transition to the fourth RT state, notification corresponding to the AT counter C acquired in advance is performed. In this embodiment, the reservation display area Dr is not set, and the special image corresponding to the AT counter C is not displayed. As already explained, the fourth RT state is a fixed RT state in which the number of games is fixed.
FIG. 112 shows a lottery table for the first RT state in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, it is possible to win transition replay 1 and transition replay 2 that are won in the 11th replay and the 12th replay in which transition to the 4th RT state occurs. More specifically, the probability of winning transition replay 1 with index value IV=13 is about 1/400, and the probability of winning transition replay 2 with index value IV=14 is also about 1/400. Yes, and when combined, either transition replay 1 or transition replay 2 will be won with a probability of about 1/200.

FIG. 113 shows the relationship between the winning game result and the order of operation of the stop switches 42-44 when the transition replay is won. When both Transition Replay 1 and Transition Replay 2 are operated in either a left→middle→right stop order, a left→right→middle stop order, or a middle→left→right stop order, If the eleventh replay win is established and the operation is performed in any one of the stop order of right→middle→left, the stop order of right→left→middle, or the stop order of middle→right→left, then the 12th It is set so that a replay win is established.

In this embodiment, when the 11th regame win is established, the state shifts to the 4th RT state A of the 4th RT state, and when the 12th regame win is established, the state shifts to the 4th RT state B of the 4th RT state. The lottery table for each game differs between the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 114 shows a lottery table for the fourth RT state, where the value shown on the left side of the point value PV column indicates the fourth RT state A, and the value shown on the right side of the point value PV column. The value indicates the fourth RT state B.

Here, in the present embodiment, winning results with index values IV=59 and 60 are set. If the index value IV=59 is won, the 13th replay win can be established. In addition, the 14th re-game winning prize can be established in which the index value IV=60 is won. Winning modes of the 13th re-game winning prize and the 14th re-game winning prize are as shown in FIG. 115(a). can be established. The thirteenth replay is also called a cherry replay because, for example, when "LUCKY" symbols stop on the upper row of the left reel 32L and a prize is established, "Cherry" symbols stop on the middle row of the left reel 32L. be. The 14th replay is also called a watermelon play because, for example, a "watermelon" symbol stops in the middle row of the middle reel 32M and a prize is established.

The cherry replay and the watermelon play are included in the specific combination as the game results targeted for the AT mode transition lottery. FIG. 115(b) shows the winning probabilities of the special hand according to the game state in this embodiment. Winning probabilities of specific hands in the normal game state, 1st RT state to 3rd RT state, 1BB state and 2nd BB state are the same as those in each of the above embodiments. In the 4th RT state, normal replays and push order replays (note that transition replay 1 and transition replay 2 are not included here) are not won, and cherry replays and watermelon replays of transition replays 1 and transition replays 2 are won. You will get In the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B, the probability of winning the cherry replay and the watermelon play is different. On the other hand, in the fourth RT state B, the cherry replay is won in about 1/20 and the watermelon play is won in about 1/2. That is, the fourth RT state A is easy to win the cherry replay and is also called cherry RT, and the fourth RT state B is easy to win the watermelon play and is also called watermelon RT.

A replay is awarded when a winning in cherry replay is established, and a replay is awarded also when a winning in watermelon play is established. Also, in the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B, winning probabilities other than cherry replay and water replay are the same. Then, both the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B shift to the normal game state by completing 10 games. In other words, the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B have no difference in the degree of advantage for the player in terms of the expected number of medals to be obtained per game. Therefore, when transition replay 1 or transition replay 2 is won, there is no difference in the number of medals that the player can expect in the RT state regardless of whether the transition is to the fourth RT state A or the fourth RT state B.

FIG. 116 shows an AT mode transition lottery table in this embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the AT counter C value for winning the AT mode transition lottery is set for cherry replay and watermelon play, and the AT counter C value for other specific hands is that of each of the above embodiments. is the same as Specifically, when the AT mode transition lottery is performed in Cherry Replay, if the value of the AT counter C is "1" to "64", the AT mode transition lottery is won, and the AT mode transition lottery is performed in Suikari Play. If the AT counter C value is between "65" and "128", the AT mode transition wins. The value of the AT counter C associated with these cherry replays and watermelon replays is common between the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B. In addition, although the value of the AT counter C that becomes the AT mode transition winning in the cherry replay and watermelon play in the normal game state and the 1st RT state to the 3rd RT state is also set, in the present embodiment, the normal game state and the In the 1RT state to the 3rd RT state, since it is set so as not to win the cherry replay or the watermelon play, an event of winning the AT mode shift triggered by the cherry replay or the watermelon play does not occur in these game states.

Here, the value of AT counter C associated with cherry replay and the value of AT counter C associated with watermelon replay are both continuous values, and their average values are different. . Specifically, the cherry replay ranges from "1" to "64" and the average value is 32.5. On the other hand, watermelon play is "65" to "128", and the average value is 96.5. As already explained, the AT counter C is a value whose update range is from "1" to "128", the first half of the update range is associated with cherry replay, and the second half of the update range is associated with watermelon replay. are associated. That is, if the acquired AT counter belongs to a small value within the update range (the first half of the update range, the first range), it corresponds to cherry replay, and the acquired AT counter has a large value within the update range ( If it belongs to the latter update range (second range), it corresponds to Suika Replay.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing in this embodiment.

In step S4801, a process of acquiring AT counter C is executed, and in subsequent step S4802, a process of storing AT counter C in the corresponding storage area is executed. After executing the process of step S4802, it is determined whether or not the value of the AT counter C acquired and stored this time is smaller than 65 in step S4803. That is, it is determined whether or not the current AT counter C has a smaller value within the update range and corresponds to cherry replay. If it corresponds to cherry replay, the processing for adding 1 to the cherry counter CC provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S4804, and then the random number acquisition processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4803 that the current AT counter C has a value on the larger side within the update range and corresponds to water refill play, then in step S4805 the counter area 106e is provided with After executing the process of adding 1 to the received watermelon counter SC, the random number acquisition process ends. The cherry counter CC is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of AT counters C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f that correspond to cherry replays with smaller values within the update range. The counter SC is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of AT counters C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f that correspond to watermelon play with a larger value within the update range.

As described above, in this embodiment, the reserved display area Dr is not set, and the special image corresponding to the AT counter C is not displayed. Therefore, the processing for outputting the AT command to the display control device 81 is not set in the random number acquisition processing in this embodiment.

Next, random number shift processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S4901, the process of shifting the AT counter C stored in the first storage area RE1 to the execution area AE is executed. In the subsequent step S4902, it is determined whether or not the value of the AT counter C shifted in step S4901, that is, the value of the AT counter C shifted to the execution area AE is smaller than 65. If it is smaller than 65, the current AT counter C is a value on the smaller side within the update range, and corresponds to cherry replay, a process of subtracting 1 from the cherry counter CC is executed in step S4903. On the other hand, it is determined that the value of the AT counter C shifted to the execution area AE is 65 or more, and that the current AT counter C is a larger value within the update range, and corresponds to the watermelon play. If so, a process of subtracting 1 from the watermelon counter SC is executed in step S4904. After executing the processing of step S4903 or step S4904, the shift processing of each storage area is executed in step S4905, and then the random number shift processing ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, since no special image is displayed on hold, the random number shift process in the present embodiment does not include the process of setting the output of the shift command.

Next, the special notification process executed in step S1524 of the pushing process in main controller 101 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The special notification process is a process executed in the game in which the transition replay 1 or transition replay 2 is won.

In step S5001, it is determined whether or not the transition replay won this time is the transition replay 1 or not. In the case of transition replay 1, the above cherry counter CC and watermelon counter SC are compared in step S5002 to determine whether or not the values of the cherry counter CC and watermelon counter SC are the same. If the cherry counter CC is 5 and the watermelon counter SC is 5, it is determined in step S5002 that they are the same.

If the numbers are not the same, it is determined in step S5003 whether or not the cherry counter CC is greater than the watermelon counter SC. If the cherry counter CC is larger, the special notification A command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S5004.

When the cherry counter CC is larger, more than half of the AT counters C for 10 games stored in the lottery information storage area 106f are AT counters C corresponding to cherry replay, and this time. Based on the transition replay 1 winning, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery by shifting to the fourth RT state A (cherry RT). In the display control device 81 that has received the special notification A command, in the special notification execution process (step S2615) in the pressing order notification process (FIG. 60), the operation mode corresponding to the 11th regame winning is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. Executes processing for notifying. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(a), it is preferable to notify the stop switches 42 to 44 that should be stopped first, such as "stop from left" (FIG. 113).

If the watermelon counter SC is greater than the cherry counter CC in step S5003, the special notification B command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S5005.

When the watermelon counter SC is larger, more than half of the AT counters C for 10 games stored in the lottery information storage area 106f are AT counters C corresponding to watermelon play. Based on the transition replay 1 winning, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery by shifting to the fourth RT state B (watermelon RT). Upon receiving the special notification B command, the display control device 81 executes processing for notifying the operation mode corresponding to the 12th regame winning on the auxiliary display section 65 in the special notification execution processing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(b), it is preferable to notify the stop switches 42 to 44 that should be stopped first, such as "stop from the right" (FIG. 113).

If it is determined in step S5001 that the transition replay 2 is won instead of the transition replay 1, and if it is determined in step S5002 that the cherry counter CC and the watermelon counter SC are the same, special notification C is performed in step S5006. A command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 .

In the display control device 81 that has received the special notification C command, in the special notification execution process, the stop operation corresponding to the 11th re-game winning is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the stop operation corresponding to the 12th re-game winning is performed. A process for performing a notification to let the player select whether or not to perform is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(c), a display such as "Select Fate" is displayed, and an operation mode corresponding to the 11th re-game winning and an operation mode corresponding to the 12th re-game winning are notified. In addition, it is preferable to allow the player to select which fourth RT state to transition to.

After any one of steps S5004, S5005, and S5006 is executed, in step S5007, a process of setting a push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then a special notification process is performed. exit.

In other words, the special notification at the time of winning the transition replay notifies to which of the 4th RT state A and the 4th RT state B, in which transition is possible, the transition should be made. It can also be said to be one aspect of the situation notification shown in the first embodiment.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, when the transition replay 1 or transition replay 2 is won, no push order notification is generated on the instruction monitor 68, and special information A and special Notification B or special notification C is generated.

Next, the 4th RT shift process, which is executed when the 11th regame win or the 12th regame win is established, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As described above, the fourth RT state transition process is a process executed in step S1623 in the winning result handling process.

The 4th RT transition processing grasps the possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the 4th RT state to be transitioned based on the acquired AT counter C, and the 4th RT according to the level of the expected value (possibility). This is a process for setting the state start effect. Here, a fourth RT effect A, a fourth RT effect B, and a fourth RT effect C are set as the start effect of the fourth RT state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 122(b1) to 122(b3), the background color is set to be different in the start rendering of the fourth RT state on the auxiliary display section 65, and the background color is set to be different in FIG. In the 4th RT effect A, the start effect is performed with a red background color, in the 4th RT effect B of FIG. 122(b2), the start effect is performed with a green background color, and in the 4th RT effect C of FIG. It is set so that the start effect is performed with a blue background color, and the player can identify each. 4th RT effect A, 4th RT effect B, and 4th RT effect C are in order of high possibility of winning AT mode transition during the 4th RT state, and 4th RT effect A has the highest AT mode transition winning. It is set as a production to show.

In the fourth RT transition process, first, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the cherry counter CC and the watermelon counter SC are the same number. If it is determined that the numbers are not the same, the process advances to step S5102. In step S5102, it is determined whether or not the cherry counter CC is greater than the watermelon counter SC. If the cherry counter CC is larger, the process advances to step S5103. In step S5103, it is determined whether or not the 11th re-game winning has been established. The case where the eleventh re-game winning has been established in step S5103 is the case where the cherry counter CC is larger than the watermelon counter SC and the transition to the fourth RT state A, which is the cherry RT, has occurred.

FIG. 122(a) shows an example of the AT counters C stored in the storage areas RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106f when the cherry counter CC is larger than the watermelon counter SC. Specifically, the AT stored in six areas of the first storage area RE1, the second storage area RE2, the fourth storage area RE4, the sixth storage area RE6, the seventh storage area RE7, and the ninth storage area RE9. The counter C is a value corresponding to cherry replay, and the AT counter C stored in the four areas of the third storage area RE3, fifth storage area RE5, eighth storage area RE8, and tenth storage area RE10 is used for water replay. is the value corresponding to In this case, if a cherry replay is won in any of the 1st game, the 2nd game, the 4th game, the 6th game, the 7th game, or the 9th game in the 4th RT state as a fixed RT state of 10 games. If the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, and if the watermelon play is won in any of the third game, the fifth game, the eighth game, and the tenth game, the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won. As described above, Cherry RT has a high probability of winning the Cherry Replay, and Watermelon RT has a high probability of winning the Watermelon Play. That is, in this example, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is higher in the case of shifting to the fourth RT state A, which is the cherry RT, than in the case of shifting to the fourth RT state B, which is the watermelon RT.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S5103 that the transition to the fourth RT state A, which is cherry RT, has occurred in a situation where the cherry counter CC is greater than the watermelon counter SC, the fourth RT effect command A is displayed in step S5104. After executing the process of setting the data to be output to the control device 81, the process for transition to the fourth RT ends. The fourth RT effect command A is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that there is a high possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the current fourth RT state, and the start effect of the current fourth RT state is the fourth RT state. This is a command for executing as production A. As described above, the 4th RT effect A is a start effect indicating that there is a high possibility of winning the AT mode transition in the current 4th RT state.

The case where it is determined in step S5103 that the 11th re-game winning has not been established means that the 12th re-game winning has been established. In this case, a transition to the fourth RT state B, which is the watermelon RT, has occurred. When the cherry counter CC is greater than the watermelon counter SC as shown in FIG. 122(a), the AT mode transition less likely to win the lottery. Therefore, in this case, after executing the process of setting the fourth RT effect command C as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S5105, the fourth RT shift process ends. The fourth RT effect command C is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery is low in the current fourth RT state, and the start effect of the current fourth RT state is the fourth RT state. This is a command to be executed as production C. As described above, the 4th RT effect C is a start effect indicating that the possibility of winning the AT mode transition is low in the current 4th RT state.

The situation in which it is determined in step S5102 that the watermelon counter SC is greater than the cherry counter CC is the opposite situation to that in FIG. While the possibility of winning the AT mode transition is high, the possibility of winning the AT mode transition is low when the transition to the fourth RT state A, which is the cherry RT, occurs.

In this case, it is determined in step S5106 whether or not the 11th regame winning has been established. When the eleventh regame winning prize is established, that is, when the transition to the fourth RT state A, which is Cherry RT, occurs, the processing of setting the fourth RT effect command C as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S5105 is executed, the fourth RT transition processing is terminated. In this case, the start effect of the fourth RT state is performed as the fourth RT effect C indicating that the possibility of winning the AT mode transition is low.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5106 that the 12th re-game winning instead of the 11th re-game winning has been established, that is, if a transition to the fourth RT state B, which is the watermelon RT, occurs, the process proceeds to step S5104. After executing the process of setting the fourth RT effect command A as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this fourth RT transition process is terminated. In this case, the start effect of the fourth RT state A is performed as the fourth RT effect A indicating that there is a high possibility of winning the AT mode transition.

If it is determined in step S5101 that the number of the cherry counter CC and the watermelon counter SC are the same, the process advances to step S5107 to execute the process of setting the fourth RT effect command B as an object to be output to the display control device 81. This fourth RT transition processing is ended. The fourth RT effect command B is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the current fourth RT state is intermediate, and is the start effect of the current fourth RT state. is executed as the fourth RT effect B. As described above, the 4th RT effect B is a start effect indicating that the possibility of winning the AT mode transition win in the current 4th RT state is intermediate.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game state transition is possible, the AT mode transition lottery is performed during the game state in which the transition is possible. It specifies, and it was set as the structure which performs the notification corresponding to the content of the transfer lottery as a special notification. By doing so, it is possible to shift the game state after grasping the degree of expectation for winning the AT mode shift during the game state before the shift.

In particular, when the transition replay 1 is won, whether to cause the transition to the fourth RT state A or to cause the transition to the fourth RT state B is specified by the pre-acquired AT counter C, and the content thereof is performed as a special notification, the player can select which fourth RT state to shift to according to the special notification. Therefore, it is possible to realize a new game feature such that the player selects the game state to be shifted in relation to the AT counter C acquired in advance.

In this case, when the transition replay 2 is won, the configuration is such that the special notification C is executed without specifying from the AT counter C which transition to the fourth RT state should occur, so the game state to be transitioned is the game state. The number of scenes for players to make selections increases, and it is possible to improve the playability.

In this embodiment, unlike the first to third embodiments, the AT counters stored in the lottery information storage area 106f are not displayed individually corresponding to each AT counter C (special image as a pending display). The AT mode transition lottery for C is collectively notified. By doing so, it is possible to equalize expectations for the AT mode transition lottery in the games corresponding to the respective AT counters C, and to evenly increase the degree of attention of each game.

When transition replay 1 or transition replay 2 is won, a special notification is made, and when the transition to the 4th RT state actually occurs, the degree of expectation of winning the AT mode transition in the 4th RT state to which the transition is made is displayed in the 4th RT state. It was configured to be notified as In this case, the cherry counter CC and the watermelon counter SC are used to predict the expected value of winning the AT mode transition, and the fourth RT state presentation is performed based on the prediction. In the fourth RT state A, cherry replay is the most likely to trigger the AT mode transition winning, and in the fourth RT state B, the water replay is the most likely to trigger the AT mode transition winning. The cherry counter CC and the watermelon counter SC assume that the AT mode transition lottery has been performed using the game result that is most likely to be a winning opportunity in the case of shifting to the fourth RT state, and that the AT mode transition lottery is won. It represents the number of Then, in the fourth RT state presentation, the cherry counter CC and the watermelon counter SC are used to notify the expected value of winning the AT mode transition. By doing so, it is possible to accurately predict the degree of expectation for winning the AT mode transition lottery in the transition to the fourth RT state in relation to the AT counter C acquired in advance.

That is, in the configuration in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT counter C obtained in advance and the lottery result of the game when the AT mode transition lottery is implemented, the element of the game lottery result that occurs after the fact. is included, it is difficult to predict success or failure 100% when the AT mode transition lottery is held only with the AT counter C acquired in advance. Therefore, in the above-described fourth embodiment, it is assumed that the lottery result that is likely to be won in each game in the gaming state to be shifted is specified, and the AT mode transition lottery is performed with the lottery result that is likely to be won. It was configured to predict the result of the transfer lottery. By doing so, it is possible to improve the prediction accuracy to some extent even in predictions that include elements that occur after the fact, and it is possible to improve the reliability of the notification (special notification) based on the prediction.

In this case, as the lottery result of the game in the fourth RT state A or the fourth RT state B, the AT win probability is higher for strong cherry or middle bell than for cherry replay or watermelon play. However, considering the winning probability of each game, cherry replay and watermelon play are more likely to trigger AT mode transition winning than strong cherry and middle bell. Therefore, by using such a cherry replay or watermelon play to predict the AT mode transition lottery, the prediction can easily match the results that can actually occur.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, the value of the AT counter C stored in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106f is used to perform a predetermined arithmetic process, and a special notification is given based on the result of the arithmetic operation. Run.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing special notification processing in this modified example.

In step S5201, it is determined whether or not the transition replay that has been won this time is the transition replay 1 or not. In the case of transition replay 1, the process proceeds to step S5202, and the value of the AT counter C stored in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106f is added. That is, a process of calculating the total value of each AT counter C is executed as a predetermined arithmetic process using the values of the AT counters C stored in the storage areas RE1 to RE10.

In subsequent step S5203, it is determined whether or not the calculation result of step S5202 is smaller than 650. 650 is a value corresponding to 10 games of "65" which is the boundary value between the value for winning AT mode transition in cherry replay and the value for AT mode transition winning in water replay. That is, the total value of the AT counter C can become smaller than 650 as the AT counter C with the value for winning the AT mode transition win in the cherry replay increases. Therefore, if it is determined in step S5203 that the number is smaller than 650, processing for setting the special notification A command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S5204. As already explained, the special notification A command is a command for notifying the operation mode corresponding to the 11th regame winning, which will shift to the fourth RT state A, which is the cherry RT.

When it is determined that the value is 650 or more in step S5203, it is assumed that the AT counter C with the value for winning the AT mode transition win in the watermelon play is large. A process of setting the command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. As already explained, the special notification B command is a command for notifying the operation mode corresponding to the 12th re-game winning that will shift to the 4th RT state B, which is the watermelon RT.

If it is determined to be transition replay 2 in step S5201, the process advances to step S5206 to execute processing for setting the special notification C command as an output target to the display control device 81. FIG. As already explained, the special notification C command is a command for informing the player to select to which of the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B the transition should be made.

After the processing in steps S5204, S5205 and S5206 is executed, in step S5207 the pressing order notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the special notification processing ends.

The fourth RT transition processing in this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 124 .

In step S5301, the value of the AT counter C stored in each storage area RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106f is integrated. The processing of step S5301 is the same as the processing of step S5202.

In subsequent step S5302, it is determined whether or not the processing result of step S5301 is greater than 500 and less than 800. If a negative determination is made in step S5302, it is determined in step S5303 whether or not the processing result of step S5301 is 500 or less. The case where it is 500 or less means that there is a high possibility that most of the AT counters C stored in the storage areas RE1 to RE10 are on the small side. In this case, in step S5304, it is determined whether or not the eleventh re-game winning is established and a transition to cherry RT occurs. When the transition to cherry RT occurs, in step S5305, the fourth RT effect command A is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in order to perform the fourth RT effect A as the start effect of the current fourth RT state. is executed, the fourth RT transition processing is terminated.

In step S5304, if the 12th re-game win is established instead of the 11th re-game win, and a shift to watermelon RT occurs, then in step S5306, the 4th RT effect C is performed as the start effect of the current 4th RT state. Therefore, after executing the process of setting the fourth RT effect command C as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the process for shifting to the fourth RT ends.

If it is determined in step S5303 that the total value of the AT counter C is not 500 or less, it means that the total value of the AT counter C is 800 or more. In this case, most of the AT counters C stored in the storage areas RE1 to RE10 are likely to be large values. Therefore, if a negative determination is made in step S5303, it is determined whether or not the 11th re-game winning is established in step S5307, and if the 11th re-game winning is established, in step S5306, the 4th RT After executing the process of setting the effect command C as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the fourth RT transition process is terminated. If the 12th re-game winning has been established, in step S5305, after executing the process of setting the 4th RT effect command A as an output target to the display control device 81, this 4th RT transition process is terminated. .

In step S5302, when it is determined that the total value of the AT counter C is greater than 500 and less than 800, in step S5308, the fourth RT effect command B is set as an output target to the display control device 81. After execution, this fourth RT transition processing is terminated.

As described above, the smaller the value of the AT counter C, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition when winning the cherry replay, and the larger the value of the AT counter C, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition when the watermelon play is won. The degree of expectation for winning the AT mode transition is predicted by the integrated value of the AT counter C which is set. That is, the smaller the integrated value of the AT counter C, the higher the possibility that many AT counters C corresponding to cherry replay have been acquired, and the larger the integrated value of the AT counter C, the more AT counters C corresponding to cherry replay have been acquired. It is highly likely that Therefore, by using such a tendency to predict the degree of expectation for transition winning, the AT mode transition lottery, which is difficult to predict 100% in advance, is used as an advantage to make a somewhat rough prediction announcement. For the plurality of AT counters C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f, it is possible to collectively predict the degree of expectation for winning the AT mode transition when each of the plurality of AT counters C is attached to the AT mode transition lottery. becomes.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the integrated value of the AT counter C stored in each storage area RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106f is calculated before the transition to the fourth RT state becomes possible, and notification is made based on the calculation result. is performed before a transition replay win that may cause a transition to the fourth RT state.

FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing in this modified example.

In step S5401, AT counter C acquisition processing is executed, and in step S5402, AT counter C storage processing is executed. In the subsequent step S5403, the value of the AT counter C stored in each storage area RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106f is integrated. The processing of step S5403 is the same as the processing of steps S5202 and S5301.

After executing the process of step S5403, in step S5404, the process of setting the integrated value command including the information of the process result of step S5403 as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. End the acquisition process.

FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing integrated value information processing in this modification. The integrated value information processing is started in the display control device 81, for example, in other processing (step S2917) of the effect setting processing at all stop.

In step S5501, it is determined whether or not the above integrated value command has been received. If the integrated value command has not been received, the integrated value information processing is terminated. If the integrated value command has been received, the process advances to step S5502. In step S5502, it is determined whether or not the integrated value included in the integrated value command is greater than 500 and less than 800. If a negative determination is made in step S5502, it is determined whether or not the integrated value is 500 or less in step S5503. If it is 500 or less, as described above, there is a high possibility that many of the AT counter C values are on the small side. After executing the processing performed in step 1, the integrated value information processing ends.

The state A effect is a effect suggesting that, in a comparison between cherry and watermelon (cherry replay and watermelon play), winning cherry is more likely to result in AT mode transition winning. For example, as shown in FIG. 127(b), a display effect is performed to show that the weights of a cherry character and a watermelon character are being compared on a scale, and the cherry character is heavier in the weight comparison. It is recommended to perform an effect indicating (tilting to the cherry side).

If it is determined not to be 500 or less in step S5503, it means that the integrated value of the AT counter C is 800 or more. In this case, as described above, there is a high possibility that most of the AT counter C values are on the large side. Therefore, in step S5505, after executing the process of performing the state C effect on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like, this integrated value information process is terminated.

The state C effect is a effect suggesting that, in comparison with cherry and watermelon (cherry replay and watermelon play), winning watermelon is more likely to result in AT mode transition winning. For example, as shown in FIG. 127(c), a display effect is performed to show that a cherry character and a watermelon character are weighed against each other on a scale, and the watermelon character is heavier than the other character in the weight comparison. It is preferable to perform an effect indicating (tilting to the watermelon side).

In step S5502, if it is determined that the integrated value of the AT counter C is greater than 500 and less than 800, then in step S5506, the process of performing the state B effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is executed. End the integrated value information processing.

State B production is a state in which there is no difference or a small difference in the ease of winning the AT mode transition between when cherry is won and when watermelon is won in comparison between cherry and watermelon (cherry replay and watermelon play). It is a production that suggests that For example, as shown in FIG. 127(a), a display effect is performed to show that the weights of a cherry character and a watermelon character are being compared on a scale, and the cherry character and the watermelon character are compared in the weight comparison. It is good to perform a production that shows that the weight of and is balanced.

By doing so, it is possible to inform in advance which transition to the fourth RT state should occur before transition replay 1 or transition replay 2 is won. Therefore, it is possible to arouse expectations for winning the lottery result (11th replay or 12th replay) that triggers the transition to the 4th RT state to be shifted.

In this case, in the fourth embodiment, both the 11th replay winning and the 12th replay winning can be established when the transition replay 1 is won, and the 11th replay winning when the transition replay 2 is won. , and the 12th re-game winning have been explained on the premise that both can be established. In this case, separate lottery results may be provided to trigger the transition to the fourth RT state. Specifically, for example, when transition replay 1 is won, the 11th replay win is established and a transition to the fourth RT state A occurs, and when transition replay 2 is won, the 12th regame win is established and the fourth RT state A transition to B may occur, and so on.

Further, as described in the first embodiment and the like, it is easy to win a strong cherry or the like in the first BB state, and it becomes easy to win a strong watermelon or the like in the second BB state. By using such a configuration, it is also possible to use the above-described state presentation to encourage players to decide which BB should be won.

<Modification 3>
In the fourth embodiment, the value of the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition win in the 4th RT state A and 4th RT state B is set as a common value for each specific hand including cherry replay and watermelon play. However, in this modified example, the value of the AT counter C for winning the AT mode transition differs between the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B. FIG. FIG. 128 shows an AT mode transition lottery table in this modified example.

In this modified example, with respect to cherry replay and watermelon replay, in states other than the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B, the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition is not associated. In the fourth RT state A, "1" to "128" are associated with the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition at the time of cherry replay, and even if any AT counter C value is acquired If cherry replay is won in the fourth RT state A, AT mode transition is won. Further, in the fourth RT state A, "116" to "128" are associated with the AT counter C for which the AT mode transition is won during the watermelon play. If the replay is won, the AT mode transition is won.

In the fourth RT state B, "1" to "13" are associated with the AT counter C for which the AT mode transition is won during the cherry replay, and the cherry replay is won in the situation where the values of these AT counters C are acquired. If so, the AT mode transition is won. In addition, in the fourth RT state B, the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition during watermelon play is associated with "1" to "128", and any AT counter C value is acquired. Even if the watermelon play wins in the fourth RT state B, the AT mode shift wins.

In other words, in the fourth RT state A, if you win the cherry replay, you will win the AT mode transition with a probability of 100%, but if you win the water replay, you will win the AT mode transition with a probability of about 10%. The lottery table for shifting to AT mode is set so that winning the cherry replay is more advantageous to the player than winning the watermelon play.

On the other hand, in the fourth RT state B, if the watermelon play is won, the AT mode transition is won with a probability of 100%. In B, the AT mode shift lottery table is set so that the player wins the watermelon play more favorably than the cherry replay win.

As described above, in this modified example, even if the same lottery result is used, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery differs depending on the transition RT state. By using such a configuration, the probability of winning the lottery for AT mode transition differs depending on the game state, and the degree of freedom in setting the state, the lottery result of each game, and the probability of winning the lottery for AT mode transition is greatly improved. do.

FIG. 129 shows the difference in the probability of winning a specific combination for each game state in this modification.

In this modification, the winning probability of cherry replay and the winning probability of watermelon play are common between the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B. That is, regardless of the fourth RT state, the chances of the AT mode transition lottery being performed in cherry replay are about the same, and the chances of the AT mode transition lottery being performed in watermelon play are also about the same. By doing so, for example, when it is difficult to determine which 4th RT state has been transitioned to or which 4th RT state is staying, the appearance rate of cherry replay or watermelon play It is possible to reduce the possibility that the type of 4RT state is determined.

In addition, since the probability of winning AT mode transition during cherry replay and watermelon play is different between 4th RT state A and 4th RT state B, it is possible to win AT mode transition when cherry replay or watermelon play is won. can be expected while predicting the game state, and the amusement of the game is doubled.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, it is determined in advance whether or not the AT mode transition lottery random number acquired in advance is a random number that is likely to win the AT mode transition lottery if it is targeted for the AT mode transition lottery. FIG. 130 shows an AT mode transition lottery table in this modified example.

In this modification, the value of the AT counter C, which is associated with each specific combination so as to win the AT mode transition, is set so as to include a value within a predetermined range of the update range of the AT counter C. ing. More specifically, the normal replay is associated with "3" of the AT counter C, the push order replay is associated with "5" of the AT counter C, and the push order bell is associated with "7" of the AT counter C. are mapped. Also, high cherries are associated with AT counter C "1" to "64", low cherries are associated with AT counter C "1" to "18", and strong watermelons are associated with AT counter C of "1" to "18". "1" to "34" are associated, and "1" to "13" of the AT counter C are associated with the weak watermelon. Chance A and chance B are associated with AT counter C "1" to "41", and AT counter C "1" to "99" are associated with the middle bell.

Then, when a value of "1" to "13" is acquired as the AT counter C, any of strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, and middle bell is the trigger. Even when the AT mode shift lottery is performed, the AT mode shift wins. Then, when "3" out of "1" to "13" is acquired as the AT counter C, the AT mode transition wins even with the normal replay as a trigger, and "1" to "13" is won. If "5" has been acquired, the AT mode transition will be won even with the push order replay as a trigger, and if "7" out of "1" to "13" has been acquired, the push order bell This is also an opportunity to win the AT mode transition.

In other words, if the AT mode transition lottery is performed using "1" to "13" as the AT counter C, the AT mode transition lottery will not be won even if the transition lottery is performed with any of the special roles that can be won normally. easy to become. In the present embodiment, as described above, a situation in which the value of the AT counter C is likely to be won for the AT mode transition is taken as a specific situation, and a specific notification is made in such a specific situation.

FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing random number acquisition processing in this embodiment.

In step S5601, a process of acquiring AT counter C is executed, and in step S5602, a process of storing AT counter C is executed. In the following step S5603, the AT counter C acquired in step S5601 is set to the specific area of "1" to "13" as a value that is likely to win the AT mode transition lottery if the AT mode transition lottery is targeted. Determines whether the value is included. If the value is included in the specific area, the specific area command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S5604, and then this random number acquisition process ends. The specified area command is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the AT counter C of the value included in the specified area has been obtained in advance.

FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing the CZ mode processing in this embodiment. The CZ mode process is, for example, a process that is activated in the display control device 81 in other processes of the all-stop effect setting process.

In step S5701, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in an advantageous section. If it is not in the advantageous section, the process advances to step S5702 to determine whether or not the specific area command has been received. Since the specific area command is output in the random number acquisition process at the time of the third stop OFF operation, the case where the specific area command is received does not mean that the specific area at the time of the third stop OFF operation. It means that the included AT counter C has been acquired, and the case where the specific area command has not been received means that the AT counter C that is not included in the specific area has been acquired at the time of the third stop OFF operation this time. means. When the AT counter C included in the specific area is obtained, a process of adding 1 to the specific counter TC provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed in step S5703.

If it is determined in step S5702 that the specific area command has not been received, or if the addition processing of the specific counter TC is executed in step S5703, the process advances to step S5704. In step S5704, the value of the AT counter C used in the game to end this time is grasped, and it is determined whether or not the value of the AT counter C is included in the specific area. If the AT counter C has a value included in the specific area, a process of subtracting 1 from the specific counter TC is executed in step S5705.

If it is determined in step S5704 that the AT counter C does not have a value included in the specific area, or if the specific counter TC is decremented in step S5705, the process proceeds to step S5706. In step S5706, it is determined whether or not the specific counter TC is 5 or more as a predetermined value. The case where the specific counter TC is 5 or more means that in a configuration capable of storing 10 AT counters C, half or more of the AT counters C have values included in the specific area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 133(a), among the storage areas RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106f, for example, the second storage area RE2, the fifth storage area RE5, and the sixth storage area RE6 And in the situation where the AT counter C with the value included in the specific region is stored in the ninth storage area RE9, the AT counter C with the value included in the specific region is stored in the tenth storage area RE10 in this acquisition process. As a result, the specific counter TC becomes 5. In this case, in the next game, the value of the AT counter C stored in at least the first memory area RE1, the fourth memory area RE4, the fifth memory area RE5, the eighth memory area RE8 and the ninth memory area RE9 is Since it is included in the specific area, the specific counter TC is 5 or more in the next game as well. In the next game, the values of the AT counter C stored in the third memory area RE3, the fourth memory area RE4, the seventh memory area RE7 and the eighth memory area RE8 are included in the specific area and supplemented. If the value of the AT counter C stored in the ninth storage area RE9 or the tenth storage area RE10 is not included in the specific area, the specific counter TC is less than 5.

If the specific counter TC is 5 or more in step S5706, it is determined in step S5707 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The CZ mode flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to ascertain that the situation should be an effect in the CZ mode as a chance zone in which it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery.

If the CZ mode flag has not been set, processing for setting the CZ mode flag is executed in step S5708. Then, in step S5709, processing for executing the CZ mode effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is performed. As the CZ mode effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 133(b), it is preferable to display "AT winning probability is increasing!"

In the subsequent step S5710, a process of inputting 10 to the CZ counter ZC provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The CZ counter ZC is a counter for defining the minimum number of continuous games in the CZ mode as a chance zone. More specifically, in this embodiment, the CZ mode is started when the specific counter TC becomes 5 or more, and after the specific counter TC becomes less than 5, the situation where the specific counter TC is less than 5 continues for 10 games. It is configured to end by doing.

After executing the process of step S5710, this CZ mode process ends. If the CZ mode flag is set in step S5707, the CZ mode processing is terminated. In this case, the above CZ mode effect is continued.

If it is determined in step S5706 that the specific counter TC is less than 5, the process advances to step S5711. In step S5711, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If it is set, it means that the specific counter TC has become less than 5 during the CZ mode. In this case, a process of subtracting 1 from the CZ counter ZC is executed in step S5712. After that, in step S5713, it is determined whether or not the CZ counter ZC is 0, and if it is 0, in step S5714, a process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed. Then, in step S5715, after performing processing for ending the CZ mode effect, this CZ mode processing ends. If the CZ mode flag is not set in step S5711, or if the CZ counter ZC is not yet 0 even in the CZ mode in step S5713, the CZ mode processing ends.

If it is determined in step S5701 that it is in the advantageous section, the process for clearing the value of the specific counter TC to the initial value (0) is executed in step S5716, and then this CZ mode process ends. If the value of the specific counter TC is already the initial value, that state is maintained.

As described above, since the CZ mode effect is performed by the AT counter C acquired in advance, the game shifts to the chance zone where it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery based on the lottery result of each game as in the conventional case. A completely different playability is realized.

That is, as already explained, the AT counter C is obtained in the random number obtaining process regardless of the lottery result of each game. Further, the lottery result in the game in which the CZ mode processing is performed is not taken into consideration when performing the CZ mode effect. That is, the setting of the CZ mode effect is performed using only the AT counter C. Therefore, for example, even in the case of a lottery result (for example, normal replay) of a game that cannot be expected to win AT mode transition, CZ mode production may occur, and conversely, a game that can be expected to win AT mode transition. Even if the result of the lottery (for example, strong cherry), the CZ mode effect may not occur, and it is a CZ mode effect that is completely different from the conventional chance zone, and it is possible to maintain the expectation in each game. As a result, the unexpectedness is enhanced when the CZ mode effect is performed.

When setting the CZ mode performance, a specific range is set as the range of the value of the AT counter C that tends to win the AT mode transition, and the CZ mode performance is set based on the number of AT counters included in the specific range. By doing so, it becomes possible to carry out the CZ mode effect as a result of predicting the degree of expectation for winning the AT mode transition with a certain degree of accuracy, and the effectiveness of the CZ mode effect can be enhanced.

Since the number of games equal to or greater than the number of AT counters C that can be stored in the lottery information storage area 106f, the CZ mode effect is performed so as to be able to continue. It becomes difficult to understand whether it is easy to win the lottery, and it is possible to make the player feel anticipation for the AT mode transition lottery using any AT counter C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f.

It is possible to perform the CZ mode effect before the transition to the advantageous section. By doing so, it is possible to expect the AT mode transition even before the transition to the advantageous section. Although the CZ mode effect is performed based on the AT counter C, the AT mode transition lottery itself is performed after the transition to the advantageous section. In other words, even if the CZ mode effect is performed, the AT mode transition lottery may not be performed. In other words, the CZ mode effect in this embodiment occurs regardless of whether the AT mode transition lottery is actually performed. By doing so, it is possible to generate the CZ mode performance from a completely different point of view from the configuration in which the transition to the chance mode is not performed unless the transition is made to the advantageous section as in the conventional game machine, and the generation of the CZ mode performance. By increasing the rate, it is possible to improve the game performance during normal times.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of embodiments and modifications, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) In a configuration in which a lottery random number is acquired in advance and a lottery is performed using the random number and the lottery result of each game, the AT counter C used for the AT mode transition lottery as the lottery random number is an example. However, each of the above inventions may be applied to random numbers used in other lotteries. For example, it may be applied to a configuration in which a lottery counter used in the advantageous section transition lottery is acquired in advance, or in a configuration in which a lottery counter used in the VB mode transition lottery is acquired in advance, It may be applied to a configuration in which a lottery counter used for a special zone transition lottery is acquired in advance, or a configuration in which a lottery counter used in an additional lottery or an additional game number lottery is acquired in advance. However, it may be applied to a configuration in which a lottery counter used for a lottery for a predetermined effect (for example, a set value suggesting effect, a winning content confirmation effect, etc.) is acquired in advance.

That is, the specific event for determining whether or not it will occur based on the specific information (random number) acquired in advance is not limited to the transition to AT mode, but may be the transition to the advantageous section, or the VB mode. It may be a transition to a zone, a transition to a specialized zone, an addition to the number of games, or an addition to a predetermined number of games (a large number of games to be added is small). Alternatively, a predetermined effect may be generated.

(2) As the game state transition, the state in which the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is high (1BB state, 2nd BB state, 4th RT state) has been described as an example, but the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is low. may be applied to the state. The probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery may be defined by the probability of winning the specific role that triggers the AT mode transition lottery, or the AT counter C or the like associated with the specific role. may be defined by the number of values of , or may be both.

(3) The AT mode transition lottery is configured to be performed based on the AT counter C, etc., the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed, and the gaming state in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed. parameter may be used as long as at least the random number (AT counter C) obtained in advance and the lottery result of the game are used. Other parameters may include, for example, the number of games played, the number of times a predetermined game result (for example, a bell) has been won or won, the lottery results of previous games (game history), and the like.

(4) The AT counter C or the like is acquired at the third stop OFF operation among the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 as a random number for the lottery used for the AT mode transition lottery, but it is acquired at another timing. may be configured. For example, it may be during the first stop OFF operation, the second stop OFF operation, or the first to third stop ON operations. Further, it may be configured to be acquired based on the operation of the start lever 41, or may be configured to be acquired based on the operation of the credit input switches 56-58. These operations may be valid operations that cause the game to progress based on the operations, or may be acquired based on invalid operations during a period during which the operations are invalid. Furthermore, it is not limited to the configuration in which it is acquired immediately based on the operation, for example, it may be configured to be acquired after a predetermined period of time based on the operation, or when the middle stop switch 43 is operated after the left stop switch 42 is operated. may be obtained by a combination of a plurality of operations, such as not obtaining when the right stop switch 44 is operated after the left stop switch 42 is operated.

(5) As a random number for the lottery used for the AT mode transition lottery, one AT counter C or the like is obtained based on one third stop OFF operation, but the operation and the number of obtained numbers are in a one-to-one relationship. may not be, and may be one-to-many, many-to-one, or many-to-many relationships. More specifically, it may be configured to acquire a plurality of AT counters C or the like based on one operation, or to acquire one AT counter C or the like based on a plurality of operations. A plurality of AT counters C and the like may be acquired based on the operation of . In the one-to-many relationship, for example, two AT counters C or the like are obtained at the time of the third stop OFF operation of a predetermined game, and the AT counter C or the like is obtained at the time of the third stop OFF operation of the next game after the predetermined game. The number of AT counters C, etc. is determined by the relationship between the consumption frequency and the acquisition frequency of the AT counters C, etc. It is preferable to adjust the acquisition timing so that is always a constant number. Further, in the multiple-to-one relationship, for example, one AT counter C or the like is acquired based on a plurality of operations such as the second stop OFF operation and the third stop OFF operation, and the number of AT counters C and the like is increased. It is good to adjust so that it always becomes a fixed number.

(6) The AT mode transition lottery is configured to be performed based on the operation of the start lever 41, but at least if the lottery result of the current game can be grasped and the AT counter C etc. are obtained in advance, Well, for example, an AT mode transition lottery may be performed based on the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 (first to third stop ON operations, first to third stop OFF operations). Incidentally, in the configuration in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed at the time of the third stop OFF operation, both the acquisition of the AT counter C and the AT mode transition lottery are performed based on the third stop OFF operation. The acquired AT counter C and the like are the AT counter C and the like to be used in subsequent games, and the AT counter C and the like used for the AT mode transition lottery are the AT counters C and the like used in the game before the third stop OFF operation. acquired at the time of the third stop OFF operation.

(7) The random number acquisition process may be performed before the lottery process (FIG. 16). For example, the random number acquisition process may be activated between step S210 and step S211 (lottery process) in the normal process (FIG. 15). By doing so, it becomes clearer that the AT counter C and the like are obtained independently without being affected by the lottery result of the game.

(8) When acquiring the AT counter C, etc. in the random number acquisition process, the acquisition of the AT counter C, etc. is performed independently of the game lottery result, etc., without being affected by the game lottery result, etc. at the time of acquisition. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the AT counter C or the like acquired based on the game lottery result or the like can be different. For example, when the lottery result of the game is the first result such as strong cherry, the AT counter C having a value of 1 out of "1" to "64" as the first numerical range is acquired, and the game is executed. If the lottery result is a second result such as strong watermelon, the AT counter C with a value of 1 in the second numerical range of "65" to "128" is acquired. A configuration may be adopted in which the numerical value acquired by the lottery result in .

(9) As the winning modes of the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, a winning mode in which a prize may be missed depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 is set, but a winning mode is established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. may be set. In this case, for example, the 1st BB may be set to a winning mode in which there is no chance of winning, and the 2nd BB may be set to a winning mode in which no winning may occur.

(10) For the 11th re-game and 12th re-game in which winning to the 4th RT state A and 4th RT state B occurs, winning is established as long as the operation order matches regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. However, it is also possible to set a winning mode in which an operation timing may cause a failure. In this case, for example, if the 11th re-game winning is not established, the first re-game winning is established.

(11) As for the 11th re-game and 12th re-game in which winning to the 4th RT state A and 4th RT state B occurs, the win flag may be carried over to the winning as in the 1st BB and 2nd BB.

(12) As a termination condition for the first BB state or the second BB state, the payout of the upper limit number of medals has occurred, but other termination conditions may be defined. For example, a configuration that ends when a predetermined number of games are played, a configuration that ends when a predetermined number of (predetermined results) wins are established, or a combination of the number of medals paid out and the number of medals used. A configuration that ends when the medal increase number (decrease number), which is the difference, reaches a predetermined number, or when a predetermined end result (so-called punk role) is won, or when a predetermined end result wins a prize It is good also as a structure which ends. In these cases, the first BB state and the second BB state may have different ending conditions. It is preferable that there are cases where the game ends with a long number of games and cases where the number of games ends with a shorter number of games than the number (10).

(13) As lottery results for winning in the normal game, normal replay, push order replay, push order bell, etc. are provided, and these lottery results are not won in the game at BB, but they are also won at BB. You may make it In this case, the winning probability at BB is set to be lower than the winning probability at normal time, or the lottery at BB is set at BB than the AT counter C, etc., which wins AT mode transition in these lottery results at normal time. By setting a smaller number of AT counters C, etc., for winning the AT mode transition as a result, it becomes more difficult to win the AT mode transition with these lottery results at BB than in normal times. In addition, as the lottery results to be won in the BB game, the 1st role in the BB, the 2nd role in the BB, and the 3rd role in the BB are provided, and these lottery results are not won in the normal game. , may be elected in normal times. In this case, the winning probability during normal times is set to be lower than the winning probability during BB, or the lottery during normal times is set to be lower than the AT counter C, etc. that wins AT mode transition in these lottery results during BB. By setting a small number of AT counters C and the like that win the AT mode transition as a result, it becomes more difficult to win the AT mode transition with these lottery results as a trigger in the normal time than in the BB.

(14) Regarding the status display, if the status display for another special image is already being performed, the configuration is such that the start of the status display for the current special image is restricted, but the status display that has already been performed is terminated. It may be configured to start displaying the status of the special image this time after the display of the current status, or to determine which one is to be given priority, the status display that has already been performed or the current status display (whether to start the current status display). or not) may be determined by lottery or the like, and which situation display is given priority may be changed according to the content of the target special image or situation display.

(15) In the configuration of holding display using a special image, when an AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the lottery result subject to the holding display (when AT mode transition is won), and when the holding display is performed The content of the effect may be changed in the case where the AT mode shift lottery is performed based on the lottery result different from the target lottery result (when the AT mode shift wins). In addition, if the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the lottery result subject to the pending display (when the AT mode transition is won), and based on the lottery result in the situation where the pending display is not performed The content of the effect may be different depending on whether the AT mode shift lottery is performed (when the AT mode shift is won). For example, in a game targeted for the first special image P1 corresponding to cherry, when the AT mode shift lottery is performed with strong cherry or weak cherry, and in the game targeted for the first special image P1, the strong The game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the effect for notifying the result of the transition lottery may be different between when the AT mode transition lottery is performed with Suica.

(16) In a configuration in which a normal AT counter CA and a BB AT counter CB can be acquired, the normal AT counter CA is used to perform an AT mode transition lottery in normal times, and the BB AT counter CB is consumed. However, at the time of BB, the AT counter CB for BB is used to perform the AT mode transition lottery, and only the normal AT counter CA is consumed, so that the AT counters CA and CB are consumed regardless of the state, At normal times, AT mode shift lottery is performed using an AT counter CA for normal use, AT counter CB for BB is not consumed (held), and AT counter CB for BB is used at BB time to draw AT mode shift lottery. and the normal AT counter CA is not consumed (held). may be That is, for example, after performing an AT mode transition lottery using the normal AT counter CA in normal times, a predetermined operation unit (for example, the credit insertion switch 56) determines whether or not to consume the BB AT counter CB. 58) may be selected by the player based on the operation.

(17) The update ranges of the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB may be different. Specifically, for example, while the normal AT counter CA is updated in the range of "1" to "128", the BB AT counter CB may be updated in the range of "1" to "64". Alternatively, the update range may be set according to the probability of winning the AT mode transition. More specifically, the update range defines the minimum probability of winning the AT mode transition (in the update range of 1 to 128, the minimum probability is 1/128). If you want to lower it, it is better to widen the update range, but on the other hand, the wider the update range, the more the random number value that will win the AT mode transition win at the same winning probability. can occur. Therefore, if the update ranges of the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB are allowed to differ as described above, it becomes possible to customize each counter for the game state in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed. .

(18) If the lottery result of the game is, for example, a strong watermelon as a predetermined result, and the value of the normal AT counter CA is a predetermined value (65), the AT mode transition lottery is won, but the normal AT counter CA is won. At the value (65) of the BB AT counter CB corresponding to the predetermined value of (65), the AT mode transition lottery is not won. In a configuration in which the update ranges are different from each other, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which whether or not the AT mode transition is won is different when the AT mode transition lottery is performed with a value converted with the update range being the same. More specifically, for example, in a configuration in which the update range of the normal AT counter CA is "1" to "128" and the update range of the BB AT counter CB is "1" to "256", the normal AT counter If the target is a strong watermelon that wins AT mode transition at "65" of CA, the AT counter CB for BB corresponding to "130" and "131" of the AT counter CB for BB is set to AT mode at the time of strong watermelon It is better not to win a transition winning, and if the update range of the AT counter CB for BB is "1" to "64", "32" or "33" is used as the AT counter CB for BB corresponding to AT mode at strong watermelon It is better not to win the transfer election.

(19) A configuration may be adopted in which the maximum number of memory that can be stored in the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB are different. Specifically, the normal AT counter CA can store more numbers than the BB AT counter CB, and the BB AT counter CB can store more numbers than the normal AT counter CA. It may be configured to be In these cases, although the upper limit number of storage is different, the number of actually stored may be the same.

(20) Although the configuration is such that the hold display corresponding to the normal AT counter CA and the BB AT counter CB are respectively performed, in the normal state, only the hold display corresponding to the normal AT counter CA is displayed, and in the case of BB, the display is for BB. Alternatively, only the pending display corresponding to the AT counter CB may be displayed during normal operation, and only the pending display corresponding to the normal AT counter CA may be displayed during BB. It is good also as a structure to carry out. Furthermore, it may be difficult or impossible to identify whether the displayed pending display corresponds to the normal AT counter CA or the BB AT counter CB. good.

(21) The AT counter CA for normal use and the AT counter CB for BB have different values for winning the AT mode transition during normal time and BB time, but a common AT counter C is used for normal time and BB time. , the above configuration may be applied. That is, for example, in an AT mode transition lottery based on a predetermined specific combination, the value of the AT counter C that determines the AT mode transition win in normal and BB may be different.

(22) A configuration that shifts to the normal game state after the end of either the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, and a transition to the normal game state after the 1st BB state ends, while shifting to the 4th RT state after the 2nd BB state ends However, the configuration may be such that the transition to the fourth RT state occurs after either the first BB state or the second BB state, or the transition to the fourth RT state occurs after the first BB state ends. After the end of the second BB state, it may be configured to shift to the normal game state, or may be configured to shift to another game state (for example, the first RT state to the third RT state).

(23) The initial random number acquisition process is executed when the winning probability setting process is started in the main process at power-on, but the power is turned on regardless of whether the winning probability setting process is started. Alternatively, the initial random number acquisition process may be executed when the power is turned on regardless of whether the RAM 106 initialization process is executed or not. In this case, when the AT counter C or the like is stored in the lottery information storage area 106f in the initial random number acquisition process, the AT counter C or the like is cleared, and then the AT counter C or the like is newly acquired. may be configured to hold the stored AT counter C, etc., and may be configured not to perform acquisition processing of a new AT counter C, etc., or acquisition processing of a new AT counter C, etc. (stored A configuration may be adopted in which whether or not to execute the AT counter C clearing process) is determined by lottery or the like.

Further, for example, when the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section is configured to clear the acquired AT counter C, etc., the initial random number acquisition process is triggered by the end of the advantageous section, for example, in the normal section It may be configured to be performed at the start.

(24) In the initial random number acquisition process, a configuration has been described in which random numbers for other lotteries are acquired and converted to the AT counter C, etc. However, in the normal random number acquisition process, other random numbers for lotteries are acquired. may be converted into an AT counter C or the like.

(25) In converting other random numbers for lottery into the AT counter C, etc., a conversion table is stored in advance, and conversion is performed according to the conversion table. .

(26) Although it is configured to convert other random numbers for lottery into AT counters C, etc., a plurality of AT counters C, etc. having the same value are obtained, and then converted into a plurality of types of values. may be stored as an AT counter C or the like. In this case, it should be permissible for the AT counter C and the like to have the same value at the time of the conversion. In other words, the conversion process is not limited to the configuration for converting another random number for lottery into the AT counter C or the like, and the configuration for converting the AT counter C or the like itself into the AT counter C or the like (with a different value) is also included in the conversion process. .

(27) Although the random numbers for other lotteries are converted into the AT counter C or the like, a configuration may be adopted in which a random number dedicated to the lottery is acquired and converted into the AT counter C or the like. may be stored as an AT counter C or the like without conversion processing.

(28) Although other random numbers for lottery are converted into the AT counter C, etc., random numbers that do not require conversion may be selected, acquired, and stored as they are. The random number that does not require conversion preferably has at least the same update range as the AT counter C or the like.

(29) Although the random number for another lottery is converted into the AT counter C or the like, the random number for another lottery may be stored as the AT counter C or the like as it is. In this case, for example, for random numbers with different update ranges, if a random number (1 to 64) whose update range is narrower than the update range (1 to 128) of the AT counter C is obtained, it is included in the update range of that random number. Since the AT mode transition lottery is not performed with a value that does not exist, if there is a lottery result (for example, strong watermelon) that is set as AT mode transition winning, AT mode transition winning occurs with that lottery result. do not do. Therefore, in the AT mode transition lottery with a value not included in such an update range, the AT mode transition lottery table should be set so that the AT mode transition lottery will not be won even if the lottery result is used. Also, when obtaining a random number (1 to 256) whose update range is wider than the update range (1 to 128) of the AT counter C, an AT mode transition lottery with a value not included in the update range of the AT counter C is used. In that case, regardless of the result of the lottery, it is impossible to win the AT mode transition. Therefore, in such a case, it is preferable to perform the AT mode transition lottery using a lottery table set so that the AT mode transition lottery can be won with a value outside the update range of the AT counter C.

(30) Although the random numbers for other lotteries are converted into AT counters C and the like, the random numbers for other lotteries are stored as they are as AT counters C and the like. A configuration may be used in which a lottery table is set. As a result, even when the AT mode transition lottery is performed using a random number whose update range is different from that of the AT counter C or the like, the lottery can be suitably performed.

(31) The configuration is such that which of the transitions between the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B should occur is notified as a special notification when the transition replay is won, but when the transition replay is won, the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT Only notification (for example, FIG. 120(c)) to the effect that the transition to state B may occur is performed, and when the transition actually occurs, the AT counter C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f A configuration may also be adopted in which the degree of expectation for winning the AT mode transition is notified based on the above (FIG. 122(b)).

(32) When shifting to the fourth RT state A or the fourth RT state B, collectively notify the degree of expectation for winning the AT mode transition based on the AT counter C or the like stored in the lottery information storage area 106f ( 122(b)), it may be configured such that, as in the first embodiment, which game is likely to win the AT mode transition is notified individually by a pending display or the like.

(33) It may be difficult or impossible to identify which state the player is staying in, the fourth RT state A or the fourth RT state B, from the effects of the auxiliary display section 65 or the like. In addition, in this configuration, even though the probability of winning the cherry replay and the watermelon play is the same in the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B, the AT mode transition during the cherry replay and the watermelon play is performed by matching the AT counter C. It is preferable to apply a configuration in which the probability of winning is different between the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B.

(34) Using cherry replay, which is the most likely trigger for AT mode transition winning in the 4th RT state A, and watermelon play, which is the most likely trigger for AT mode transition winning in the 4th RT state B, AT in the cherry replay and watermelon play Assuming that the mode transition lottery will be held, the result of the AT mode transition lottery is read in advance, but the lottery result that is the most likely to win the AT mode transition lottery is provided separately from the cherry replay and the watermelon play. good too.

(35) Using the cherry replay with the highest winning probability in each game of the 4th RT state A and the watermelon play with the highest winning probability in each game of the 4th RT state B, transition to AT mode in the cherry replay or watermelon play Assuming that a lottery will be held, the result of the AT mode transition lottery is read in advance, but the lottery result with the highest winning probability may be provided separately from the cherry replay and the watermelon play.

(36) As the AT counter C that wins AT mode transition, the value associated with cherry replay is set as the smaller value in the update range, and the value associated with watermelon play is set as the larger value. In the configuration for predicting which replay AT counter C is stored based on the integrated value of each AT counter C, by calculating the average value instead of the integrated value, the AT counter C corresponding to which replay is calculated. may be configured to predict whether is stored. In this case, if the value of the AT counter C associated with the lottery result to be predicted is within a predetermined range (for example, 1 to 64), the calculated average value of the stored AT counter C is within the predetermined range. is included, it is possible to predict that AT mode transition winning is likely to occur in the result of the lottery targeted for prediction. In addition, the closer the calculated average value of the stored AT counter C is to the average value of the AT counter C associated with the lottery result to be predicted to the average value within a predetermined range (for example, 1 to 64), the more the prediction is made. It is also possible to predict that the target lottery result is likely to win the AT mode transition.

(37) In the configuration for predicting the result of the AT mode transition lottery by performing arithmetic processing of the stored AT counter C, etc., the arithmetic processing is not limited to the accumulation processing of each AT counter C, and The processing of calculating the average value may be the arithmetic processing, the counting of the number as in the fourth embodiment may be the arithmetic processing, the processing of calculating the difference may be the arithmetic processing, or other four rules. A process of performing an operation may be referred to as an operation process. For example, when the processing of calculating the difference is the arithmetic processing, if the difference is small, the values of the AT counter C to be the object of the arithmetic processing are similar, and if the difference is large, the AT to be the object of the arithmetic processing. The value of the counter C will be greatly different. If they are similar, it is predicted that the AT mode shift lottery using the same lottery result will likely have the same result, and if so, it is predicted that the lottery will be won in succession or lose out in succession. In addition, if the results are significantly different, it is predicted that different results are likely to occur in the AT mode transition lottery using the same lottery result, and in that case, it is predicted that one of the AT mode transition lotteries will be won (lost). be done.

(38) In the configuration for performing arithmetic processing of the stored AT counters C, a predetermined A configuration may be adopted in which the AT counter C and another AT counter C are picked up and arithmetic processing is performed. As for which AT counter C to pick up, it is possible to pick up the AT counter C of a predetermined storage area, such as the one with the smaller number among the storage areas RE1 to RE10 (RE1 and RE2). Alternatively, a lottery may be used to determine the storage area to be picked up. Furthermore, the number of AT counters C to be subjected to arithmetic processing may be two or more, and may be three or more. Also, the number may be a predetermined number, or may be determined by lottery.

Further, the number of AT counters C to be subjected to arithmetic processing, the storage area in which AT counters are stored, etc. may differ depending on the timing of arithmetic processing, the game state, and the lottery result of the game.

(39) Among the update range of the AT counter C, a specific range that is likely to win the AT mode transition is determined, the number of values within the specific range is grasped, and the CZ mode is set according to the grasped result. As in the fourth embodiment, assuming that the AT mode transition lottery is performed with the lottery result with the highest winning probability in each game during the gaming state, the number of AT mode transition winnings is grasped, and the grasped result. Alternatively, the CZ mode may be set based on the arithmetic processing of each AT counter C.

(40) The CZ mode is set when the number of values stored in the AT counter C within a specific range reaches a predetermined number (5) or more. The configuration may be such that the CZ mode is set in stages according to the number of stored Cs. For example, a first CZ mode, a second CZ mode, and a third CZ mode are provided in descending order of the expected value for winning the AT mode transition, and when the number of AT counter C stored with a value within a specific range is three or more, the first CZ mode, and when the number is five or more, the mode is shifted to the second CZ mode, and when the number is seven or more, the mode is shifted to the third CZ mode.

(41) In a configuration in which the CZ mode is set when the number of values within a specific range stored in the AT counter C reaches a predetermined number or more, the CZ mode is set when the number exceeds a predetermined number and a predetermined start condition is satisfied. It is good also as a structure which sets. The predetermined start condition is, for example, that the state in which the number of values within a specific range stored in the AT counter C is equal to or greater than a predetermined number continues for a predetermined number of games, or that the lottery result of the game is a predetermined result. It is conceivable that it will be (one of the rare roles).

(42) A special role is set as the lottery result that triggers the AT mode transition lottery, and there is no difference in the winning probability due to the setting value for the specific role, but there is a difference in the winning probability due to the setting value. An AT mode transition lottery may be performed based on the lottery result. In addition, the transition opportunity role was set as the lottery result that triggers the advantageous section transition lottery. A configuration may be adopted in which an advantageous section transition lottery is performed based on a certain lottery result.

(43) The AT mode transition lottery may be configured to be executed even in overlapping hands with BB (strong cherry overlapping 1 with index values IV = 34 to 51, etc.), or BB alone may win (index values IV = 52, 53). ), or may be executed at the lottery result (index value IV=54 to 58) during CB winning or CB state. In these cases as well, the AT mode transition lottery may be triggered by a lottery result with a difference in winning probability depending on the set value.

(44) In the description of the invention, the gaming state occurs when the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, or when the transition replay 1 or 2 is won. each invention may be applied to a case of winning an MB (middle bonus) and moving to the MB state, or a case of winning a REG (regular bonus) and moving to the REG state. Further, even if each invention is applied, the state transition occurs when the first BB state, the second BB state, the fourth RT state, the fourth RT state A, the fourth RT state B, or any other state ends. good. In addition, depending on the type of game state transition possible, the types and occurrence conditions of pending display, special notification, and specific notification may be varied. For example, when the second BB is won, the holding display is displayed without going through the holding display lottery (modification 1 in the first embodiment), while when the first BB is won, the holding display is displayed. A configuration may be adopted in which only the winning prizes are displayed on hold.

(45) The ball payout rate is changed according to each set value. Setting 1 has the lowest ball payout rate and setting 6 has the highest ball payout rate. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the . For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Further, setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(46) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(47) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having ball-inserting and ball-paying functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) in place of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

For example, a pachinko machine or a reel-type game machine using balls may be configured to have a plurality of stages of set values that change the ball output rate, etc., and each of the above inventions may be applied to suggest these set values and as a teaching effect. good. In this case, in a pachinko machine having a high-probability state and a low-probability state in which the jackpot probability is high and low, the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high-probability state, In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state in which the ball rate is high and low, each of the above inventions may be applied with the advantageous section of the slot machine 10 being the high ball entry state.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

The inventions shown in the following feature groups are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. In the slot machine, a start lever is operated while medals as game media are betted. Then, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the above, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
with
A first game state (for example, normal game state) and a second game state (for example, second 1BB state, 2nd BB state, 4th RT state A and 4th RT state B) are set,
Game state transition means for shifting from the first game state to the second game state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition (function for executing bonus state processing and RT state processing by the main controller 101 ) is a gaming machine comprising
Specific information acquisition means (function for executing random number acquisition processing in main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in main controller 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
Specific lottery means capable of executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not to cause a specific event (AT mode shift) by using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result of the lottery means. (Function to execute AT mode transition lottery by main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, the specific execution means (by the main controller 101) that causes the specific event function to execute processing for shifting to AT mode);
with
The specific lottery means obtains predetermined specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means in the first game state and stored in the specific information storage means, and a lottery result by the lottery means in the second game state. and a gaming machine capable of executing the specific lottery.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and starts the revolving body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the revolving body stops, In a so-called slot machine in which if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a privilege is given by the privilege granting means, the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means are stored. Since a specific lottery is performed to determine whether or not to cause a specific event using the specific information stored in the means, the conventional method of simply associating the lottery result of the lottery means with the stopping result of the orbiting body is used. A game property completely different from that of a slot machine is realized.

Moreover, a first game state and a second game state are provided in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result is different, and the specific information acquired in the first game state and the game in the second game state are provided. A specific lottery can be executed by using the lottery results of Therefore, in a game using a specific lottery, an element such as whether or not a transition of the game state occurs after obtaining the specific information is added, the elements that attract the player's interest are diversified, and an interesting game that attracts the player is added. It can be a game. More specifically, for example, when the acquired specific information is information corresponding to the content of winning a specific lottery if the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result (the result of the specific lottery is the specific result). After obtaining the specific information, the probability of winning the specific lottery changes after the transition from the first game state to the second game state. Therefore, a player who wants to cause a specific event expects a transition to a state in which the probability of a special outcome is high, or does not expect a transition to a state in which the probability of a special outcome is low. A player who does not want this to occur expects to transition to a state in which the probability of a special outcome is low, or expects to not transition to a state in which the probability of a special outcome is high. It is possible to realize a novel game property that makes users expect the presence or absence of transition of the game state in relation to the specific information.

Regarding the ``specific lottery means'', ``whether or not to cause a specific event using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the special result of the lottery results of the lottery means It may be expressed as "specific lottery means capable of executing the specific lottery".

In addition, the above configuration is such that "the specific lottery means obtains predetermined specific information acquired by the specific information obtaining means in a predetermined game and stored in the specific information storage means, and The specific lottery can be executed by using the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game, which is the game of (1). It can be further clarified that a specific lottery may be performed in relation to the game result.

It should be noted that the ``specific information storage means capable of storing the specific information'' may be expressed as ``specific information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information'', can be expressed as a specific information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information. Such changes in representation are also applicable to other features and other feature groups.

Feature A2. Predetermined specific information stored by the specific information storage means can be specified by destination specifying means (for example, for pending display by the display control device 81) before the specified specific information becomes the target of the specific lottery. function to perform processing) and
Specific notification execution means (processing for displaying a special image in pending display processing by display control device 81) capable of executing specific notification corresponding to the identification result by the destination identification means by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) function) and
The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the specific notification corresponding to the acquired specific information is performed by the predetermined notification means, so that it is determined whether or not it is better to cause the transition of the game state while confirming the specific notification. You can play a game while playing. Therefore, the game of feature A1 can be preferably executed.

Feature A3. When the specific lottery is performed using the predetermined specific information, the specific notification execution means executes notification corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means that is the specific result or is likely to be the specific result as the specific notification. The gaming machine according to feature A2, characterized in that it is possible to

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp from the specific notification what kind of result the lottery result by the lottery means is likely to be the specific result for the acquired specific information. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the presence or absence of the transition of the game state is advantageous for the player in relation to the specific notification, and for the result of the lottery in each game, the privilege is obtained based on the result of the lottery. A higher interest than the privilege granted by the granting means comes to be received. Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved.

Feature A4. The specific lottery means is
When the specific lottery is performed using the first result (for example, strong cherry) among the lottery results by the lottery means and the first specific information (for example, 5 of AT counter C) among the specific information. becomes the above-mentioned specific result,
A configuration in which the specific result can be obtained when the specific lottery is performed using a second result (for example, weak cherry) different from the first result among the lottery results by the lottery means and the first specific information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, in a game in which a specific lottery is performed using already acquired specific information and a game lottery result, the relationship between the specific information and the game lottery result when the specific lottery result is the specific result. does not have a one-to-one relationship, and a plurality of lottery results are associated with one piece of specific information. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the specific lottery, and even if the specific information associated with the lottery result of a game that is unlikely to appear is obtained, the specific result may differ from the specific lottery result in relation to other lottery results. The possibility remains, and the amusement of the game is improved.

Feature A5. The specific lottery means is
When the specific lottery is performed using the first result (for example, strong cherry) among the lottery results by the lottery means and the first specific information (for example, 5 of AT counter C) among the specific information. becomes the above-mentioned specific result,
The specific lottery is performed using the first result of the lottery results of the lottery means and the second specific information (for example, 6 of the AT counter C) different from the first specific information of the specific information. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the game machine is configured so that the specified result can be obtained when the game is performed.

According to the above configuration, in a game in which a specific lottery is performed using already acquired specific information and a game lottery result, the relationship between the specific information and the game lottery result when the specific lottery result is the specific result. does not have a one-to-one relationship, and a plurality of pieces of specific information are associated with one lottery result. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the lottery results of the games related to the specific lottery from becoming too complicated while diversifying the specific lottery.

Feature A6. The specific lottery means outputs a third result (for example, a strong cherry or a 3rd win in BB) among the lottery results of the lottery means and third specific information (for example, 1 of AT counter C) among the specific information. , is configured to result in the specific result when the specific lottery is performed using
When the lottery is performed by the lottery means in the second game state, the third result is obtained, while when the lottery is performed by the lottery means in the first game state, the third result is not obtained. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the third outcome is less likely to occur than in the second gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when the third specific information is acquired by the specific information acquisition means, the specific lottery is won if the lottery result of the game is the third result, and the third result is obtained in the second game state. However, it is set so that the third result is not obtained in the first game state, or the third result is less likely to be obtained than in the second game state. By adopting such a configuration, the specific lottery is performed using the specific information obtained in advance by the specific information obtaining means and the lottery result of the game after that, in the game property that the specific lottery is performed. If the specific information is the third specific information, it is possible to make the player desire to shift from the first game state to the second game state. As a result, interest in the game is enhanced by making the player interested in whether or not the game state is changed in relation to the specific information.

Feature A7. The specific lottery means uses the fourth result (for example, normal replay) of the lottery results by the lottery means and the fourth specific information (for example, 3 of AT counter C) among the specific information. It is configured so that the specific result is obtained when a specific lottery is performed,
When the lottery is performed by the lottery means in the first game state, the fourth result is obtained, whereas when the lottery is performed by the lottery means in the second game state, the fourth result is not obtained. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein the fourth outcome is less likely to occur than in the first gaming state.

According to the above configuration, when the fourth specific information is acquired by the specific information acquisition means, the specific lottery is won if the lottery result of the game is the fourth result, and the fourth result is obtained in the first gaming state. However, it is set so that the fourth result is not obtained in the second game state or the fourth result is less likely to be obtained than in the first game state. By adopting such a configuration, the specific lottery is performed using the specific information obtained in advance by the specific information obtaining means and the lottery result of the game after that, in the game property that the specific lottery is performed. If the specific information is the fourth specific information, it is possible to make it desired that the transition from the first game state to the second game state does not occur. As a result, interest in the game is enhanced by making the player interested in whether or not the game state is changed in relation to the specific information.

Feature A8. As the second game state, a first specific state (first BB state, fourth RT state A) and a second specific state (second BB state, fourth RT state B) in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result are different. ), the game machine according to any one of features A1 to A7.

According to the above configuration, in the game property that provides enjoyment such as whether or not the game state transition occurs after obtaining the specific information, the lottery means determines whether the transition occurs in the first specific state or the second specific state. The contents of the lottery are different, and for example, the case where the transition to the first specific state occurs is more advantageous than the case where the transition to the second specific state occurs due to the relationship with the acquired specific information. , and so on, it is possible to draw attention to the transition destination in the above-mentioned game characteristics.

Feature A9. As the transition condition, the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (first BB winning, second BB winning), and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result stops at the valid position. is set and
A retaining means (a function of carrying over a bonus winning flag by the main controller 101) capable of retaining information indicating that the transition result has been won until the symbol combination for transition stops at the effective position. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, characterized in that

In the above configuration, the transition from the first game state to the second game state results in winning as a result of the transition, and the pattern combination for the transition is stopped, and the winning is the transition result until the pattern combination for the transition is stopped. The configuration is carried over. By applying such a configuration to the feature A1, in the game property of acquiring the specific information in advance and performing the specific lottery based on the lottery result of the game, the second game state can be obtained in relation to the already acquired specific information. After determining whether or not it is better to cause the transition to , the pattern combination for the transition is stopped when a situation arises in which it is better to make the transition.

Feature A10. As the transition condition, the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (transition replay 1 winning, transition replay 2 winning), and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result stops at the valid position. is set and
In a game in which the lottery result of the lottery means is the transition result, if the pattern combination for transition does not stop at the valid position, erasing means ( function of executing a process of erasing the winning flag of each game by the main control device 101), or regardless of the stop operation mode of the stop operation means, the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, wherein the pattern combination for transition can be stopped at the effective position in the game when the game is completed.

In the above configuration, the transition from the first game state to the second game state occurs when the pattern combination for transition is stopped as a result of the transition, and the information that the transition result is the winning is only for the game. becomes valid. By doing so, in the game property of acquiring the specific information in advance and performing the specific lottery based on the lottery result of the game, the transition to the second game state is caused in relation to the already acquired specific information. Whether or not the shift actually occurs is strongly influenced by the element of luck. Therefore, for example, in a situation where it would be advantageous if the transition to the second advantageous state occurred in relation to the specific information, the result of the lottery means of each game would be of great interest, and the game would be exciting. can be performed.

Feature A11. The drive control means is capable of stopping the pattern combination for transition at the effective position when the stop operation means is operated in a predetermined operation mode, while the stop operation means is capable of stopping the pattern combination for transition at the effective position. The gaming machine according to feature A9 or feature A10, characterized in that the pattern combination for transition cannot be stopped at the effective position when operated in an operation mode different from the operation mode.

According to the above configuration, when it is better not to shift to the second game state even when the transition result is winning, the player sets the operation mode of the stop operation means to an operation mode different from the predetermined operation mode. By doing so, it is possible not to stop the pattern combination for transition, so that there is room for the player to select the contents of the specific lottery, and the interest in the game is improved.

Feature A12. The second game state is configured to shift to the first game state or another game state based on establishment of a predetermined end condition (payout of the upper limit payout number, completion of a fixed number of games, etc.),
The specific information storage means has a configuration capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, wherein the termination condition can be satisfied in a number of games less than the predetermined number.

According to the above configuration, since the second game state can be completed with the number of games smaller than the predetermined number, which is the upper limit of the number of specific information stored in the specific information storage means, the second game state is obtained before shifting to the second game state. The second game state can be ended before all the specified information that has been played is consumed. By doing so, for example, when the specific information corresponds to a situation in which the first game state is more preferable, not only the game such as preventing the transition to the second game state from occurring, but also the second game state. It is also possible to perform a game in which the second game state is ended before the specific information becomes the object of the specific lottery after causing the transition to the 2 game state. Therefore, it is possible to more favorably improve the amusement of the game that allows the player to enjoy the presence or absence of the transition of the game state in relation to the specific information.

Feature A13. The second game state is configured to shift to the first game state or another game state based on establishment of a predetermined end condition (payout of the upper limit payout number, completion of a fixed number of games, etc.),
The specific information storage means has a configuration capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, wherein the end condition can be satisfied after the number of games is greater than the predetermined number.

According to the above configuration, the second game state can be ended with the number of games larger than the predetermined number, which is the upper limit of the number of specific information that can be stored in the specific information storage means. After all the previously acquired specific information is consumed, the second game state can be terminated. By doing so, for example, when the specific information corresponds to a situation in which the second game state is more preferable than the situation in which the first game state is, the transition to the second game state can be performed. The specific information becomes an object of a specific lottery before the game state is ended. Therefore, it is possible to more favorably improve the amusement of the game that allows the player to enjoy the presence or absence of the transition of the game state in relation to the specific information.

Feature A14. The gaming machine according to feature A12 or feature A13, wherein the termination condition is such that the number of games in the second game state may differ depending on the lottery result of the lottery means in the second game state.

According to the above configuration, a luck element is added to the number of games to be continued in the second game state. Whether or not the game is subject to the specific lottery after the game ends depends on the lottery result of each game during the second game state. By doing so, in each game during the second game state, it is possible to make people pay more attention to not only the result of the specific lottery, but also the result of the lottery of the game in relation to the subsequent specific information. .

Feature A15. An end result (for example, a strong cherry as a payout combination) is set as a lottery result by the lottery means in the second game state,
The lottery result by the lottery means is the end result, and when the ending pattern combination stops at the valid position, the privilege corresponding to the end result is granted by the privilege granting means,
A configuration in which success or failure of the termination condition may differ depending on whether or not a privilege corresponding to the termination result is granted by the privilege granting means,
The drive control means stops the pattern combination for termination at the effective position when the stop operation means is operated in the operation mode for termination, and the stop operation means operates in the operation mode for termination. The game according to any one of features A12 to A14, characterized in that it is possible to control the pattern combination for ending so as not to stop at the effective position when operated in a different operation mode. machine.

According to the above configuration, whether or not the conditions for ending the second game state are met is related to the operation of the stop operation means for the game ended during the second game state. More specifically, when the stop operation means is operated in the operation mode for ending in the game resulting in the ending result, the pattern combination for ending is stopped at the effective position, thereby becoming an object of granting a privilege, and the game ends. When operated in an operation mode different from the operation mode for , the pattern combination for end does not stop at the effective position and is not subject to awarding of the privilege. Then, since the success or failure of the end condition may differ depending on whether or not the privilege is granted, whether or not to end the second game state may differ depending on the operation mode when the end result is won. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to participate in the operation of the stop operation means as to whether or not the second game state is to be terminated in relation to the specific information, thereby encouraging active participation in the game. , the operation of the stop operation means can be made more enjoyable.

In addition, as a specific configuration of the above configuration, the following configuration can be considered.

"The end condition is established when the number of game media paid out in the second game state reaches a predetermined specific number,
The end result is that a predetermined number of game media are awarded as the privilege by the privilege imparting means.

Feature A16. The second game state is more advantageous for the player than the first game state,
Characteristic features A1 to A15, characterized in that the probability of obtaining the specific result in the specific lottery using the same specific information is likely to be higher in the second game state than in the first game state. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, by shifting from the first game state to the second game state, it becomes an advantageous state for the player, and moreover, if the same specific information is received, the second game state is more likely than the specific lottery in the first game state. The probability of obtaining a specific result is higher when the specific lottery is received in the game state. With such a configuration, it is specified during the second game state using the specific information acquired before the transition to the second game state to the game property that expects the transition to the second game state, that is, the transition to the jackpot state. It is possible to match the game property of performing a lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make the second game state as a big winning state more enjoyable.

Feature A17. As game states, a normal game state (normal section) and a first specific game state (advantageous section) that is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state (AT mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific game state is set,
In the normal game state, first transition lottery means for executing a first transition lottery for determining whether to transition to the first specific game state (function for executing an advantageous zone transition lottery by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result (advantageous section winning) corresponding to shifting to the first specific game state, the first specific game First specific transition means for transitioning to the state (function for executing processing for transitioning to the advantageous section by the main controller 101);
Second transition lottery means for executing a second transition lottery for whether or not to transition to the second specific game state (function for executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101);
Based on that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is the second transition result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to shifting to the second specific game state, the second specific Second specific transition means for transitioning to the game state (function for executing processing for transitioning to AT mode by main controller 101);
with
The specific lottery means executes the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means as the specific lottery, and the specific event is to cause a transition to the second specific game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the first specific game state is provided which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the second specific game state which is more advantageous as a state included in the first specific game state is provided. Therefore, in the game property premised on the state transition that becomes advantageous in stages, such as moving from the normal game state to the first specific game state and aiming for the second specific game state, the second specific game state It is possible to make a novel game property such that the lottery for transition to is performed based on the specific information acquired in advance.

Feature A18. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode information (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function to execute pushing process by main controller 101),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, wherein the specific event causes a transition to a state in which mode notification can be performed by the mode notification means.

According to the above configuration, the specific lottery performed based on the specific information obtained in advance is a lottery for a specific event that causes a transition to a state in which the navigation of the stop operation mode can occur. By doing so, a lottery method of pre-obtaining specific information for the lottery is used for a game using navigation in the stop operation mode, and the pre-acquired specific information is effectively used even after the game state is changed. It is possible to create novel game characteristics such as

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
with
A first game state (for example, normal game state) and a second game state (for example, first BB state, second BB state) in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined special result (for example, strong cherry) is different ) and are set,
A game comprising game state transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main controller 101) for shifting from the first game state to the second game state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition. machine and
First specific information acquisition means for acquiring first specific information based on the fact that a predetermined first acquisition condition is established (process for acquiring normal AT counter CA in random number acquisition processing in main control unit 101) function) and
a first specific information storage means (normal storage area REA in main controller 101) capable of storing the first specific information acquired by the first specific information acquisition means;
Whether or not to cause a specific event (shift to AT mode) using at least the first specific information stored in the first specific information storage means and the lottery result of the lottery means in the first game state a first specific lottery means for executing a specific lottery (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery based on the normal AT counter CA by the main controller 101);
Second specific information acquisition means for acquiring second specific information based on the fact that a predetermined second acquisition condition is established (process for acquiring AT counter CB for BB in random number acquisition processing in main control unit 101) function) and
a second specific information storage means (BB storage area REB in the main control device 101) capable of storing the second specific information acquired by the second specific information acquisition means;
Using at least the second specific information stored in the second specific information storage means and the lottery result of the lottery means in the second game state, a specific lottery for determining whether or not to cause the specific event is performed. Second specific lottery means to be executed (function of executing AT mode transition lottery based on AT counter CB for BB by main controller 101);
The lottery result of the first specific lottery by the first specific lottery means or the lottery result of the second specific lottery by the second specific lottery means is the specific result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event. Based on that, a specific execution means (a function of executing a process for shifting to an advantageous section by the main controller 101) that causes the specific event,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and starts the revolving body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the revolving body stops, In a so-called slot machine where if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a privilege is given by the privilege granting means, the lottery result by the lottery means and the number acquired by the first specific information acquisition means. A first specific lottery is performed to determine whether or not to cause a specific event by using the first specific information stored in the 1 specific information storage means, or a lottery result by the lottery means and a second specific information acquisition means. The second specific lottery for determining whether or not to cause the specific event is performed using the second specific information acquired by and stored in the second specific information storage means. It is possible to realize a completely different game property from the conventional slot machine, such as the correspondence between the result and the stop result of the revolving body.

Here, a first game state and a second game state are provided in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result is different. In this case, if both specific lotteries are performed using the same specific information, there is a probability that the lottery result will be a special result in the first specific lottery in the first game state and the second specific lottery in the second game state. Due to the difference, the probabilities of the results of both specific lotteries being specific results may also be different. Then, for example, it is necessary to adjust the winning probability of the special result due to circumstances such as not to increase the probability that the result of the specific lottery will become the specific result. Configuration limitations may occur. Further, for example, depending on the probability that the result of the specific lottery will be the specific result, it is necessary to adjust the update range of the specific information.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the specific information is separately acquired for the specific lottery in both game states, and the specific lottery is performed based on the specific information and the lottery result of each game state. It is possible to set the specific lottery according to the actual situation, and it is possible to realize excellent game characteristics using the specific lottery.

In addition, regarding the "first specific lottery means", "at least the first specific information stored in the first specific information storage means and the special result of the lottery results by the lottery means are used to It may be expressed as "first specific lottery means for executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not to cause an event", and "second specific lottery means" may be expressed as "at least the second specific lottery means stored in the second specific information storage means". It may be expressed as "second specific lottery means for executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not to cause a specific event by using 2 specific information and the special result of the lottery results of the lottery means".

Feature B2. The first specific information acquisition means is capable of acquiring the first specific information based on satisfaction of the first acquisition condition in the second gaming state,
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the second specific information obtaining means can obtain the second specific information based on satisfaction of the second obtaining condition in the first gaming state.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific information for both game states is respectively provided, it is possible to acquire the specific information of the other side in advance before shifting to the other game state. Become. By doing so, it is possible to determine whether it is advantageous in terms of a specific lottery to shift the game state to the other side based on the specific information corresponding to the game state of the other side before the shift. It becomes possible.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.
"The first acquisition condition can be satisfied in the second game state,
The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized in that the second acquisition condition can be satisfied in the first gaming state."

Feature B3. The first specific information acquisition means is capable of acquiring the first specific information based on satisfaction of the first acquisition condition in the first gaming state,
The game according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the second specific information obtaining means can obtain the second specific information based on the fact that the second obtaining condition is satisfied in the second game state. machine.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific information for both game states is respectively provided, the specific lottery is performed based on the specific information corresponding to the game state in which the user is staying, and the specific information is consumed by the specific lottery. This prevents an event in which specific information is depleted due to In other words, the specific lottery based on the specific information corresponding to the game state in which the player is staying is performed, and the specific information corresponding to the game state is acquired. It is possible to suitably realize game characteristics using the specified information.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.
"The first acquisition condition can be satisfied in the first gaming state,
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, characterized in that the second acquisition condition can be satisfied in the second game state."

Feature B4. When the first specific lottery based on the first specific information is performed in the first game state, the second specific information stored in the second specific information storage means is selected in the game. (2) erasing the second specific information to be the target of the second specific lottery from the second specific information storage means when the specific lottery has been conducted;
When the second specific lottery based on the second specific information is performed in the second game state, the first specific information stored in the first specific information storage means is selected in the game. Erasing means for erasing the first specific information to be the target of the first specific lottery from the first specific information storage means when the first specific lottery has been performed (the process of steps S4301 to S4309 in the main controller 101 A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the above configuration, when the first specific lottery based on the first specific information is performed in the first game state, the second specific information is also consumed, and the second specific lottery based on the second specific information is performed in the second game state. is performed, the first specific information is also consumed. In other words, the specific information on the side not targeted for the specific lottery is also consumed, and the specific information is consumed in accordance with the progress of the game regardless of the game state. By doing so, for example, when the acquired second specific information for the second game state is not preferable for the player, the second specific information is held so that the second game state Even if you shift to , the situation that you are not happy with will continue endlessly. In other words, for example, when the obtained second specific information for the second game state is preferable for the player, the second specific information is retained, so that even if the second game state is transitioned to. A happy situation does not continue endlessly, and a game feature is realized in which it is necessary to cause the transition to the second game state before the second specific information is consumed.

Feature B5. When the first specific lottery based on the first specific information is performed in the first gaming state, holding the second specific information stored in the second specific information storage means,
When the second specific lottery based on the second specific information is performed in the second game state, holding means (main controller) for holding the first specific information stored in the first specific information storage means 101) is provided.

According to the above configuration, when the first specific lottery based on the first specific information is performed in the first game state, the second specific information is not consumed, and the second specific lottery based on the second specific information is obtained in the second game state. When the lottery is held, the first specific information is not consumed. In other words, the specific information on the side not targeted for the specific lottery is not consumed, and the specific information consumed differs depending on the game state. By doing so, for example, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the second specific lottery in the next second game state by the acquired second specific information for the second game state. For example, if the acquired second specific information is preferable, the game will continue until the suggestion causes a transition to the second game state, and if the acquired second specific information is not preferable. Furthermore, it is also possible to play a game while expecting a transition to the next second game state.

Here, since the first specific lottery and the second specific lottery are performed using the specific information and the lottery result of the game, even if the second specific information is not preferable as described above, , the result of the second specific lottery may differ depending on the result of the game, and the hope for the second specific lottery is not completely cut off. Therefore, even if it is done as described above, it is possible to expect an excellent effect when the desire to play is less likely to be lost and the second specific information is desirable.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, wherein the first acquisition condition and the second acquisition condition can be satisfied in the same game.

According to the above configuration, the first specific information and the second specific information may be acquired in the same game. By doing so, for example, when the first specific information is consumed in the first game state and there is space for the second specific information, or when the second specific information is consumed in the second game state and When the first specific information is available, the first specific information and the second specific information can be supplemented in one game. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid the event that the specific information is depleted.

Feature B7. The first specific lottery means selects a first result (for example, strong watermelon) among the lottery results by the lottery means and first specific information corresponding to the first result (for example, normal AT counter) among the first specific information. 65) of CA and is set so that the specific result is obtained when the first specific lottery is performed using
The second specific lottery means provides the first result of the lottery results of the lottery means and the second specific information corresponding to the first result corresponding to the first specific information corresponding to the first result of the second specific information. (For example, 65 of AT counter CB for BB corresponding to 65 of AT counter CA for normal use) is set so that the specific result is not obtained when the second specific lottery is performed using The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6.

According to the above configuration, when the first specifying information corresponding to the first result is acquired by the first specifying information acquisition means, the player wins the specific lottery if the lottery result of the game is the first result. In the gaming state, if the lottery result of the game is the first result as described above, the player wins the specific lottery, but the second specific information corresponding to the first result corresponding to the first specific information corresponding to the first result is the second specific information. When it is acquired by the acquisition means, the specific lottery is not won even if the lottery result of the game becomes the first result in the second game state. With such a configuration, even if the specific information (the first specific information corresponding to the first result and the second specific information corresponding to the first result) are the same, whether the specific lottery is successful or not depends on the game state. The significance of separately preparing the specific information according to the game state can be enhanced, and it is possible to make the player more interested in which special information corresponding to the first result is acquired.

It should be noted that "the first result corresponding second specific information corresponding to the first result corresponding first specific information" means that "the updating range of the first specific information and the second specific information is the same". As a premise, it may be expressed as "the second specific information corresponding to the first result having the same value as the first specific information corresponding to the first result", or "the first specific information and the second specific information on the premise that "the value when the value of the second specific information is converted by the update range of the first specific information is the value of the first specific information corresponding to the first result" It may also be expressed as "first result corresponding second specific information having the same value".

Feature B8. The first specific lottery means selects a second result (for example, strong cherry) among the lottery results by the lottery means and first specific information corresponding to the second result (for example, normal AT counter) among the first specific information. 1) of CA and is set so that the specific result is obtained when the first specific lottery is performed using
The second specific lottery means provides second result corresponding second specific information corresponding to the second result corresponding first specific information among the second specific information and the second result among the lottery results by the lottery means. (For example, 1 of AT counter CB for BB corresponding to 1 of normal AT counter CA) is set so that the specific result is obtained when the second specific lottery is performed using The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7.

According to the above configuration, when the first specifying information corresponding to the second result is acquired by the first specifying information acquisition means, the player wins the specific lottery if the lottery result of the game is the second result. In the gaming state, if the lottery result of the game is the second result as described above, the specific lottery is won, and the second specific information corresponding to the second result corresponding to the first specific information corresponding to the second result is acquired as the second specific information. If it is acquired by the means, if the lottery result of the game becomes the second result in the second game state, the specific lottery is won. By doing so, when similar specific information (the first specific information corresponding to the second result and the second specific information corresponding to the second result) are acquired, the success or failure of the specific lottery is common depending on the game state. While premised on the configuration that there is, for example, like the feature B7, it is possible to enhance the effect of the unexpected configuration that the specific lottery wins or fails depending on the game state even if the same specific information is used. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability of the game by separately preparing specific information for both game states.

Feature B9. Predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) can execute first specific notification (holding display in normal holding display area Dra) for the first specific information stored by the first specific information storage means First specific notification means (function for executing processing for displaying a special image as a reserved display in the normal reserved display area Dra by the display control device 81);
A second specific notification of the second specific information stored by the second specific information storage means (holding display in the BB holding display area Drb) can be executed by a predetermined reporting means (auxiliary display unit 65) Second specific notification means (function for executing processing for displaying a special image as a pending display in the BB pending display area Drb by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the player can confirm the acquired first specific information for the first game state and second specific information for the second game state as the first specific notification and the second specific notification, respectively. becomes possible. As a result, the game can be progressed while grasping which game state specific information is advantageous to receive the specific lottery, and interest in the success or failure of the transition condition can be heightened.

Feature B10. As the second game state, a first specific state (first BB state) and a second specific state (second BB state) having different probabilities that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the special result are provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the second specific lottery is performed using the second specific information for the second game state acquired in advance, the second game state further determines that the lottery result of the game is a special result. There are a first specific state and a second specific state with different probabilities of becoming, and depending on which specific state the transition is made to, whether or not the specific result is likely to occur in relation to the acquired second specific information may differ. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the transition destination of the game state with respect to the second specific information, and to improve the interest by making the game more profound.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
Specific information acquisition means (function for executing random number acquisition processing in the main controller 101) for acquiring specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in the main controller 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
Specific lottery means capable of executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not to cause a specific event (AT mode shift) by using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result of the lottery means. (Function to execute AT mode transition lottery by main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, the specific execution means (by the main controller 101) that causes the specific event function to execute processing for shifting to AT mode);
A second method capable of obtaining the specific information based on the establishment of a specific condition different from the acquisition condition in a specific situation in which the number of the specific information stored by the specific information storage means does not reach the predetermined number. Specific information acquisition means (function for executing initial random number acquisition processing by main control device 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and starts the revolving body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the revolving body stops, In a so-called slot machine where if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a privilege is given by the privilege granting means, the lottery result by the lottery means and the specified acquired by the first specified information acquisition means. Since the specific lottery for determining whether or not to cause the specific event is performed using the specific information stored in the information storage means, the lottery result by the lottery means and the stop result of the orbiting body are simply associated with each other. Game characteristics completely different from conventional slot machines are realized.

In addition, in the above configuration, the second specific information acquisition means acquires the specific information when a specific condition different from the acquisition condition is established in a specific situation where the specific information storage means does not store a predetermined number of specific information that is the storage upper limit. It was configured to provide By doing so, it is possible to reduce situations in which the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means as much as possible, and to suitably realize game characteristics using the acquired specific information.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the specific condition is established before each of the orbiting bodies starts to revolve based on the operation by the starting operation means.

According to the above configuration, the specific information is obtained by the second specific information obtaining means before the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective at the start of the game. By doing so, at the start of the game, it becomes possible to perform a specific lottery using at least the specific information acquired by the second specific information acquisition means, so that an event in which the specific lottery cannot be performed does not occur. can be

In the above configuration, by limiting the configuration in which "the specific lottery means executes the specific lottery based on the operation by the starting operation means", the specific information can be obtained before the operation of the starting operation means at the start of the game. The significance of acquiring is further enhanced.

Feature C3. A start-up process executing means (a function of executing the main process by the main control device 101) for executing a start-up process started based on power-on of the game machine,
The specific condition is established in the start-up process (the initial random number acquisition process is executed when the winning probability setting process is started),
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein the second specific information acquisition means acquires the specific information during the start-up process.

According to the above configuration, since the specific information is acquired during the start-up process when the power is turned on, the specific information is already stored when the start-up process ends and the game can be started. state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a phenomenon in which the specific lottery cannot be performed due to the absence of the specific information during the game.

Feature C4. In the start-up process by the start-up process execution means, specific erasure means capable of erasing at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means (initialization process during main processing in main controller 101) function to execute),
The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the specific condition is satisfied when the specific information erasing process is performed by the specific erasing means.

According to the above configuration, when the specific information is deleted in the startup process, the specific information is newly acquired. In other words, if the specific information is not deleted, there is no need to acquire the specific information in the startup process. It is possible to prevent an increase in the processing load in the concentrated start-up processing as much as possible.

Feature C5. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein the specific condition is established based on a predetermined operation for progressing the game.

According to the above configuration, the game is established based on a predetermined operation during the progress of the game, and even when the specific information is acquired by the establishment of the specific condition, the player's operation is involved. By doing so, it is possible to make the game about the specific lottery including the operation to acquire the specific information, and to make the player interested in the game including the participation in the operation of the player.

Feature C6. Predetermined operations for progressing the game include a first progress operation (for example, a first stop ON operation) and a game in which the first progress operation is performed at a timing after the first progress operation. a second progress operation (for example, a second stop ON operation) performed in the game;
The gaming machine according to feature C5, wherein the specific condition is established based on the execution of the first advancing operation and is established based on the execution of the second advancing operation.

According to the above configuration, the specific information is acquired in each proceeding operation during one game. By doing so, in a situation where a plurality of empty areas exist in the specific information storage means, the possibility of obtaining the specific information for the empty areas in one game is increased. Since the player's operations are involved at different timings, it is possible to complete the acquisition operation earlier while drawing attention to the acquisition operation.

Feature C7. a first updating means (a function of executing a process of updating the AT counter C in a timer interrupt process by the main controller 101) capable of updating the specific information at a predetermined cycle;
a second updating means (a function of executing processing such as step S4404 by the main controller 101) capable of executing the update processing of the specific information based on the establishment of the specific condition;
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the specific information updated at the predetermined cycle is acquired based on the establishment of the specific condition rather than the acquisition condition, the acquisition may be performed before the start of the update at the predetermined cycle, or multiple It is possible to avoid acquiring the same specific information when the acquisition cycle is synchronized with the predetermined cycle or the acquisition cycle is shorter than the predetermined cycle.

In particular, in a configuration in which the specific information is acquired during the start-up process, as in the feature C2, the acquisition timing may be before the update of the predetermined period by the first updating means is started. There is a possibility that the acquired specific information may be an initial value. In this respect, as described above, the occurrence of such a problem can be avoided by updating by the second updating means at the time of acquisition.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.
"first updating means (function for executing processing for updating the AT counter C by timer interrupt processing by the main control unit 101) capable of updating the specific information at a predetermined cycle;
Based on the establishment of the specific condition, second updating means (by main controller 101) capable of executing update processing of the specific information before the specific information is acquired by the second specific information acquiring means a function to execute processing such as step S4404);
”.

Feature C8. The second specific information acquisition means can acquire a plurality of the specific information based on the establishment of the specific condition,
The gaming machine according to feature C7, wherein the second update means can execute update processing of the specific information each time the second specific information acquisition means acquires the specific information.

According to the above configuration, the second specific information acquiring means can acquire a plurality of pieces of specific information at once. It is also possible to acquire the specific information for each minute. However, as mentioned above, it is not preferable that specific information with similar values is acquired. , while avoiding the occurrence of such inconvenience, it is possible to collectively acquire a plurality of pieces of specific information at once.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.
"The second specific information acquisition means can acquire a plurality of the specific information based on the satisfaction of the specific condition,
Each time the second specific information obtaining means obtains the specific information, the second updating means can execute a process of updating the specific information before obtaining the specific information."

Feature C9. Provided with a predetermined operation means (for example, stop switch 44) operated by the player,
The acquisition condition is established based on the operation of the predetermined operation means,
The specific condition according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the specific condition is established based on the operation of the predetermined operation means or another operation means (for example, the start lever 41). game machine.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the specific information used for the specific lottery is acquired based on the operation of the predetermined operation means by the player, when the specific information is acquired by the second specific information acquisition means is obtained based on the operation of a predetermined operation means or another operation means, the transparency of the specific lottery is ensured compared to the structure in which the game machine side automatically obtains the lottery.

Feature C10. The second specific information obtaining means, even if there are a plurality of vacant areas in the specific information storage means in which the specific information is not stored, The game machine according to feature C9, wherein one piece of the specific information is acquired based on one operation of the operating means.

According to the above configuration, even if there are a plurality of empty areas, by performing the acquisition operation one by one, it is possible to increase the possibility that the specific information is updated, and the same specific information can be obtained. can be prevented as much as possible from being acquired.

Feature C11. Characteristic feature C9, wherein the second specific information acquisition means is configured to be able to acquire a plurality of pieces of the specific information based on one operation of the predetermined operation means or another operation means. game machine.

According to the above configuration, for example, when the manager or the like performs the acquisition work before the opening of the game hall, it is possible to improve the work efficiency.

Feature C12. Having predetermined information used for a predetermined lottery for a game (for example, a lottery counter used for a VB mode transition lottery),
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C11, wherein the second specific information acquisition means is capable of acquiring the predetermined information and storing it in the specific information storage means.

According to the above configuration, for example, when the specific information cannot be obtained due to reasons such as a delay in updating the specific information, or when it is meaningless to obtain the specific information, the obtained value is not preferable. alternative measures such as acquiring other predetermined information can be taken. Moreover, since the other predetermined information is used for the predetermined lottery of the game, it is possible to specify the information while not putting pressure on the storage capacity as compared with the configuration in which a dedicated information is provided for alternative measures. A specific lottery using the information can be preferably performed.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. a first specific random number acquisition means (function for executing random number acquisition processing in the main controller 101) that acquires a specific random number (for example, an AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined first specific condition; ,
specific random number storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in main control unit 101) capable of storing information corresponding to the specific random number acquired by the first specific random number acquisition means, with a predetermined number as the upper limit;
Using at least information corresponding to the specific random number stored in the specific random number storage means, a specific lottery means (AT function to execute the mode transition lottery),
Specific execution means (main a function of executing processing for shifting to the AT mode by the control device 101;
A gaming machine comprising
Provide a predetermined random number (for example, a lottery counter used in game lottery processing) different from the specific random number,
a second specific random number acquisition means (function for executing the processing of step S4605 by the main controller 101) for acquiring the predetermined random number based on the establishment of a predetermined second specific condition;
conversion means for converting the predetermined random number acquired by the second specific random number acquisition means into the specific random number (function for executing the process of step S4606 by the main control device 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the first specific condition is satisfied, the specific random number is obtained, and after storing the specific random number storage means with a predetermined number as the upper limit, whether or not to cause the specific event based on the specific random number is determined. In the configuration in which the specific lottery is performed, when the second specific condition is satisfied, a predetermined random number different from the specific random number is obtained, and the predetermined random number is converted into the specific random number.

Here, for example, in a situation where the number of specific random numbers not stored in the specific random number storage means is less than a predetermined number, it is desirable to replenish the specific random numbers promptly. On the other hand, if you try to get multiple specific random numbers at the same time (at the same time), you will get the same specific random numbers, and specific results that win the specific lottery will occur in succession, or vice versa. It is not preferable from the viewpoint of the fairness of the lottery, such as the continuous occurrence of results that are not specific results. In that regard, in the above configuration, since it is configured to acquire a predetermined random number as another random number and convert it to a specific random number, it is difficult to cause the inconvenience that the same specific random number is acquired, It is possible to rapidly replenish the specific random numbers.

Feature D2. predetermined random number acquisition means for acquiring the predetermined random number based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a function in which a hardware circuit in the main control unit 101 latches a lottery counter value from a free-run counter);
Predetermined lottery means (lottery by main controller 101) for executing a predetermined lottery to determine whether or not to cause a predetermined event (BB state) different from the specific event based on the predetermined random number acquired by the predetermined random number acquisition means function to perform processing) and
Predetermined execution means (main controller) capable of causing the predetermined event based on the fact that the lottery result of the predetermined lottery by the predetermined lottery means is a predetermined result (BB winning) corresponding to the occurrence of the predetermined event 101), and
The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that the predetermined random number is used for the predetermined lottery to determine whether or not to cause the predetermined event, and is not prepared separately for supplementing the specific random number. In this way, if a configuration is adopted in which the specific random numbers are quickly supplemented while making good use of the existing configuration, it is possible to rapidly supplement the specific random numbers without complicating the configuration. Become.

Feature D3. a specific updating means (a function of executing a process of updating the AT counter C in a timer interrupt process by the main controller 101) for updating the specific random number at a predetermined specific cycle;
Predetermined updating means (a hardware circuit for updating a lottery counter used in lottery processing) for updating the predetermined random number at a predetermined period;
with
The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, wherein the specific period and the predetermined period are different periods.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined random number that is converted into the specific random number is updated in a period different from that of the specific random number. By doing so, for example, even when the specific random number and the predetermined random number are obtained at the same timing with the same initial value, the values are likely to be different. It is possible to preferably avoid the phenomenon that a specific lottery is held with a similar value.

Feature D4. The specific random number is updated within a range from an initial value (1) to a specific maximum value (128),
The predetermined random number is updated within a range from an initial value (0) to a predetermined maximum value (65535) larger than the specific maximum value,
The conversion means converts a first predetermined random number of the predetermined random numbers into a first specific random number of the specific random numbers, and converts a second predetermined random number of the predetermined random numbers that is different from the first predetermined random number. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the conversion is performed to the first specific random number.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the numerical range of the predetermined random number is wider than the numerical range of the specific random number, the predetermined random numbers of a plurality of values are associated with the specific random number of one value, and the conversion by the conversion means is performed. done. By doing so, even when a random number with a large numerical range is converted into a specific random number, the inconvenience of not having a conversion destination does not occur, and it is possible to appropriately supplement the specific random number using the predetermined random number. Become.

Feature D5. The specific random number is updated within a range from an initial value to a specific maximum value,
The predetermined random number is updated within a range from an initial value to a predetermined maximum value smaller than the specific maximum value,
The conversion means converts a first predetermined random number of the predetermined random numbers into a first specific random number of the specific random numbers, and converts the first predetermined random number of the predetermined random numbers to the first specific random number. It is possible to convert to a different second specific random number,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein a ratio of converting the first predetermined random number to the first specific random number and a ratio of converting the second specific random number are predetermined. .

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the numerical range of the predetermined random number is narrower than the numerical range of the specific random number, the predetermined random number of one value is associated with the specific random numbers of a plurality of values, and the conversion by the conversion means is performed. is performed, and the ratio of conversion to which specific random number is determined in advance. By doing so, when converting a random number with a small numerical range to a specific random number, there is no need to perform the processing for determining the conversion destination each time, and the predetermined random number can be converted without increasing the processing load. It is possible to appropriately replenish the used specific random numbers.

Feature D6. A first predetermined random number (for example, a lottery counter used for lottery processing) and a second predetermined random number (for example, a lottery counter used for VB mode transition lottery) of different types are provided as the predetermined random numbers. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, characterized by:

By providing a plurality of types of predetermined random numbers that can be converted into specific random numbers as in the above configuration, it is possible to replenish the specific random numbers more efficiently when there are multiple empty areas in the specific random number storage means. becomes.

Feature D7. The gaming machine according to feature D6, wherein the predetermined random numbers equal to or greater than the predetermined number minus 1 are provided as the predetermined random numbers of different types.

According to the above configuration, even in a situation where no specific random number is stored in the specific random number storage means, the specific random number is acquired and stored as it is. Random numbers can be obtained and stored. This makes it possible to replenish the specific random numbers earlier.

Feature D8. The gaming machine according to feature D6 or feature D7, wherein the same number of predetermined random numbers as the predetermined number are provided as the predetermined random numbers of different types.

According to the above configuration, even in a situation where no specific random numbers are stored in the specific random number storage means, it is possible to obtain and store a predetermined number of random numbers, which is the upper limit storage number, at one time. Moreover, since the same number of predetermined random numbers as the predetermined number are provided, even if a specific random number cannot be obtained or is meaningless even if it is obtained, another predetermined random number can be substituted. This makes it possible to replenish the specific random numbers earlier.

Feature D9. an update cycle of the first predetermined random number is shorter than an update cycle of the second predetermined random number;
The game according to any one of features D6 to D8, wherein the second specific random number obtaining means is configured to obtain the first predetermined random number earlier than the second predetermined random number. machine.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined random number (first predetermined random number) having a short update period is acquired first. It becomes difficult to cause inconvenience such as always having the same value.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal game state (normal section) and a first specific game state (advantageous section) that is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state (AT mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific game state is set,
In the normal game state, first transition lottery means for executing a first transition lottery for determining whether to transition to the first specific game state (function for executing an advantageous zone transition lottery by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result (advantageous section winning) corresponding to shifting to the first specific game state, the first specific game First specific transition means for transitioning to the state (function for executing processing for transitioning to the advantageous section by the main controller 101);
Specific information acquisition means (function for executing random number acquisition processing in main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in main controller 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
Using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means, a second transition lottery for executing a second transition lottery as to whether or not to transition to the second specific game state is performed. lottery means (function for executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is the second transition result (AT mode winning) corresponding to shifting to the second specific game state, the second specific game Second specific transition means for transitioning to the state (function for executing processing for transitioning to AT mode by main controller 101);
Predetermined specific information stored by the specific information storage means can be specified by destination specifying means (for example, held by the display control device 81) before the specified specific information becomes the target of the second transfer lottery. a function of executing display processing, a function of executing processing such as step S4802 by the main controller 101);
Specific notification execution means (processing for displaying a special image in pending display processing by display control device 81) capable of executing specific notification corresponding to the identification result by the destination identification means by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) function to execute, function to execute special notification processing by main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and starts the revolving body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the revolving body stops, In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, there is a first specific game state that tends to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Since the second specific game state is provided, which is more advantageous as a state included in the first specific game state, the normal game state is shifted to the first specific game state, and the second specific game state is changed. It is possible to achieve game characteristics based on the premise of state transitions that become advantageous in stages, such as aiming, and can be greatly used to improve interest. Moreover, since the second transition lottery to the second specific game state is performed using the specific information acquired in advance by the specific information acquisition means and the lottery result by the lottery means, it is simply a lottery by the lottery means. It is possible to realize a completely different game property from the conventional slot machine, such as the correspondence between the result and the stop result of the revolving body.

Then, there is a case where the specific notification regarding the pre-acquired specific information is executed by a predetermined notification means before the specific lottery for the specific information is performed. By doing so, for example, it is possible to grasp information such as what kind of result the lottery result in the game will be to win the second transition lottery, and then to face the lottery of the game. . Therefore, regarding the transition lottery to the second specific game state, which is the final goal in the game, such as shifting from the normal game state to the first specific game state and then to the second specific game state, the game is played while providing a strong feeling of excitement. can be performed. Therefore, interest is improved.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the specific information obtaining means is configured to be able to obtain the specific information in the normal game state.

According to the above configuration, the specific information used for the second transition lottery for determining whether to shift to the second specific game state in the first specific game state is changed to the normal game state before the transition to the first specific game state. It is possible to obtain By doing so, in the configuration in which the specific information is acquired in advance and the specific notification of the pre-acquired specific information is performed, the specific notification is not performed despite the situation where the specific notification should be performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the event that the original specific information is not acquired, and the specific information for the second transition lottery is provided before the first specific game state in which the second transition lottery is performed. A novel game property such as acquiring is realized.

Feature E3. Regardless of whether or not the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is used in the second transfer lottery, erasing means (main control unit) capable of erasing the oldest specific information each time a game is played The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, characterized by comprising a function of executing a process of clearing the AT counter C of the execution area AE in the process of step S3401 or the like by the device 101.

According to the above configuration, the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is erased in accordance with the progress of the game. It is clarified that it is not By doing so, it is possible to keep the specific information always up-to-date in the configuration in which the specific information is acquired in advance and then used in the second transfer lottery. Therefore, depending on the timing (game) at which the second transition lottery is held, the specific information changes from moment to moment. Until the timing of transition to the first specific game state, the player can be involved in the game, thereby making the game more serious and improving the interest of the game.

Feature E4. The specific notification execution means, when performing the second transition lottery using the predetermined specific information as the specific notification, the lottery result by the lottery means that is the second transition result or is likely to be the second transition result. The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that it is possible to execute notification corresponding to .

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp from the specific notification what kind of result the lottery result by the lottery means is likely to be the second transition result or is likely to be the second transition result for the acquired specific information. By doing so, the lottery result in each game attracts more interest than the benefits corresponding to the result, and the game is more interesting.

Feature E5. A first game state (normal game state, first BB state, fourth RT state A) and a second game state (either BB state, A second BB state and a fourth RT state B) are set,
The second transition lottery means can execute the second transition lottery using the specific information and the special result as a lottery result by the lottery means,
State notification (status display) including information indicating in which of the first game state and the second game state the specific information to be the target of the specific notification should be the target of the second transition lottery. Feature E1 characterized by comprising means (function for executing status display start processing and status display update processing by display control device 81, function for executing special notification processing by main control device 101) capable of The game machine according to any one of E4.

According to the above configuration, the player can grasp whether or not the game state transition should be caused from the state notification in addition to the specific notification regarding the specific information to be the target of the second transition lottery. . By doing so, it is possible to shift from the normal game state to the first specific game state, and to receive the second transition lottery for whether or not to cause the transition to the second specific game state. Furthermore, an element such as whether the second transition lottery should be received in the first game state or the second game state is added, and the probability of winning the second transition lottery can change moment by moment depending on the transition of each state. In such a complicated game, the understanding can be assisted. As a result, even a player who is not familiar with the game can enjoy the game while easily understanding the complex game characteristics.

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to feature E5, characterized by comprising means (a function of executing a status display update process by the display control device 81) capable of updating the status notification according to the progress of the game.

According to the above configuration, in a game in which the probability of winning the second transition lottery may change from moment to moment depending on the transition of each state, the state notification is updated in accordance with the progress of the game. By doing so, it is possible to further enhance the effect of assisting the understanding of the game by the state notification.

Feature E7. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (1st BB winning, 2nd BB winning), and the game state is changed to a special game state by stopping the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result at the effective position. Equipped with special state transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by main controller 101) for transitioning to game state (first BB state, second BB state),
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the specific notification execution means executes the specific notification when a lottery result by the lottery means becomes the transition result.

According to the above configuration, a so-called bonus is set as a result of shifting the game state to the special state, and when the bonus is won, the specific notification is performed. By doing so, the game property aiming at bonus winning is added to the game property of shifting from the normal game state to the first specific game state and further to the second specific game state, and the second specific game state is added. Interest is improved while associating both game features, such as a specific notification indicating the ease of transition to a game state is performed when a bonus is won.

Feature E8. The lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (1st BB winning, 2nd BB winning), and the game state is changed to a special game state by stopping the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result at the effective position. Special state transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by main controller 101) for transitioning to game state (first BB state, second BB state);
Means (a function of carrying over a bonus winning flag carried over by the main controller 101) capable of retaining the information that the transition result is won until the symbol combination for transition stops at the effective position;
When the second transition lottery based on the specific information is executed in the game during the special game state, the result of the second transition lottery does not become the second transition result or is unlikely to become the second transition result. When specified by the destination specifying means, a means (delayed winning display by the display control device 81) capable of notifying predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) not to stop the pattern combination for transition function to execute processing to perform) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, a so-called bonus is set as a transition result that the gaming state transitions to a special state, and when the bonus is won, the second transition lottery is performed based on the specific information acquired in advance. , when it is specified that the second transition result will not occur during the bonus state or that the second transition result is unlikely to occur, a notification is made to prevent the transition to the bonus state. In this way, in the configuration in which the specific information is consumed and updated as needed, if the transition to the bonus state is delayed until the specific information that tends to result in the second transition result in the bonus state is acquired, Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of expectation of the second transition result.

Feature E9. The destination specifying means is characterized in that it is possible to specify the specified specified information in the first specified game state before the specified specified information becomes the target of the second shift lottery. A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8.

According to the above configuration, in a game such as shifting from the normal game state to the first specific game state and then to the second specific game state, in the first specific game state, it is determined whether to shift to the second specific game state. Part of the information about the second transfer lottery can be grasped by the specific notification. That is, by winning the first transition lottery, the destination identification means performs destination identification, and the second transition lottery is notified of the destination. By doing so, a game to shift to the second specific game state through a plurality of stages, such as shifting from the normal game state to the first specific game state and moving from the first specific game state to the second specific game state. It is possible to make a specific notification within a range that does not violate the significance of sexuality.

Feature E10. Said destination specifying means, before said predetermined specific information becomes a target of said second transition lottery, in said normal game state before shifting to said first specific game state, said predetermined specific information The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, characterized in that it is possible to specify the .

According to the above configuration, in the game such as shifting from the normal game state to the first specific game state and then to the second specific game state, in the normal game state, the second determination of whether to shift to the second specific game state Part of the information about the shift lottery can be grasped by the specific notification. In other words, if it is possible to shift to the first specific game state, it is possible to grasp the contents such as whether the transition to the second specific game state can occur before the transition to the first specific game state. be. By doing so, in a gaming machine that undergoes a stepwise transition as described above, whether the transition to the second specific game state occurs even if the transition to the first specific game state does not actually occur , etc., and the player's desire to play can be aroused.

Feature E11. The gaming machine according to feature E10, wherein the specific notification executing means can execute the specific notification before the lottery result of the first transition lottery becomes the first transition result.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of feature E9, the specific notification is before the transition to the first specific game state, and can be performed before winning the lottery for transition to the first specific game state. By doing so, it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the normal game state which is the starting point in the game such as shifting from the normal game state to the first specific game state and then to the second specific game state.

Feature E12. As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, and each of the stop operation means is in the first stop operation mode. and a second result in which a prize is established when operated in a different second stop operation mode,
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined notification means (the first display on the instruction monitor 68) informs the mode notification (push order notification) regarding the operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode. (segment N1 to seventh display segment N7) executable mode notification means (function to execute the pushing process by the main controller 101),
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E11, wherein the second specific game state is a state in which mode notification can be executed by the mode notification means.

According to the above configuration, the transition to the second specific game state in which the degree of advantage for the player can be changed by causing the transition to the second specific game state that generates the navigation of the stop operation mode is performed. The specific information obtained in advance is used for the second transition lottery to determine whether or not to generate the . In this way, it is possible to create novel game features such as pre-acquisition of specific information for the lottery for the game using navigation in the stop operation mode.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
with
A first game state (for example, normal game state) and a second game state (for example, second 1BB state, 2nd BB state, 4th RT state A and 4th RT state B) are set,
A gaming machine comprising game state transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing and RT state processing by the main control device 101) for shifting from the first game state to the second game state based on a predetermined trigger, ,
Specific information acquisition means (function for executing random number acquisition processing in main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in main controller 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
Using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the special result of the lottery results of the lottery means, a specific lottery to determine whether or not to cause a specific event (shift to AT mode) is performed. Specific lottery means to be executed (function to execute AT mode transition lottery by main controller 101);
Specific execution means (main a function of executing processing for shifting to the AT mode by the control device 101;
In a specific situation, which is a situation before the transition from the first game state to the second game state becomes possible, the second game state is entered based on the specific information stored in the specific information storage means. A specific notification execution means (a special image is displayed in the pending display process by the display control device 81) that can execute the specific notification related to the specific lottery when the shift occurs by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) function to execute processing, function to execute special notification processing by main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and starts the revolving body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the revolving body stops, In a so-called slot machine in which if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a privilege is given by the privilege granting means, the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means are stored. Since a specific lottery is performed to determine whether or not to cause a specific event using the specific information stored in the means, the conventional method of simply associating the lottery result of the lottery means with the stopping result of the orbiting body is used. A game property completely different from that of a slot machine is realized.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the first game state and the second game state are provided with different probabilities that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be a special result, and it is possible to shift from the first game state to the second game state. In the specific situation which is the previous situation, the specific notification regarding the specific lottery executed in the second game state is executed by the predetermined notification means based on the acquired specific information. By doing so, for example, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the specific lottery will be advantageous by shifting to the second game state and the lottery content of each game will be different before the shift to the second game state. etc., the playability of the first game state is dramatically enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve interest.

Feature F2. The specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification as notification of a plurality of the specific information when the specific lottery is performed in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature F1.

According to the above configuration, when the specific lottery is performed in the second gaming state, the specific notification of the specific information is collectively performed for a plurality of specific information. At the point where the player is expected to concentrate on the game, such as when the player can shift from the first game state to the second game state, if each specific information is notified individually, the player's attention is rather dispersed. Where possible, by adopting the configuration described above, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game by consolidating the points to be noticed. In addition, if a plurality of pieces of specific information are notified collectively as described above, it is possible to equalize the expectations of the games corresponding to the pieces of specific information, and to evenly increase the degree of attention of each game.

Feature F3. The specific notification execution means relates to the degree of expectation of the specific result in any of the specific lotteries performed in the second game state based on the specific information stored by the specific information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, wherein the notification can be executed as the specific notification.

According to the above configuration, when the specific lottery is performed in the second game state in which the transition is possible, the degree of expectation that the specific lottery will result in a specific result is grasped before the transition to the second game state. can be done. By doing so, it is possible for the player to determine whether or not it is preferable to cause the transition to the second game state, and the playability of the specific situation before the transition is enhanced.

Feature F4. The specific notification executing means, among the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, the specific information when the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means using the special result is the specific result. The game machine according to any one of the characteristics F1 to F3, wherein the notification corresponding to the number of is capable of being executed as the specific notification.

According to the above configuration, as long as information as to what kind of specific information will be the specific result in the specific lottery using the special result is stored in advance, it is only necessary to count the number of pieces of the specific information at the time of specific notification. With a relatively simple configuration, it is possible to realize the specific notification before the transition to the second game state.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to feature F4, wherein the specific notification executing means can execute the specific notification based on the probability that the lottery result of the lottery means will be the special result in the second game state.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is performed based on not only the number of specific information that becomes the specific result in the specific lottery using the special result, but also the winning probability of the special result. By doing so, it is possible to predict in advance to some extent what probability a special result will actually be obtained in the second game state and whether a specific lottery using the specific information will result in a specific result.

Feature F6. As the second game state, a first specific state (fourth RT state A) and a second specific state (fourth RT state B) are set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, wherein the first specific state and the second specific state have different probabilities that the lottery result of the lottery means will be the special result.

According to the above configuration, if the winning probability of the special result given to the specific lottery differs, the probability of obtaining the specific result in the specific lottery may also differ. In such a configuration, since the specific notification execution means performs the specific notification when the specific lottery is performed in the first specific state or the second specific state, it depends on which specific state the transition is made to. It becomes possible for the player to grasp the contents of the specific lottery, which may have different probabilities of obtaining the specific result, before the state transition.

Feature F7. As the special results, a first special result (cherry replay) and a second special result (watermelon replay) are provided,
In the first specific state, the lottery result by the lottery means is more likely to be the first special result than the second special result,
The gaming machine according to feature F6, wherein in the second specific state, the lottery result by the lottery means is more likely to be the second special result than the first special result.

According to the above configuration, when the transition to the first specific state occurs, the specific lottery based on the first special result is likely to be performed, and when the transition to the second specific state occurs, the specific lottery based on the second special result is performed. becomes easier. Then, the specific state to be shifted differs depending on whether the specific information corresponding to the first special result is acquired or the specific information corresponding to the second special result is acquired. By doing so, it is possible to suitably realize game characteristics such as changing the transition destination of the game state depending on the relationship with the pre-obtained specific information.

Feature F8. When the specific lottery is performed using the first special result and the first specific information of the specific information, the specific result is obtained, and the first specific result of the first special result and the first specific information is obtained. While it is set so that the specific result is not obtained when the specific lottery is performed using the second specific information different from the information,
The specific result is obtained when the specific lottery is performed using the second special result and the second specific information, and the specific lottery is performed using the second special result and the first specific information. The gaming machine according to feature F7, characterized in that the game machine is set so as not to result in the specified result when the game is played.

According to the above configuration, depending on whether the pre-obtained special information is the first specific information or the second specific information, the results of the specific lottery for the first special result and the second special result are determined. become different. With such a configuration, the type of specific state to be shifted to differs depending on which specific information is acquired, and the importance of specific notification is further enhanced.

Feature F9. The gaming machine according to any one of features F6 to F8, wherein in the specific situation, transition to either the first specific state or the second specific state is possible.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to shift to any of the specific states in the specific situation in which the specific notification is made. It can be grasped from the specific notification.

Feature F10. As the predetermined trigger, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result, thereby making it possible to shift to the first specific state, and the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second transition result, thereby making the state second. It is a configuration that enables transition to a specific state,
The gaming machine according to feature F9, wherein the lottery result by the lottery means is a duplicate result of the first transition result and the second transition result.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature F9.

Feature F11. The gaming machine according to feature F9 or feature F10, wherein a player can select which of the first specified state and the second specified state to shift to in the specified situation.

According to the above configuration, the player can select which specific state to shift to according to the specific notification in the specific situation. As a result, regarding the specific lottery using the specific information acquired in advance, the player can select and shift the specific state of the transition destination after grasping the contents of the specific lottery in advance to some extent.

Feature F12. As the predetermined trigger, the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first transition result, so that the transition to the first specific state becomes possible, and the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second transition result, so that the second transition result is obtained. It is a configuration that enables transition to a specific state,
A result of overlap between the first transition result and the second transition result is provided as a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the duplicate result, the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode to cause a transition to the first specific state, and the stop operation means is operated in the first specific state. The gaming machine according to feature F11, wherein the transition to the second specific state is caused by being operated in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature F11.

Feature F13. The predetermined opportunity is generated when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined transition result (transition replay 1 win, transition replay 2 win),
The specific notification execution means is the second game when the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined transition result in the game before the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined transition result. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F12, characterized in that the specific notification regarding the specific lottery in the state can be executed (for example, state A effect, state B effect, and state C effect in FIG. 127). .

According to the above configuration, the specific situation is the situation before the transition to the second game state becomes possible, and before the transition becomes possible, the specific notification when the transition becomes possible is performed. will be taken. By doing so, it is possible to obtain a predetermined transition result that causes the transition to the second game state while grasping whether or not it is advantageous for the player to be able to transition to the second game state. can be expected.

Feature F14. The specific information when the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means using the special result is the specific result is common to the first game state and the second game state (for example, FIG. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F13, characterized in that the AT counter C) is associated with 116 cherry replays and watermelon replays.

According to the above configuration, among the parameters of the specific lottery, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means used for the specific lottery will be a special result is different between the first game state and the second game state, but the specific information is The first game state and the second game state are common. By doing so, it is possible to make the winning probability of the specific lottery different without associating the specific information (lottery table) with each game state. As a result, when performing the specific notification, it is possible to previously perform the specific notification regarding the specific lottery with a relatively simple configuration such as grasping the probability of a special result.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
Specific information acquisition means (function for executing random number acquisition processing in main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in main controller 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
A specific lottery means ( A function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main controller 101);
Specific execution means (main a function of executing processing for shifting to the AT mode by the control device 101;
with
As the lottery results by the lottery means, there are high winning results (for example, cherry replay in cherry RT) and low winning results (for example, watermelon play and strong cherry in cherry RT) in which the winning probability is relatively high and low in a predetermined game state. is set and
For the predetermined specific information stored in the specific information storage means, information corresponding to the result of the specific lottery when the specific lottery is conducted using the high winning result and the predetermined specific information, A gaming machine characterized in that it comprises destination specifying means (a function of executing a specified notification process by a main controller 101) that can specify the specified specified information before it becomes a target of the specified lottery.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and starts the revolving body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the revolving body stops, In a so-called slot machine in which if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a privilege is given by the privilege granting means, the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means are stored. Since a specific lottery is performed to determine whether or not to cause a specific event using the specific information stored in the means, the conventional method of simply associating the lottery result of the lottery means with the stopping result of the orbiting body is used. A game property completely different from that of a slot machine is realized.

Moreover, in the above configuration, with regard to the predetermined specific information obtained in advance, the information corresponding to the result of the specific lottery assuming that the player wins a relatively easy-to-win high winning result among the lottery results of each game is the information corresponding to the predetermined specific information. is identified prior to being subject to a specific lottery. By doing so, it is possible to predict the result of the specific lottery performed using the specific information obtained in advance and the lottery result of each game with a certain degree of accuracy. Therefore, for example, it is possible to change the notification content based on the prediction result, or change the lottery content based on the prediction result. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the high winning result is a result that is most likely to trigger the specific result among the lottery results of the lottery means in the predetermined game state.

According to the above configuration, the result of the lottery by the lottery means that is the most likely winning opportunity in the specific lottery is the high winning result, and by using such a result to predict the result of the specific lottery, the prediction accuracy is improved. It is possible to

Feature G3. In the predetermined game state, the probability that the specific lottery is performed using the low winning result is higher than the probability that the specific lottery will be the specific result when the high winning result is used. The gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2, wherein the probability of obtaining the specified result is higher.

According to the above configuration, a specific lottery using a low winning result has a higher probability of obtaining a specific result than a high winning result. On the other hand, a high winning result is more likely to be a lottery result by the lottery means, and as a result, the chances of being selected for a specific lottery increase. By predicting the result of the specific lottery by using the high winning result among the lottery results having such a relationship, it becomes easy to obtain a result close to an actually possible result.

Feature G4. It has a first game state (normal game state) and a second game state (fourth RT state) as game states,
The predetermined game state is the second game state,
The high winning result is a result of different winning probabilities between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
Characteristic feature G1, characterized in that said destination specifying means can specify, in said first gaming state, information corresponding to the result of said particular lottery when said particular lottery is performed in said second gaming state. The game machine according to any one of G3.

According to the above configuration, the specific lottery is specified by the destination specifying means while taking into consideration the transition of the game state in which the winning probability is different. By doing so, it is possible to accurately predict the result of the specific lottery while taking into consideration the transition of the game state.

Feature G5. The high winning result is
Among the lottery results by the lottery means in the second game state, the lottery result by the specific lottery is the most likely to be the trigger to become the specific result,
The gaming machine according to feature G4, wherein among the lottery results of the lottery means in the first game state, the lottery result of the specific lottery is not the most likely result to become the specific result.

According to the above configuration, in the second game state, the lottery result by the lottery means that is the most likely winning opportunity in the specific lottery is the high winning result, and the result of the specific lottery is predicted using such a result. , it is possible to improve the prediction accuracy. On the other hand, in the first game state before transition to the second game state, it is not the lottery result by the lottery means that is the most likely winning opportunity in the specific lottery. That is, while the prediction of the result of the specific lottery by the first specifying means can be performed with high accuracy in the second game state, the accuracy in the first game state is lower than that in the second game state. . In this way, by customizing the specification by the first specifying means for the second game state, it becomes easier to improve the prediction accuracy as compared with general-purpose prediction means.

Feature G6. When the specific lottery is conducted using the high winning result and the predetermined specific information based on the identification result by the destination identification means, a specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific lottery is sent to a predetermined notification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized by comprising specific notification execution means (function for executing special notification processing by main control device 101) executable by the main controller 101).

According to the above configuration, the player can grasp the prediction result of the specific lottery by the destination specifying means, and can play the game while grasping the prediction result. By doing so, it is possible to reflect the prediction of the specific lottery in the game.

Feature G7. The specific notification execution means, when the specific lottery is performed using the high winning result and the predetermined specific information, according to the number of times the specific lottery result becomes the specific result, the specific notification The game machine according to feature G6, characterized in that it is possible to vary the notification modes.

In the above configuration, when a specific lottery is performed using a highly winning result that is likely to be won in a predetermined game state and specific information obtained in advance, the number of times that the specific result is likely to be obtained is specified, and the number of times is specified. Accordingly, the notification mode of the specific notification is made different. By doing so, for example, if specific notification is performed in a notification mode corresponding to a large number of times that the specific result is likely to occur, it becomes possible to predict that the specific result is likely to occur thereafter. If specific notification is performed in a notification mode corresponding to the small number of times that the result will be obtained, it becomes possible to predict that it is difficult to obtain the specific result thereafter.

Feature G8. When the specific lottery is performed using the high winning result and the predetermined specific information, the specific notification executing means specifies that the result of the specific lottery will be the specific result by the destination specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature G6 or feature G7, characterized in that the specific notification can be executed so that the game corresponding to the predetermined specific information is difficult to distinguish from the game corresponding to other specific information. .

According to the above configuration, if a high lottery result is obtained, it becomes difficult to identify a game that is expected to have a specific result. By doing so, it becomes difficult to understand which game should have a high lottery result, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention over the entire game that is the target of the specific notification.

Feature G9. When the specific lottery is performed using the high winning result and the predetermined specific information, the specific notification executing means specifies that the result of the specific lottery will be the specific result by the destination specifying means. The gaming machine according to feature G6 or feature G7, characterized in that the specific notification can be executed so that the game corresponding to the predetermined specific information can be distinguished from the game corresponding to other specific information. .

According to the above configuration, it is possible to identify a game that is expected to have a specific result if a high lottery result is obtained. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand which game should have a high lottery result, and it is possible to intensively increase the attention of the game.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
Specific random number acquisition means (function for executing random number acquisition processing in main controller 101) for acquiring a specific random number (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Specific random number storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in main control device 101) capable of storing the specific random number acquired by the specific random number acquisition means;
A specific lottery means ( A function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main controller 101);
Specific execution means (main a function of executing processing for shifting to the AT mode by the control device 101;
Arithmetic processing using a predetermined specific random number stored by the specific random number storage means and another specific random number different from the predetermined specific random number and stored by the specific random number storage means A specific calculation means (function for executing the integration process of the AT counter C by the main control device 101) capable of executing
Specific notification execution means (function of executing integrated value information processing by display control device 81) capable of executing specific notification corresponding to the calculation result by the specific calculation means by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) ,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and starts the revolving body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the revolving body stops, In a so-called slot machine where if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a privilege is given by the privilege granting means, the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific random number acquired by the specific random number acquisition means are stored. Since the specific random number stored in the means and the specific lottery to determine whether or not to cause the specific event is performed, conventional methods such as simply associating the lottery result by the lottery means with the stop result of the orbiting body are used. A game property completely different from that of a slot machine is realized.

Moreover, in the above configuration, after the arithmetic processing of the stored predetermined specific random numbers and the other specific random numbers is performed by the specific calculation means, the specific notification corresponding to the calculation result is performed by the predetermined notification means. Sometimes. Arithmetic processing specifically includes integration processing, averaging processing, subtraction processing, etc. In a lottery using numerical information (specific random numbers), the result of the arithmetic processing predicts the success or failure of the lottery. It can be useful information. More specifically, for example, if the numerical information with a smaller value (the numerical information with a larger value) is more likely to win a prize, the result of the integration process is very useful in determining whether or not it is easier to win overall. it will be helpful. Also, for example, if the numerical information is a predetermined number, it is possible to win, and the averaging process is very useful in determining whether or not the number is close to the predetermined number. Furthermore, for example, if the result of the subtraction process is a small value, it is determined that similar numerical information has been obtained, and if the numerical information corresponds to a win, there is a high possibility that they will be in a row. (If it corresponds to an error, it is likely to be an error.) Conversely, if the difference in the subtraction process is large, the variation in the acquired numerical information is large, and there is a possibility that it will be repeated. The result of the subtraction process can also be useful information in predicting the game contents after that, such as the possibility of winning in either one of the two.

Therefore, regarding a specific lottery using a specific random number, it is possible to predict in advance whether or not it is easy to win the specific lottery from the result of arithmetic processing, etc. Information that can be useful for the player to proceed with the game. is provided, and the amusement of the game is improved.

Feature H2. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the specific calculation means is capable of performing, as the calculation process, integration processing of the predetermined specific random number and the other specific random number.

According to the above configuration, by setting the integration process with a relatively low processing load among the computation processes, it is possible to use the computation result for predicting the result of the specific lottery while avoiding an increase in the processing load. It becomes possible. Incidentally, for example, in a configuration in which the larger the specific random number is, the easier it is to win the specific lottery, or the smaller the specific random number is, the easier it is to win the specific lottery. , which is very useful information for predicting the likelihood of winning a specific lottery with either a predetermined specific random number or another specific random number.

Feature H3. The gaming machine according to feature H2, wherein the specific random number having a smaller value is more likely to result in the specific result in the specific lottery, or the specific random number having a larger value is more likely to result in the specific result in the specific lottery. .

By applying the configuration of the characteristic H2 to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantage of performing the accumulation processing as the arithmetic processing can be utilized.

Feature H4. In the specific lottery performed using a first result (for example, cherry replay) as the lottery result of the lottery means, the smaller the specific random number, the more likely the specific result is to be obtained, and the first result is the lottery result of the lottery means. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein in the specific lottery performed using a second result (eg, watermelon play) different from the above, the larger the specific random number, the more likely the specific result is to be obtained.

According to the above configuration, depending on the game result, the larger the specific random number, the more likely the specific result will be obtained, or the smaller the specific random number, the more likely the specific result will be obtained. Unexpected events are less likely to occur.

Feature H5. A first game state (fourth RT state A) and a second game state (fourth RT state B) are provided as game states,
In the first game state, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first result is higher than the probability that the lottery result will be the second result,
Characteristic feature H4, characterized in that in the second game state, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the second result is set to be higher than the probability that the lottery result will be the first result. game machine.

According to the above configuration, depending on the game state, it is possible to expect a specific result as the result of the integration process becomes larger, or to expect a specific result as the value of the integration process becomes smaller. become. By doing so, in the configuration in which the specific notification corresponding to the result of the accumulation process is performed, it is possible to grasp the game state to be shifted (to be shifted) from the specific notification. Therefore, in the game using the specific lottery using the specific random number acquired in advance, the element of the game state is added, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature H6. The specific random number is configured to be updated within an update range from the initial value to the maximum value,
Characteristically characterized in that when the specific random number is a value included in a specific range (for example, 1 to 13) included in the update range, the specific lottery is likely to result in the specific result. The game machine according to any one of H1 to H5.

According to the above configuration, if the specific random number is a value included in the specific range, it is set so that the specific result is likely to be obtained. With a configuration that performs arithmetic processing such as the above, it becomes possible to determine whether or not each acquired specific random number is likely to be won with a relatively simple configuration. Therefore, it is possible to make the specific notification of the result of the arithmetic processing more useful.

Feature H7. The gaming machine according to feature H6, wherein the specific calculation means is capable of counting the number of the specific random numbers having values within the specific range as the calculation process.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a specific random number within a specific range tends to result in a specific result, the specific calculation means performs a process of counting the number of specific random numbers within the specific range as the calculation process. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the number of specific random numbers that are likely to result in a specific result from the specific notification, among the specific random numbers stored in the specific random number storage means.

Feature H8. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7, wherein the specific calculation means executes the calculation process for all the specific random numbers stored in the specific random number storage means.

In the above configuration, all the specific random numbers are subjected to the arithmetic processing, instead of picking up predetermined ones of the acquired specific random numbers and performing the arithmetic processing. By doing so, it becomes difficult to understand which specific random number the specific notification corresponds to, and as a result, the degree of attention is evenly distributed to all the games corresponding to these specific random numbers. can be increased.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
Specific information acquisition means (function for executing random number acquisition processing in main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106f in main controller 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
A specific lottery means ( A function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main controller 101);
Specific execution means (main a function of executing processing for shifting to the AT mode by the control device 101;
Based on the predetermined specific information stored in the specific information storage means, it corresponds to a specific state in which it is easy to win the specific lottery before the predetermined specific information becomes the target of the specific lottery. Specific notification execution means (function for executing CZ mode processing by display control device 81) that can be executed by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65), and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means performs a lottery for the game and starts the revolving body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the revolving body stops, In a so-called slot machine in which if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a privilege is given by the privilege granting means, the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means are stored. Since a specific lottery is performed to determine whether or not to cause a specific event using the specific information stored in the means, the conventional method of simply associating the lottery result of the lottery means with the stopping result of the orbiting body is used. A game property completely different from that of a slot machine is realized.

Moreover, in the above configuration, on the basis of the predetermined specific information obtained in advance, before the predetermined specific information becomes the target of the specific lottery, the notification corresponding to the specific state in which it is easy to win the specific lottery is performed. may be done. By doing so, it is possible to perceive in advance that the specific result is likely to occur in the game property in which the specific lottery is performed using the predetermined specific information obtained in advance, and the lottery means executed every game. It is possible to contribute to the creation of a new game property that is different from the game property using the lottery result of .

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the specific information acquisition means acquires the specific information regardless of the lottery result of the lottery means in the game in which the acquisition condition is satisfied.

According to the above configuration, in a game using the specific information acquired in advance, the lottery result of each game is related to the lottery result of the game when performing the specific lottery, but the lottery result of the game when the specific information is acquired in advance. The result will be irrelevant. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the specific information acquired in advance is grasped by the lottery result of each game, and it is possible to increase the unexpectedness of the specific state notified based on the specific information. becomes.

Feature I3. Characteristic I1 or characterized in that the specific notification execution means performs notification of the specific state based on predetermined specific information stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of the lottery result of the lottery means; The gaming machine according to feature I2.

According to the above configuration, based on the specific information obtained in advance, in the game in which the specific state in which it is easy to win the specific lottery is notified, the lottery result of each game is the lottery result of the game when the specific lottery is performed. Although involved, the lottery result of the game is not involved in the notification of the specific state. By doing this, depending on the lottery result of each game, an event that the specific state cannot be expected does not occur, and it is possible to increase the unexpectedness of the notified specific state.

Feature I4. Any one of characteristics I1 to I3, wherein the specific notification executing means can notify the specific state based on a plurality of predetermined specific information stored in the specific information storage means. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, the notification of the specific state is performed based on a plurality of pieces of specific information, instead of the notification of the specific state simply by acquiring one piece of specific information that makes it easier to win the specific lottery. By doing so, it is possible to increase the significance of providing a state in which it is easy to win the specific lottery as the specific state, and to expect an effect of improving the degree of attention over a plurality of games.

Feature I5. The specific information storage means has a configuration capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information,
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, wherein the specific notification executing means performs notification of the specific state so that the game can be continued for the predetermined number of times or more.

According to the above configuration, information such as which of the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is more likely to win the specific lottery becomes difficult to understand, and the information is not obtained in advance at the time when the notification of the specific state is started. It is possible to draw attention to all of the specific information that is available.

Feature I6. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result, the specific information in which the lottery result of the specific lottery is the specific result is common between the specific state and the other state. A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5.

According to the above configuration, even if the specific state is set, the probability of winning the specific lottery does not increase. done. By doing so, it is possible to create a novel state that is completely different from the conventional so-called chance zone in which the probability of winning a predetermined lottery is high.

Feature I7. As game states, a normal game state (normal section) and a first specific game state (advantageous section) that is likely to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state (AT mode) that is more likely to be advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific game state is set,
In the normal game state, first transition lottery means for executing a first transition lottery for determining whether to transition to the first specific game state (function for executing an advantageous zone transition lottery by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result (advantageous section winning) corresponding to shifting to the first specific game state, the first specific game First specific transition means for transitioning to the state (function for executing processing for transitioning to the advantageous section by the main controller 101);
Second transition lottery means for executing a second transition lottery for whether or not to transition to the second specific game state (function for executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is the second transition result (AT mode winning) corresponding to shifting to the second specific game state, the second specific game Second specific transition means for transitioning to the state (function for executing processing for transitioning to AT mode by main controller 101);
with
The specific lottery means executes the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means as the specific lottery, and the specific event is to cause a transition to the second specific game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I6, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the first specific game state is provided which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the second specific game state which is more advantageous as a state included in the first specific game state is provided. Therefore, in the game property premised on the state transition that becomes advantageous in stages, such as moving from the normal game state to the first specific game state and aiming for the second specific game state, the second specific game state It is possible to realize a game that has not existed in the past, such as performing a lottery for transition to a game based on specific information obtained in advance.

On top of that, by notifying a so-called chance zone as a situation in which it is easy to win the second transition lottery based on the specific information acquired in advance, the conventional method in which the chance zone is set based on the lottery result of the lottery means etc. For example, even if the result of a lottery that would not have been expected in the conventional chance zone becomes a chance zone, regardless of the lottery result of each game, the chance zone will become a chance zone. It is possible to create expectations for the zone (specific state).

Feature I8. The gaming machine according to feature I7, wherein the specific notification executing means can perform notification of the specific state in the normal game state.

According to the above configuration, the notification of the specific state that makes it easier to win the transition lottery to the second specific game state is performed before shifting to the first specific game state in which the transition lottery to the second specific game state is performed. Performed in the normal game state. By doing so, while premised on a game that undergoes a stepwise transition such as moving from the normal game state to the first specific game state and further to the second specific game state, the second specific game in the final stage When it is possible to notify the specific state that the transition to the state is likely to occur in the normal game state at the initial stage, and when the transition to the first specific game state is made in a situation where the transition to the first specific game state has not occurred. A new enjoyment in the normal game state can be provided by playing the game while calculating the contents of the second shift lottery next to .

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature group I to each configuration of feature group A to feature group I detailed above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine as a game machine, 32... Reel as a revolving body, 41... Start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64... Speaker constituting an auxiliary effect part, 65 ... Auxiliary display section constituting an auxiliary effect section, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display device, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 .

Claims (1)

a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of the circulation bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to grant a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
A lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at a predetermined position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, and a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result. a privilege granting means capable of granting
with
A first game state and a second game state in which the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is more likely to stop than in the first game state are set,
Means capable of shifting from the first game state to the second game state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition;
Means capable of shifting from the second game state to the first game state or another game state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition;
a means capable of acquiring specific information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a storage means capable of storing the specific information;
with
The storage means has a configuration capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information,
specific determination means capable of executing a specific determination of causing a specific event by using at least the specific information stored in the storage means and the lottery result of the lottery means;
means capable of causing the specific event when the determination result of the specific determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
with
The end condition can be satisfied in the number of games less than the predetermined number,
The specific determination means uses predetermined specific information acquired in the first game state and stored in the storage means and a lottery result by the lottery means in the second game state to make the specific determination. A game machine characterized by being capable of executing

Images